Student Course Pack - HCC Learning Web
Transcription
Student Course Pack - HCC Learning Web
Sociology 1301 Course Pack Ruth Dunn, M.A. © 2003-2008 All Rights Reserved by the Author. This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by any means, without written permission of the author. Table of Contents INTRODUCTION—WHAT IS SOCIOLOGY? ........................................................................................................................... 4 What Do Sociologists Study? ................................................................................................................................................. 4 Sociology and its Relationship to the Other Social Sciences.................................................................................................. 5 The Institutions of Society...................................................................................................................................................... 6 Key Terms and Concepts for: Introduction—What is Sociology? .............................................................................................. 9 MODULE IA—AN INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY—A BRIEF HISTORY OF SOCIOLOGY................................... 9 The Three Major Sociological Paradigms: Their Origins, the Theorists, Major Concepts, Societal-Level Approach/ Unit of Analysis, Problems/Weaknesses........................................................................................................................................... 15 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of September 11, 2001 Terrorist Attacks ............................................... 16 Some Major Sociological Theorists: Their Paradigms, Their Theories................................................................................ 16 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IA—Introduction to Sociology—A Brief History of Sociology:.................................... 19 MODULE IB—SOCIAL SCIENCE RESEARCH AND METHODOLOGY........................................................................... 19 The Scientific Method: The Steps and Sub-Steps Explained................................................................................................ 21 Model of the Experimental Method...................................................................................................................................... 25 An Extremely Simplified Model of the Hawthorne Experiment .......................................................................................... 26 Key Terms and Concepts for Module IB: Social Science Research Design and Methodology................................................. 29 MODULE IIA—CULTURE.......................................................................................................................................................... 29 A Few English Words with Non-English Roots ................................................................................................................... 31 Examples of Difference in a Few Cultural Universals.......................................................................................................... 32 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIA—Culture ................................................................................................................ 36 MODULE IIB—SOCIALIZATION ............................................................................................................................................. 36 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of the Socialization Process ................................................................... 39 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIB—Socialization........................................................................................................ 39 MODULE IIC—SOCIAL INTERACTION AND SOCIAL STRUCTURE ............................................................................. 39 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Views of the Social Structure ...................................................................................... 41 Karl Marx’s View of the Social Structure ............................................................................................................................ 41 Six Types of Societies ........................................................................................................................................................ 44 Four Theories of Sociostructural Change ............................................................................................................................. 45 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Groups ................................................................................................................... 46 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIC—Social Interaction and Social Structure .............................................................. 47 MODULE IID—GROUPS AND BUREAUCRACIES ............................................................................................................... 47 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Bureaucracies .................................................................................... 49 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IID—Groups and Bureaucracies ................................................................................. 49 MODULE IIE—DEVIANCE ........................................................................................................................................................ 49 The Flea .............................................................................................................................................................................. 50 The Second Coming ........................................................................................................................................................... 53 Liberty Needs Glasses ....................................................................................................................................................... 54 Merton’s Typology of Deviant Responses to Anomie.......................................................................................................... 55 Sykes and Matza’s Techniques of Neutralization of Deviance............................................................................................. 56 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Deviance ............................................................................................ 57 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIE—Deviance.............................................................................................................. 57 MODULE IIIA—STRATIFICATION ......................................................................................................................................... 58 Model of C. Wright Mill’s Power Elite Theory.................................................................................................................... 61 Single Female Head of Household Indicating the Feminization of Poverty..................................................................... 63 Child Support Payments to Custodial Parents-1997 ......................................................................................................... 63 Per Cent Distribution of Various Socioeconomic Stratification Data by Race/Ethnicity (1997)...................................... 65 Poverty Thresholds in 2000 by Size of Family and Number of Related Children Under 18............................................ 66 1990 and 2000 Poverty Level Differences among Specified Groups ............................................................................... 66 1992 Business Ownership Statistics By Race................................................................................................................... 66 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 2 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Share of Aggregate Income by Quintile ........................................................................................................................... 67 From U.S. Census Bureau No. 216 Educational Attainment by Race/Ethnicity, and Sex 1960-2000 (College Graduate or Higher) by Percent............................................................................................................................................................ 67 Dropout Rates by Race/Ethnicity and Sex for Selected Years and Percent Change......................................................... 68 Dropout Rates by Race/Ethnicity and Sex for Selected Years and Percent Change......................................................... 68 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Stratification/Inequality ..................................................................... 69 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIA—Stratification in the U.S...................................................................................... 69 MODULE IIIB—GLOBAL STRATIFICATION ....................................................................................................................... 70 If the World Were A Village of 100 People ......................................................................................................................... 71 Four Statistical Measures of Inequality in the World ......................................................................................................... 73 20th Century World Population Growth by Decade (in Billions) ........................................................................................ 73 Comparison of Richest to Poorest Countries Based on Selected Demographic Characteristics ......................................... 74 The 62 Poorest Countries in the World................................................................................................................................. 75 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIB—Global Stratification .......................................................................................... 77 MODULE IIIC—STRATIFICATION BY RACE AND ETHNICITY ..................................................................................... 77 Racial/Ethnic Discrimination in America—1776-1998........................................................................................................ 77 Overcoming Discrimination in America—1808-2000.......................................................................................................... 80 Robert Merton’s Typology of Bigotry (Prejudice and Discrimination)................................................................................ 80 Sources of Immigration by Time Period and Country of Origin, in Percent of Total........................................................... 82 Genocidal Monsters and Their Crimes .............................................................................................................................. 85 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIC—Stratification by Race and Ethnicity .................................................................. 86 MODULE IIID—STRATIFICATION BY SEX AND GENDER .............................................................................................. 87 Percent of all Workers Paid Hourly Rates—By Selected Characteristics-1997 ............................................................ 90 1997 Employment Status of Civilian Non-Institutionalized Population by Race/Ethnicity and Sex ............................. 90 Wages Earned in Occupational Categories By Sex—1996 ............................................................................................ 91 From 1997 Economic Census, U.S. Census Bureau Comparison of Women-Owned Firms to All U.S. Firms ............... 91 Percent Difference between Women-Owned Businesses and All Businesses: 1997 and 1992 ........................................ 91 Comparison of Median Weekly Full Time Earnings by Sex and Race—1996 .............................................................. 92 From U.S. Census Bureau No. 216 Educational Attainment by Race/Ethnicity, and Sex 1960-2000.............................. 92 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIID—Stratification by Sex and Gender....................................................................... 93 MODULE IIIE—STRATIFICATION BY AGE ......................................................................................................................... 93 Some Basic Data Concerning the American Elderly-1995 ............................................................................................ 98 Life Expectancy in Years by Race And Sex 1940-1999 with Projections for 2005 and 2010 ........................................ 99 Number of Men per 100 Women by Age for Those 65 Years of Age and Older 1990 and 2000 .................................. 99 Population 65 Years and Over by Age-2000 .................................................................................................................... 99 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIE—Stratification by Age ........................................................................................ 100 MODULE III-F—STRATIFICATION: INEQUALITY BY DISABILITY ........................................................................... 100 MODULE IVA—THE FAMILY AND MARRIAGE (COMPILED AND WRITTEN PRIMARILY BY DR. LUIS SALINAS) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 103 MODULE IVB: EDUCATION (COMPILED AND WRITTEN BY DR. LUIS SALINAS).................................................. 104 MODULE IVC—RELIGION...................................................................................................................................................... 110 Largest World Religions—97% of All Largest World Religions ..................................................................................... 113 Remaining 3% of All Other Largest World Religions ...................................................................................................... 113 Largest Denominations in the World ................................................................................................................................ 113 Largest Religions in the United States .............................................................................................................................. 113 Largest Denominations in the United States ..................................................................................................................... 114 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Religion ........................................................................................... 114 Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IVC—Religion............................................................................................................ 115 MODULE IVD: LAW, POLITICS, AND GOVERNMENT (COMPILED AND WRITTEN BY DR. LUIS SALINAS) .. 115 CONCLUSION ............................................................................................................................................................................. 118 INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 119 END NOTES AND REFERENCES............................................................................................................................................ 127 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 3 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Student Course Pack—Fall Semester -2003 Introduction to Sociology—Sociology 1301 Houston Community College System—Ruth Dunn, B.S., M.A., Instructor Introduction—What Is Sociology? Sociology is a social science which studies society (which is defined as people who live in a specific geographic area, interact with each other, and share many elements of culture) and culture (which is defined as the learned set of practices, beliefs, values, norms, and rules for proper behavior as well as the material objects shared by a people). 1 Science is knowledge based on empirical (observable) evidence gained through direct, systematic observation in an attempt to explain causal relationships (cause and effect). 2 Sociology is the scientific study of human behavior in groups; the science of the interaction between society and culture; the science of human responses to human institutions; macro-level and micro-level human interaction; and the reciprocal relationship between the individual and the sociocultural milieu (agency and structure). 3 Sociology, (the word itself comes to us from French philosopher Auguste Comte), is “the study of the bases of social membership. More technically, Sociology is the analysis of the structure of social relationships as constituted by social interaction.” 4 There is, and always has been, some controversy concerning Sociology’s claim to be a science. Indeed, Sociology encompasses the studies of many other disciplines and therefore may be truly thought of as a particular philosophical paradigm 5 aimed at analyzing social structures, social processes, social associations, social bonds, and social connections. However, Sociologists do engage in legitimate scientific research 6 which, though often qualitative, often does incorporate rigorous quantitative methods. Indeed, some Sociologists would argue that research today has become overly quantitative and narrow to the detriment of real understanding of social structures and processes. Nevertheless, Sociology has had, and continues to have a significant impact on the social sciences and society at large. We study Sociology in order to understand human behavior and in order to be able to look at the world in new and different ways. Sociology gives us new eyes, new ways of thinking, new methods of analysis, and a new way of understanding the human condition. Sociology helps us to understand the complex relationships between individuals, and between groups and the broader society in which they live. 7 What Do Sociologists Study? Area of Scientific Study Description Social Sciences The scientific study of human behavior in groups and the social world Culture The values, norms, beliefs, and language of a people, as well as the ways in which a people uses the natural world and makes and uses material objects; the learned cognitions and behaviors of a people The Institutions of Society Values, norms, statuses, roles, groups, and patterns of behavior that address fundamental social needs: Family, Education, Religion, Law/Politics/Government, Economy, Medicine, Media Social Change Those dynamics that cause any given society to exhibit a change in its social structure: technology, prime movers, economic cycles, environmental effects, and social movements Socialization The ways in which we learn how to interact normatively with one another within the context of our culture; the ways in which and the degree to which we learn our culture; the process of becoming human Social Interaction The ways in which people relate to one another Social Structure The form of the institutions of any given society and the mechanisms involved in the changes from one societal form to another; the basis of and patterns of interactions among groups and individuals Groups and Group Behavior The ways in which group behavior differs from individual behavior and the reciprocal relationships between groups and individuals 8 Bureaucracies Large-scale, rational, formal organizations that are a byproduct of industrialization and capitalism, but that have become both the driving and governing force in the industrialized world Deviance Non-normative behavior that defies social conventions; methods of social control; conformity versus non-conformity SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 4 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Area of Scientific Study What Do Sociologists Study? Description Social Problems The scientific study of how things become social problems and how societies construct methodologies of dealing with those problems Criminology The scientific study of crime, punishment, and deviance Stratification The study of inequality; the study of the ways in which master status (race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, disability, and SES—Socioeconomic Status=income + education + occupation) impacts one’s access to the goods of society (wealth, power, and status) on a national as well as a global level Because Sociology is a very broad-based discipline and attempts to study all aspects of human behavior, Sociology also makes a study of the other social sciences. The other social sciences include: Psychology which is the scientific study of individual behavior; (Sociologists study Social Psychology which is the scientific study of the interaction between society and the Sociology and its Relationship to the Other Social Sciences Sociology Social Science Psychology Economics History Geography Political Science Anthropology Demographics (Cross Disciplinary) SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 5 The scientific study of: human behavior in groups, the socio-cultural and socio-structural environment, all other social sciences; culture; human institutions; social change; socialization; macro- and micro-level human social interactions, the social structure; groups and group behavior; bureaucracies and large-scale organizations; deviance; social problems; stratification (inequality); criminology; demographics (the movement of human populations) Area of Scientific Study Sociological Discipline Area of Scientific Study Individual behavior Interaction between the Social Psychology individual and society The ways in which humans Interaction between societies Economic Sociology exchange goods and services and their economic systems Political Economy and the ways in which economics and politics influence the social structure The human past The ways in which the past, Historical Sociology present, and expected/projected future shape the sociocultural environment The reciprocal relationship Environmental Sociology between humans and their physical (both manmade and natural) environments The relationship between humans and their physical The nature of human Urban Sociology (natural and manmade) interaction in an urban environments environment The nature of human Rural Sociology interaction in a rural environment Political processes, The ways in which humans Political Sociology government, leadership, social Social Movements are governed as well as the movements ways in which group behavior Social Change changes government and the ways in which people band together to make such changes Small-scale, pre-literate, preLarge-scale and historical and Cultural Sociology historical societies literate societies and cultures Crime, punishment and Criminology deviance The size, composition, distribution, and changes in human populations © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved individual); Economics which is the scientific study of the ways in which humans make a living and exchange goods and services and includes means of exchange; means of production; markets and market values; (Sociologists study Economic Sociology which is the scientific study of the interaction between societies and their economic systems); History which is the scientific study of the human past; (Sociologists study Historical Sociology which is the study of the ways in which the past, present, and expected future shape the sociocultural milieu); Geography which is the scientific study of the ways in which humans relate to their environment and the ways in which the environment impacts human behavior; (Sociologists study Environmental Sociology, Urban Sociology, and Rural Sociology); Political Science which is the scientific study of political processes and the ways in which humans govern themselves; (Sociologists study Political Sociology and Social Movements which are interested in the ways in which humans are governed as well as the ways in which group behavior changes government and the ways in which people band together to make such changes); Anthropology which is the scientific study of small-scale and prehistorical and preliterate societies and cultures (Sociologists study Historical and Cultural Sociology which generally looks at large-scale and historical and literate societies and cultures, although there is a great deal of overlap between cultural Anthropology and Sociology); Demographics which is the scientific and statistical study of the size, composition, distribution, and changes in human populations, and Criminology which is the scientific study of crime, punishment, and deviance. Sociology is also the scientific study of human institutions (Human Institutions or the Institutions of Society or Social Institutions are relatively enduring clusters of values, norms, social statuses, roles, and groups that address fundamental social needs and include: Family, Education, Religion, Politics/Law/Government, the Economy, Medicine, and Media). Human Institutions or the Institutions of Society or Social Institutions exist in ALL societies even though they manifest themselves differently from society to society. Family is the basic unit of society and the most fundamental of all institutions; Education is the ways in which information considered important to a society or culture is transmitted; Religion is the overarching belief system of a society or culture; Politics, Law, and Government are the methods used to manage and control populations, to determine leadership, to legitimate (make acceptable) the social structure, and as an alternative to war; the Economy is the methods through which the goods of a society are distributed to its members; Medicine is the ways in which people heal themselves or deal with death and disease, and Media which is the mass transmission of information and entertainment, usually for profit 9 The Institutions of Society (Also Called Social Institutions and/or Human Institutions) Institution Definition Forms Sociological Discipline The most basic of all human Nuclear—parents and children The Sociology of Marriage Family institutions; the basic unit of living in their own separate The Sociology of the society. It is within the family that residence (most modern form) Family children are socialized and that Human Sexuality children learn to interact Extended—parents, children, normatively with other humans and other blood or adopted kin living in extremely close proximity (most ancient, most common form) Education The ways in which culturally important information is transmitted; the ways in which people are taught the information and skills necessary to survive in the context of their own culture Blended—parents with children of previous marriages (a modern form, based on nuclear family model) Formal—the use of formalized learning, by rote or from books, in classrooms with paid teachers (the most modern form, even though it extends back several thousand years) The Sociology of Education Group and Organizational Behavior Bureaucracies (Complex Organizations) Informal/Traditional—life learning; training of individuals and small groups by demonstrating necessary life skills as a concomitant of day-to day living; learning by watching and doing SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 6 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Institution Religion Law/Politics/Government The Institutions of Society (Also Called Social Institutions and/or Human Institutions) Definition Forms Shared understanding of the Polytheism—worship of more supernatural; communal discovery than one deity (most ancient of meaning; worship of a form) deity/deities; division of the world into the sacred and profane Monotheism—worship of one deity (most modern form) The methods used to manage and Democracy—rule by the will of control populations, to determine the people (most modern form) leadership, to legitimate (make acceptable) the social structure; an Chiefdom—rule by a powerful alternative to war individual who is permitted to rule, but not necessarily chosen to rule, by the will of the people (most ancient form) Sociological Discipline The Sociology of Religion Group and Organizational Behavior Bureaucracies (Complex Organizations) The Sociology of Law Political Sociology Law and Society The Sociology of Government Social Movements Social Change Bureaucracies (Complex Organizations) Big Man—similar to a chiefdom Monarchy—rule by a king or queen who is believed to be chosen to rule by a deity (ancient form) Oligarchy—rule by a few very powerful individuals Plutocracy—rule by the wealthiest members of a society Dictatorship—rule by a single extremely powerful individual; no dissent by or choice for the people is permitted Theocracy—rule by clergy SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 7 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Institution Economy The Institutions of Society (Also Called Social Institutions and/or Human Institutions) Definition Forms The methods through which the Capitalism—a free market, goods and services of a society money-based system of are distributed to and among its exchange in which the members; the ways in which government has little control or people make a living and earn authority over the means and their daily bread modes of production; stock and commodities markets determine the value of goods and services Sociological Discipline Economic Sociology Political Economics Social Change Bureaucracies (Complex Organizations) Communism—a money-based system of exchange in which the government owns all means and modes of production and has virtually complete control and authority Barter—a system in which people directly exchange with one another goods and services for other goods and services (most ancient system) Medicine Media The ways in which people heal themselves or deal with death and disease The mass transmission of cultural information and entertainment Mercantilism—a system in which merchants control the means and modes of production; used during the era of European colonial domination to maintain economic control of the colonies by merchants and colonizing governments Modern/Western—the use of science and the scientific method Traditional—the use of ancient practices and herbal remedies For-Profit—a modern, industrial method of transmitting cultural information and entertainment by mechanical and electronic means (almost always for profit); operated by a few, large, often multi-national, corporations The Sociology of Medicine The Sociology of Health Bureaucracies (Complex Organizations) The Sociology of Media The Sociology of Communications The Sociology of Language Bureaucracies (Complex Organizations) Traditional—relatively small groups of traveling performers or messengers who convey information by word of mouth Sociology studies the causes of social change which includes technology, economic evolutionary cycles, Prime Movers or the Great Man theory (the ways in which significant individuals have effected the world dramatically and long-lastingly, (Buddha, Genghis Khan, Alexander the Great, Jesus, Mohammed, are a few examples), environmental effects, and the ways in which humans relate to one another. 10 The three primary paradigmatic views of human relations include the Conflict Model, the Functionalist Model, and the Symbolic Interactionist or Micro Interactionist Model. One of the major areas of study in Sociology is stratification, which is the unequal ways in which the goods of society (wealth, power, and status) are distributed. Oettinger says that stratification is studying “who gets what and how much they get over time.” Stratification is the study of differences and inequality and analyzes such elements of society as deviance, racism sexism, and ageism. Stratification is often based on SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 8 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Master Status 11 12 and SES. Master Status is one’s race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, disability, and SES. SES is Socioeconomic Status which is Income + Occupation + Education. SES is a social ranking that combines several factors to assess peoples’ positions in the stratification hierarchy (levels of social acceptance by the dominant group). Master status is that status that, of all the statuses a person occupies, is the one that largely defines who that person is, and what his or her goals and opportunities are. 13 We also study social problems and are interested in the ways in which any given society defines its problems and develops methods of solving or dealing with those problems. Last, but not least, Sociology is the scientific study of Criminology, which is the study of crime, punishment and deviance. 14 Unfortunately, Criminology is the fastest growing subdiscipline in Sociology today, perhaps because we, in the United States, spend more money on prisons than we spend on schools! A great Sociologist named C. Wright Mills (1916-1962), in a famous book entitled The Sociological Imagination (1959), argued that, in order to properly study society, we must analyze the relationship between society and the individual; between the past, present, and future; and must study human behavior in a social, cultural, and historical context. Mills argued that we must never forget that we are studying human behavior and that we must, therefore, never forget the human aspect of our discipline. 15 Key Terms and Concepts for: Introduction—What is Sociology? C. Wright Mills…10 culture…5 Family, Education, Religion, Politics/Law/Government, the Economy, Medicine, and Media…7 goods of society (wealth, power, and status)…9 Human Institutions…7 Institutions of Society…7 Master Status…10 Science…5 SES…10 Social Institutions…5–10 social science…5 social sciences…6 society…5 Socioeconomic Status…10 Sociology…5 The Sociological Imagination…10 Module IA—An Introduction to Sociology—A Brief History of Sociology A very brief definition of Sociology would be that it is the systematic and scientific study of human behavior, social groups, and society. Sociology has an extremely broad scope. Sociologists study all aspects of human behavior and if we haven’t studied it, it’s because we haven’t thought of it! 16 In Sociology, there are three basic paradigms, (perspectives, viewpoints, guiding principles, descriptions) each with its own particular Weltanschauung (world view). A paradigm is a set of assumptions and ideas that guide research questions, methods of analysis and interpretation, and the development of theory. 17 A paradigm is a perspective or viewpoint, a particular way of looking at things; a guiding principle, a description of or explanation of the way in which some part (or all) of the world works. A paradigm is similar to a Weltanschauung which is a German word meaning world view: it is the way a society or culture defines itself, explains itself, and sees its place in the world (dependent on time, place, technology, norms, and values). 18 Paradigms and theories explain and describe. They have no motive power and do not create anything in and of themselves. Paradigms have descriptive and explanatory value that leads to theory building—rational, scientific, provable and testable explanations for some phenomenon. The three major paradigms in Sociology are the Conflict model, 19 the Functionalist model, 20 and the Symbolic Interactionist model. 21 Each of these three paradigms or models is based directly or indirectly on the work of the seminal theorists in Sociology—Karl Marx, Émile Durkheim, Max Weber, Georg Simmel, and George Herbert Mead, (respectively)—all of whom were white, European (or of European ancestry), males born in the 19th century. Although each theorist had a different Weltanschauung and comes to us from a world that was influenced by events that we early-21st-centuryAmericans have come to view as merely historical, all five of these seminal thinkers have become classical scholars because their works have had explanatory and predictive value for our time. Sociology, as a scientific discipline, has its roots in the Age of Reason, a time period called the Enlightenment. The Enlightenment and its progeny—the American Revolution, the French Revolution, the Industrial Revolution— seem to float fog-like somewhere in our distant, misty past, so far beyond our own modern era as to seem sometimes inconsequential. However, these events have generated processes and ideas that reverberate through the centuries and have formed and continue to form the Weltanschauung of our own time. Marx, Durkheim, Weber, Simmel, and Mead have linked together the 16th century through the early 21st century with a level of clarity and profundity that has forged an exegetical chain of understanding of our present social milieu. Each paradigm explains differently the ways in which society is constructed; 22 each has a different perspective or viewpoint—a different Weltanschauung—each seems to describe only a part of society, however for all of their faults and contradictions, they offer us a level of awareness and comprehension that we would not have without them. Each of these paradigms has propagated strongly supported theories which have led to multiple levels of research which, in turn, have promoted greater understanding of the human condition and our place within our world. The Conflict Paradigm (model—sometimes referred to as Conflict Theory) argues that the structured system of all of society is based on conflict over the goods of society (wealth, power, and status). This conflict is about economic and social SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 9 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved competition at the macro-level and concerns the economic and social differences between the rich (elite) and everyone else. Because the Conflict Paradigm focuses primarily on exploitation and inequality, it does a very poor job of explaining social stability and normativeness. The Conflict model views all of society as a structured system, engaging in competition for wealth, power, and status. According to the Conflict Paradigm, society is seen as greater than the sum of its parts (i.e., holistic), and the institutions of society are engaged in conflict by regulating and constraining individual behavior, therefore, most conflict and competition is non-violent. However, the economic system creates alienating conditions within and among the institutions. The social structure is objective, external to the individual, and enduring over time. The key concepts are change, conflict, alienation, bourgeoisie (owners of the means and modes of production), class conflict, class consciousness, commodity fetishism, compulsion, dialectic, division of labor, exploitation, false consciousness, ideology, ownership of private property, proletariat (workers), relations among owners, relations of production (relations among workers), stratification (inequality), subordination, superordination, substructure, superstructure, surplus value v. use value, systems, and work. The Functionalist Paradigm (model—sometimes referred to as Functionalist Theory) argues that all of society is based on a set of elements at the macro-level that maintains social stability; any element that endures over long periods of time must help the society to remain stable. These elements, each of which are interdependent and interactive, include the form of the institutions, (e.g., the family), and the sub-forms, (e.g., the nuclear family) and sub-sub-forms (e.g., the children) of the basic institutions. In other words, each element of society, each institution of society, exists in order to maintain and legitimate the social structure by creating a sense of contentment, trust, and safety in the people. Because of its focus on the stabilizing mechanisms of society, the Functionalist Paradigm does a very poor job of explaining social change and deviance. All of society is a structured system which engages in behavior that adds to social stability and societal equilibrium, so that society is greater than the sum of its parts (i.e., holistic). The institutions of society are engaged in adaptive behaviors that fill both generalized as well as specific societal needs. Every element of society is regulated and constrained by the social structure. The institutions, most particularly, the family, law, and religion, maintain social stability. The social structure is objective, external to the individual, and enduring over time. Of primary concern to the Functionalist Paradigm are: stability, harmony, consensus, groups, anomie, authority, balance, collective conscience, common bonds, compulsion, division of labor, legitimating mechanisms, regulating mechanisms, rituals, rules, social cohesion, social facts, social integration, solidarity, stability, systems, values and value integration. The Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm (model—sometimes referred to as Symbolic Interactionist Theory or MicroInteractionism) contends that all of society, which is a random process, is made up of individuals engaging in small-group interactions, is only as great as the sum of its parts, (i.e., atomistic), and is based on negotiated order in which micro-level decisions created by human social interaction create the basis of a continually changing and yet stable society. Because it is a micro-level perspective, this paradigm does a very poor job of explaining large-scale events and processes such as stratification. Moreover, Symbolic Interactionism views the institutions of society as created and adapted by individuals through a continuing dialectic process, wherein each element of the social structure, which is subjective, internal to the individual, and in a constant state of flux over time, is merely a crystallization of an intricate web of small-scale interactions based on roles, statuses, and the sharing and interpretation of meaning. The major assumptions in Symbolic Interactionism are: change, tension, interpretation of meaning, shared meaning and shared symbols, individuals, communication, dialectic, forms of interaction, individual social actors (roles, statuses, gestures), meaning of symbols, micro-level interactions, numbers, process, randomness, small-scale processes. It is from these major paradigms that all Sociological theories come. Paradigms are broad-based, extremely generalized explanations or descriptions of the natural or social world; they are not testable, but lead to theories which are testable. Paradigms help scientists to develop theories. A theory is a set of testable, interrelated propositions, or statements, that attempt to explain some phenomenon. Theories are much, much more specific than paradigms; theories are narrowly-based explanations of some specific aspect of the natural or social word, and are testable. By testing theories, we are able to discover information concerning the human condition that better helps us to understand why humans behave in the ways we do under any given circumstance or situation. The Sociological Imagination was the title of a book written by Sociologist C. Wright Mills. The concept behind the Sociological Imagination is that there is an awareness of the relationship between an individual and the wider society. It is studying human behavior in the context of history and the current zeitgeist. 23 The Sociological Imagination means comprehending the links between people’s immediate, personal social settings and the remote, impersonal social world that surrounds them and helps to shape them, e.g., when one person is unemployed it is a personal problem but when many people are unemployed it is a social issue and requires analyzing the social structure. 24 Modern Sociologist George Ritzer argues that sociology, unlike most other sciences, sometimes studies itself. Because much of the scientific work done by Sociologists has public policy ramifications and is often used by various entities to create a range of social programs such as Head Start, school lunches and breakfasts, after school sports, it is necessary for us to study our own discipline in order to discover the efficacy of the social programs that have come out of our research. My favorite definition of Sociology is that given by Pearman who argues that “Sociology is a useful enterprise which attempts to explain human behavior in order to provide the knowledge required to create a better society.” 25 Because Sociology is a scientific academic discipline: it requires that we always critically analyze everything around us. In order to see the world through the eyes of the Sociologist one must develop critical thinking skills. Critical thinking may be the single most important thing that any human being can learn. Critical thinking consists of understanding and evaluating statements, ideas, and information, developing reasonable solutions to problems, articulating a position, and making a creative SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 10 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved statement that reflects a defensible position. Critical thinking is about defining problems; asking questions; analyzing evidence; recognizing biases; avoiding emotional reactions; forming reasonable solutions; tolerating ambiguity and uncertainty; and rejecting simplistic solutions and quick, easy answers to complex social problems. Critical thinking means never taking anything at face value, but always looking beneath the surface for that which is not obvious. 26 An example of looking beneath the surface would be the Bridgestone-Firestone Tire and Ford Explorer problem of a few years ago in which tires were shredding causing rollovers and severe injury and even death. Jack Nasser, then Chairman of the Board of Ford Motor Company, made a public service announcement in which he said that his family owned five Ford Explorers and that they were safe—what he failed to say was the brand of tires on the SUVs of his family! Because humans are social creatures, we are driven by the social imperative which states that humans are social creatures: 1) who make choices; 2) form collectivities (groups); and 3) establish rules that govern behavior. It is this social imperative, those common aspects of all human behavior, that has driven people since ancient times to philosophize and theorize over what it means to be human. 27 The Enlightenment ushered in a time period in which humans began to look for scientific rather than theological explanations for phenomenon and events and new ideas began to be promulgated concerning what it means to be human. The Enlightenment occurred in Europe from about 1700 to 1918 although it can be argued that we are still living in the age of the Enlightenment. The Enlightenment was caused by social upheaval and technological change; and resulted in colonialism, modern capitalism, industrialization which is the transformation of an economy from agriculture to manufacturing, and urbanization which is the growth of large cities. The Enlightenment was an entirely new way of looking at and explaining the world—what is often called a paradigm shift. We are still living in the age of the Enlightenment because we tend to look for and expect science to be able to “fix” all of our social problems. 28 Out of the period known as the Enlightenment (1700-1918) came all of the modern natural and social sciences. Indeed, science as we understand it today, was created in the early years of the Enlightenment. In fact, much of our modern ideology concerning the intrinsic value of human beings was developed during the Enlightenment—our concepts of democracy, the dignity, autonomy, and humanity of the common person, individuality, 29 the ability of the average person to have a personal relationship with and understanding of God, 30 social change and social mobility, 31 constitutional monarchies, 32 and epistemology, 33 as well as the scientific method, 34 are all revolutionary results of the Enlightenment. The Enlightenment coincided with the Age of Reason during which time it was believed that the intellect, the mind, reason would provide the necessary means to create a better society—a society without superstition, without inequality, where science ruled, government was democratic, and religion had ceased to exist. Proponents declared that the Enlightenment and the Age of Reason would bring about the demise of superstition as well as the death of feudal society along with its egregious social inequities. 35 One product of the Enlightenment was August Comte (1798-1857); a French philosopher who wrote Positive Philosophy which was the first systematic Sociological approach to the study of society. Positivism is the use of observation, comparison, experimentation, and the historical method to gain the necessary facts to analyze society. Comte wrote that there are two major areas of study for Sociologists: Social Statics—the relatively stable elements in a society—and Social Dynamics— social change. Comte believed that Sociology could create a utopian society. From Comte’s two modalities come the first two great paradigms in Sociology. From the study of social dynamics or change comes the work of Karl Marx and the Conflict Paradigm and from the study of social statics or stability, Émile Durkheim developed Functionalism. 36 Social Dynamics Social Change Marx Conflict Social Statics Social Stability Durkheim Functionalism Harriet Martineau (1802-1876) was a British woman who is considered the co-founder (with Comte) of Sociology. She translated Comte’s works into English but, as importantly, wrote How to Observe Manners and Morals which was the first book every written about Sociological research methodology. Martineau also wrote Society in America which compared European and American systems of stratification. 37 Herbert Spencer (1820-1903) was a British Sociologist who relied on evolution theory. It was Spencer, not Charles Darwin who coined the phrase “survival of the fittest.” Spencer was part of a social movement that came to be called Social Darwinism which is the ideology that some people (or groups of people) are less fit to receive large portions of the goods of society, and which has become a rationale for stratification. Spencer’s work eventually led to the Eugenics movement in the United States and England. Spencer argued that societies evolve in much the same way that biological organisms evolve. Those humans who are empirically less favored (physically, cognitively, socially, morally, financially) are also less fit to receive a fair portion of the goods of society (wealth, power, and status). Therefore, to aid in any way the handicapped, the mentally challenged, the criminal, the prostitute or drug addict, the indigent was merely to damage the human species. In order to perfect the species, the unfit should not be allowed to reproduce their own kind. The Eugenics movement led to the involuntary sterilization of over 120,000 men and women in the United States and England from about 1910 until the 1940s. The Tuskegee Experiment and the Nazi Holocaust (among other human horrors) are the inevitable consequences of Social Darwinism and the Eugenics movement. 38 Karl Marx (1818-1883), the father of modern Communism was born in Trier (now a German city located along the Rhine River) on May 5, 1818 to a Jewish family, and died in London, England in 1883. Both parents came from rabbinical SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 11 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved families that reached back over a hundred years. Marx’s father was a more-or-less prominent lawyer but his relatively uneducated mother was the primary influence in his early life. 39 Karl Marx wrote The Communist Manifesto. He was an evolutionist, economist, historian, philosopher and the intellectual “father” of the Conflict paradigm which argues that society is characterized by conflict among groups with differential access to the goods of society (wealth, power, status). According to the Conflict paradigm, all of the social institutions reflect the interests of the Bourgeoisie in opposition to the interests of the Proletariat. Marx wrote that violent revolution by the proletariat is inevitable when they finally realize (class consciousness) that they are being exploited and group together in a “class for self,” and this Communist revolution will create a classless society in which all will labor for the good of the society: “from each according to his ability, to each according to his need.” According to Marx, the two major social classes are the Bourgeoisie who are the ruling class; the owners of the means (land. labor, capital) and modes (technologies) of production and the Proletariat. The Bourgeoisie exploit the workers by forcing them to work for slave wages under whatever conditions and for whatever wages the Bourgeoisie deem appropriate so long as the workers continue to make money for them. The Bourgeoisie are the owners of private property which is “the ability to control the labor of others.” The Proletariat are the working class who are the producers of all of the material goods of society. The Proletariat own nothing but their labor power—their ability to work—which they must sell piecemeal to the Bourgeoisie. The Proletariat make the Bourgeoisie rich while they, themselves, become poorer and poorer. Under the social structure of capitalism, society, according to Marx, is divided into two classes: the Bourgeoisie or ruling class, who own the means of production and employ workers who toil for wages, and the Proletariat or working class who own nothing but their labor power which they must sell in order to merely survive. This social division or stratification is due to the private ownership of property (the ability to control the labor of others) which “has established new classes, new conditions of oppression, new forms of struggle in place of the old ones. “Our epoch . . . has simplified the class antagonisms. Society as a whole is more and more splitting into two great hostile camps, into two great classes . . . Bourgeoisie and Proletariat” (Marx, p. 15). This division causes alienation which means the worker is separated from the object produced, from the process of production, from himself, from his species being (his humanity). Given the primacy of the economic system in Marx’s theory, the political system functions merely as an adjunct to and puppet of the economic superstructure of society or, as Orum states “[a]t the most abstract level, the rulers under capitalism govern in favor of the capitalists” (Orum, p. 19). Alienation is the loss of one’s soul, one’s humanity, one’s interpersonal human relationships with others becoming little more than animals who must labor or die or become part of the machinery one uses. Émile Durkheim (1858-1917) is the “father” of the Functionalist Paradigm. He was a French order theorist who argued that society is characterized by stability and strong integration based on mutual benefit. If Marx’s theory posits a world in which alienation and struggle are the primary characteristics of society, French Sociologist Émile Durkheim viewed the social structure as interconnected and ordered. Like Marx, Durkheim was born into a rabbinical family at Epinal, a city in the Western province of Lorraine, near the German border, on April 15, 1858 and died on November 15, 1917. Durkheim, like Marx, viewed the individual as part of a social structure that was concrete, objective, coercive, and stable. Durkheim attempted to explain why societies are ordered; why order and not conflict is the norm. Durkheim argued that society is held together by certain legitimating mechanisms that serve to help us internalize the values and norms of our society and that serve to create social solidarity which is a feeling of collective conscience that is responsible for the social order; These legitimating mechanisms permit people to accept the structure of their society and are based in the institutions of society, primarily the family, religion and the law. Durkheim wrote that there are two types of solidarity: mechanical solidarity and organic solidarity. Mechanical solidarity is characterized by traditional societies, and where social cohesion is maintained by sameness; where beliefs and values are shared; there is a simple economic system with extended kin groups, and a rural geography. Organic Solidarity on the other hand is characterized by large-scale industrial societies in which social cohesion is maintained by reliance on others where beliefs and values often differ, there is a complex economic system with a highly differentiated division of labor, nuclear families; and an urban geography. In 1897, Durkheim wrote Suicide, which was a systematic analysis of suicide rates in Europe. He also developed the concept of anomie which is a condition of normlessness; social chaos; social upheaval; great social change; lack of social direction. Max Weber (1864-1920) was a German Conflict theorist who was not a Marxist. Weber is, in part, responsible for the development of the Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm because he argued that meaning requires understanding, what he called Verstehen, which is the German word for understanding. We must, wrote Weber, understand the meaning that individuals give to their own actions in order to understand and scientifically analyze their behavior. According to Weber, Sociologists must develop value-free theories and conduct value-free research, which means that we must not let our own personal biases intrude into our gathering and analysis of data. In other words, the Sociologist must not let her/his own biases cloud research and the scientific method must always be employed by Sociologists. 40 Weber developed the definition of stratification that argues that inequality is based on differentials in class, status, and power—a concept we will explore later. Weber also developed the concept of Ideal Types which are conceptual models or typologies that are constructed from the direct observation of a number of specific cases and represent the essential qualities found in those cases. An Ideal Type is a pure, theoretical form used to compare and contrast real, historical, existing conditions; extremes (polar opposites) at either end of a continuum along which real types actually fall; a theoretical benchmark against which to measure reality. The word “ideal” does not presuppose or imply any value judgment; there can be an ideal type of whorehouse or an ideal type of convent. Ideal types are “logically controlled and unambiguous conceptions” (From Max Weber, p. 59) which often become testable models. Three classic studies which make use of ideal types are: Rosabeth Moss Kanter’s Men and Women of the Corporation, Michael Burawoy’s Manufacturing Consent, and Douglas SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 12 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Holmes’s Cultural Disenchantments. Ideal types cannot and do not actually exist in the real world, they are purely theoretical tools used to measure reality. A former student described Ideal Type in the following way. Suppose a teacher gives a test and it is possible for the students to answer correctly all but one question. The answer key for that test, because it contains all of the correct answers to all of the questions including the question that is impossible for the students to answer correctly, is the ideal type. Because the answer to the impossible question doesn’t exist in the real world, but only in the mind of the teacher, the test questions serve as a hypothesis and the answer key is the method of measuring the research findings. Weber also developed the concept of the ideal type of bureaucracy 41 Weber wrote extensively concerning bureaucracies and rationalization. Weber argued that bureaucracies are highly rationalized societal forms ‘once it is fully established, bureaucracy is among those social structures which are the hardest to destroy. Bureaucracy is the means of carrying ‘community action’ over into rationally ordered ‘societal action.’ Therefore, as an instrument for ‘societalizing’ relations of power, bureaucracy has been and is a power instrument of the first order” (From Max Weber, p. 228). 42 This rationalization ultimately leads to an “iron cage” in which the individual is trapped, lost, alienated, and dehumanized— turned into a mere cog in the ever-turning, never-ending wheels of capitalism. Rationalization/ Rationalism leads to depersonalization and the Iron Cage of Bureaucracy. Weber also wrote The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism in which he argued that it was the Weltanschauung of Calvinists that drove them to acquire and accumulate wealth in such a way that modern, rational, free-market Capitalism was the only possible result of their activity. 43 Lester Ward (1841-1913), the first president of the American Sociological Society, “conceptualized Sociology as the systematic study of social forces, these being psychic in nature, and resulting in a continuous process of ‘social synergy’ by which new structures were created.” 44 In 1903 he wrote Pure Sociology in which he argued that Sociology involves the study of society in an effort to understand and explain the natural laws that govern its evolution. Applied Sociology was written in 1906 and posited that sociological principles, social ideals, and ethical considerations should be used for the improvement of society. (Jane Addams [1860-1935] who founded Hull House in Chicago applied sociological theory to help the indigent and homeless, and Margaret Sanger [1879-1966] who was the founder of Planned Parenthood and an early women’s rights advocate was also an applied Sociologist, although some of her work deliberately aided the Eugenics Movement.) 45 W. E. B. DuBois (1868-1963) was a highly complicated man who was the founder of African-American Sociology and the first African American president of the American Sociological Society. He was also one of the early founders of the National Association for the Advancement of Colored People (NAACP). Born after the civil war to free parents, DuBois was not subjected to racism until he was about 10. The incident, about which he wrote in his most famous work The Souls of Black Folk (1903), helped him to shape his view of race in America. As a young Sociologist (he was the first African American to ever earn a Ph.D. in Sociology from Harvard University) he believed that America had the potential to overcome her racist heritage and her racist past and move into a new future where black and white would join together to carve out a new nation—a nation without prejudice. “The problem of the twentieth century is the problem of the color line,” he wrote in 1903. 46 Unfortunately, DuBois came to believe that America could not overcome her racism, that it was too deeply ingrained, too tightly woven into the fabric of our society and, at the age of 90, DuBois renounced his American citizenship and migrated to Ghana in West Africa where he died in 1963 at the age of 95. DuBois’ work still speaks to us today and still urges us to work to triumph over the racism that still too often defines us. C. Wright Mills (1916-1962) who wrote The Sociological Imagination was a conflict theorist but not a Marxist; in fact, his perspective was based more on the works of Weber. Mills viewed society as being composed of diverse groups that have conflicting values and interests. Moreover, The Sociological Imagination means comprehending the links between people’s immediate, personal social settings and the remote, impersonal social world that surrounds them and helps to shape them, e.g., when one person is unemployed it is a personal problem but when many people are unemployed it is a social issue and requires analyzing the social structure. In order to study properly society, we must analyze the relationship between society and the individual; between the past, present, and future; and must study human behavior in a social, cultural, and historical context. Mills argued that we must never forget that we are studying human behavior and that we must, therefore, never forget the human aspect of our discipline; in order to study properly society, we must analyze the relationship between society and the individual; between the past, present, and future. He also wrote The Power Elite which argued that the post-WW II United States was ruled by a political-military-industrial complex. Symbolic Interactionism which views the creation and manipulation of symbols—sounds, objects, colors, and events that represent something other than themselves—as critical to understanding social interaction, has two major focuses—microlevel analysis and the meaning of symbols. The Symbolic Interactionist paradigm is primarily American and was developed at the University of Chicago. The Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm has also been called the Chicago School of Sociology. The Chicago School is a uniquely American approach to Sociology. The development of the Symbolic Interactionism Perspective is often credited to Georg Simmel (1858-1918) who argued that society must be studied from the microlevel and not only the macrolevel. The macrolevel approach means studying society on a broad scale and viewing it as more than the sum of its parts while the microlevel approach focuses more on small group interactions and the relationship between the individual and society. Simmel laid the basic foundation for Symbolic Interactionism but George Herbert Mead (1863-1931) was the American originator of Symbolic Interactionism. Mead (1863-1931) wrote Mind, Self, and Society in which he stated that the continuous processes of creating, defining, and redefining meaningful symbols makes society possible and that society and the individual SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 13 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved have meaning only in relation to each other. Also from the Chicago School was William I. Thomas (1863-1947) who was a professor at the University of Chicago in the 1930s and 1940s and developed what has come to be called Thomas’ Theorem which states: “things perceived to be real will be real in their consequences” 47 Thomas wrote: if men define situations as real, they are real in their consequences. . . . Once meaning has been assigned, their consequent behavior is shaped by [that] meaning. If people believe in witches such beliefs have tangible consequences—they may, for example, kill those persons assumed to be witches. This then is the power the human mind has in transmuting raw sense data into a categorical apparatus that could make murderers of us all. Once a Vietnamese becomes a “gook,” or a Black a “nigger,” or a Jew a “kike,” that human being has been transmuted through the peculiar alchemy of social definition into something wholly “other” who is now a target of prejudice and discrimination, of violence and aggression, and even murder. 48 In other words, we act on what we think/believe is real regardless of its ontological reality. Our beliefs, our perceptions guide our behavior. We treat people based on what we perceive to be their basic characteristics often based solely on our perception of their place in the stratification hierarchy. Stereotypes and discriminatory behavior are almost always based on such perceptions. Our own position in the stratification hierarchy is judged just as we judge that of others and based on the same generally superficial qualities. What are the first things you notice when you meet someone for the first time? Do the things you notice color your analysis of that person? The picture is Norman Rockwell’s 49 painting of Ruby Bridges who is being escorted to school by FBI agents because she is a black child integrating an all-white school for the first time. There were (and still are) those in our society who would have killed Ruby simply because of the color of her skin. On the wall behind Ruby is written the word “Nigger.” Thomas’ Theorem tells us that when we call people names, we have turned them into objects, and objectifying people permits us to do to them anything we want, including murdering them. Charles Horton Cooley (1864-1929) developed a theory based on the Symbolic Interactionist paradigm that has been called “the Looking Glass Self” which argues that the individual’s self-concept is largely determined by the perceptions of others. The “Looking-Glass Self” basically means that society is a mirror in which the individual is reflected. 50 Our sense of self, our concept of how we fit into society and how we are supposed to interact with others, is based, according to Cooley’s theory, on the feedback we receive from those with whom we are in contact on a day-to-day basis. In other words, we are largely the products of the society into which we were born and raised. Herbert Blumer in his book Symbolic Interactionism wrote that there are three basic premises of Symbolic interactionism—human beings act toward things on the basis of the meanings that the things have for them; the meaning of such things is derived from, or arises out of, the social interaction that one has with one’s fellows; these things are handled in, and modified through, an interpretive process” (in other words, someone engages in an ACT which is followed by an INTERPRETation and then, and only then, do we REACT). SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 14 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved The Three Major Sociological Paradigms: Their Origins, the Theorists, Major Concepts, Societal-Level Approach/ Unit of Analysis, Problems/Weaknesses Primary Theorist(s) View of Society/Major Concepts/ View of Social Structure Émile Durkheim, Talcott Parsons, Kingsley Davis, Wilbert Moore Karl Marx, Max Weber, C. Wright Mills, Emmanuel Wallerstein All of society is characterized by conflict—economic competition—between the bourgeoisie and the proletariat. Georg Simmel, Max Weber, George Herbert Mead, Charles Horton Cooley, Erving Goffman 19th Century European (late 1800s) 19th Century European (mid-1800s) Origin 20th Century American (University of Chicago) Symbolic Interactionism Functionalism Conflict Paradigm 1) Society is divided into two parts, the bourgeoisie and the proletariat. 2) The bourgeoisie is the ruling class, the owners of the means (land, labor, and capital) and the modes (technology) of production. 3) The bourgeoisie own and control all of the economic forces in society. 4) The proletariat are the workers who own nothing but their own labor power (the ability to work) which is controlled by the bourgeoisie. 5) Eventually the proletariat will realize that they are being exploited (used for profitable gain) by the bourgeoisie and will rise up in violent revolution against their oppressors—the bourgeoisie—which will usher in a new society where everyone is socially and economically equal. 6) The social structure exists in time and space, is objective/external, concrete, and coercive. All of society is characterized by societal stability. 1) Society is multi-layered and has many more components than just the bourgeoisie and proletariat. 2) Power is relatively evenly distributed across groups. 3) Each element of society, and each institution of society aids the maintenance of the social structure which permits society to be balanced among each of the societal institutions. The Family, Law, and Religion are the primary mechanisms of social stability and legitimation. 4) Members of society see the social structure as legitimate (acceptable and working properly) and therefore strive to maintain that social structure. Legitimation maintains social equilibrium or balance which maintains the status quo. 5) Consensus (agreement) exists among all levels of society and that consensus leads to legitimation (acceptability). 6) The social structure exists in time and space, is objective/external, concrete, and coercive. All of society is based on day-to-day micro-level interactions between individuals and among small groups. 1) Society is multi-layered, highly variable, and is based on the day-to-day interactions between individuals and among small groups. 2) Understanding the meaning that people give to their own behaviors is essential to understanding the social structure. 3) Symbols (things which stand for something other than themselves) and the meaning people give to those symbols is an essential component of society. 4) It is our shared understanding of symbols that makes society possible. 5) Reality is based on perception, and our behavior is controlled by our perceptions. 6) The social structure exists only in the minds of individuals and small groups and has no objective reality; it is subjective/internal, abstract, in constant flux, and voluntary. Societal-Level Approach/ Unit of Analysis Macro Level— the group is the basic unit of society and the basic unit of sociological analysis. Problems/ Weaknesses Focuses more on groups, conflict, change, and doesn’t consider small group processes or social stability. Macro Level— the group is the basic unit of society and the basic unit of sociological analysis. Focuses so much on stability that it is unable to explain conflict and egregious stratification. Doesn’t consider small group processes. Micro Level— the individual is the basic unit of society and the basic unit of sociological analysis. Focuses on small groups and individuals, perception and subjectivity so much that it is unable to give much weight or understanding to large-scale processes, and objective reality. Because the three major Sociological paradigms have very different conceptions about the world, each explains differently the same behaviors, processes, institutions, or events. For example, the chart below shows the ways in which each of the models might explain the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks against the United States. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 15 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Symbolic Interactionism Functionalism Conflict Paradigm The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of September 11, 2001 Terrorist Attacks The terrorist attack was caused by American foreign policy vis á vis the Middle East as a whole, the first Gulf War, American support of the Israeli government and Israel’s treatment of its Palestinian population. The Bourgeoisie (the United States and most of Western Europe) has exploited for decades the people and natural resources of the Middle East without offering economic and educational support to the people. The U.S. and Western Europe have supported dictatorial regimes, ignored human rights abuses, and generally turned their backs on the plight of the majority of Middle Easterners and Muslims in general throughout the world. Thus, the terrorists (as representatives of the Proletariat), attacked, or attempted to attack, the centers of American power: the World Trade Center (economic power), the Pentagon (military power), and the U.S. Capital (political power). The terrorist attack was an act of extreme deviance caused by anomic conditions (conditions of social chaos when the rules for normative behavior seem to have disappeared) in the Middle East and among Muslim people throughout the world. Because of the cultural influence of the American media throughout the world, and because of the rapidity of social change taking place due to that cultural influence, the terrorists engaged in an act of deviance based on their belief that they were acting at the behest of God, and for the good of their own people, that took their own lives as well as the lives of thousands of others. The terrorists used the symbols of American power—the World Trade Center, New York City, the Pentagon, Washington, D.C.—in order to deliver a message to the world concerning their perception that the United States is the cause of the misery of Muslims in the Middle East as well as throughout the world. The perception of reality is often more real than the concrete reality itself, because sometimes we act based on what we think or believe more strongly than on what is really real. The actions of the terrorists were a form of language, a method of communication that was extreme, because the message was extreme. Theorist Ibn Khaldun Some Major Sociological Theorists: Their Paradigms, Their Theories Dates Origin Paradigm 1332-1406 Tunis/Morocco N/A William of Ockham ca. 1300-1349 British N/A August Comte 1798-1857 French Positivism Harriet Martineau 1802-1876 British Positivism Karl Marx 1818-1883 German Conflict Frederick Engels 1820-1895 British (German-born) Conflict SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 16 Theory Rise and Fall of Civilizations Historical Sociology Occam’s Razor “All other things being equal, the simplest explanation for anything is usually accurate” Positivism Social Statics and Social Dynamics The Scientific Method Must Be Used to Study Society The Communist Manifesto Capital Bourgeoisie and Proletariat Owners of the Means and Modes of Production Owners of Private Property Economic Determinism Owners of Labor Power The Communist Manifesto © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Theorist Émile Durkheim Some Major Sociological Theorists: Their Paradigms, Their Theories Dates Origin Paradigm 1858-1917 French Functionalism Max Weber 1864-1920 German Conflict/Symbolic Interactionism Ferdinand Tönnies 1855-1936 German Structuralism Robert Michels 1876-1936 German Conflict Lester Ward 1841-1913 American Thorstein Veblen 1857-1929 American Conflict W.E.B. DuBois 1868-1963 American Conflict Georg Simmel 1858-1916 German Symbolic Interactionism George Herbert Mead 1863-1931 American Symbolic Interactionism Charles Horton Cooley 1864-1921 American Symbolic Interactionism Erving Goffman 1922-1982 American Symbolic Interactionism Horace Miner 1912-1993 American Anthropologist SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 17 Theory Social Stability The Mechanisms that Create and Maintain Social Stability Organic Solidarity— Macro Mechanical Solidarity— Micro Suicide Ideal Types Bureaucracies The Iron Cage Class, Status, and Power Verstehen Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft Community and Society The Iron Law of Oligarchy Pure Sociology Applied Sociology The Theory of the Leisure Class Minorities “The problem of the 20th century is the problem of the color line” Number Theory—as the size of a group changes the relationships among group members also changes Micro-Level Analysis The Isolated Individual, Dyads, Triads The Metropolis The Stranger Mind, Self, and Society The “I” and “Me” Stages of the Development of the Self The Looking-Glass Self Primary and Secondary Groups The Presentation of the Self Impression Management Face Work Total Institutions Stigma “Body Ritual among the Nacirema” © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Theorist C. Wright Mills Some Major Sociological Theorists: Their Paradigms, Their Theories Dates Origin Paradigm 1916-1962 American Conflict Robert K. Merton 1910-2003 American Structural Functionalism W. I. Thomas 1863-1947 American Symbolic Interactionism Herbert Blumer Fritz Machlup 1900-1987 1902-1983 American American (Austrianborn) Symbolic Interactionism N/A Elton Mayo 1880-1949 American (Australianborn) Functionalism Stanley Milgram 1933-1984 American N/A Philip Zimbardo 19??- American Psychologist William Foote Whyte William Ogburn 1914-2000 1886-1959 American American Functionalism Symbolic Interactionism George Ritzer 1940- American Conflict/Weberian Franz Boas 1858-1942 American (Germanborn) Structural Functionalism Theory The Sociological Imagination The Power Elite Responses to Anomie Typologies of Bigotry Thomas’ Theorem Perception is Reality Symbolic Interactionism Economist Social Sciences are Real Science The Hawthorne Experiment The Social Problems of an Industrial Society Psychologist Obedience Experiments Psychologist Role Embracement Experiments Street Corner Society Material and NonMaterial Culture Cultural Lag Hypothesis The McDonaldization of Society Cultural Relativism Gerhard Lenski Irving Janis Peter Berger 19241918-1990 1929- Structural Functionalism Structural Functionalism All Sociocultural Evolution Groupthink The Sacred Canopy Stephen Rosoff 194?- American American (Austrianborn) American Structuralism Edward Sutherland 1883-1950 American Structural Functionalism Immanuel Wallerstein Gordon Allport 19301897-1967 American American Conflict Social Psychologist Kingsley Davis 1908-1997 American Functionalism Wilbert Moore 1914-1987 American Functionalism Melvin Tumin 1919-1994 American Functionalism Charlotte Perkins Gilman 1860-1935 American Conflict Profit Without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America White Collar Crime Differential Association Theory World Systems Theory Prejudice Racism Essentialism “Some Principles of Stratification” The Functionality of Inequality “Some Principles of Stratification” The Functionality of Inequality “Some Principles of Stratification: A Critical Analysis” The Dysfunctionality of Inequality Feminism SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 18 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Theorist Mary Daly Some Major Sociological Theorists: Their Paradigms, Their Theories Dates Origin Paradigm 1928American Conflict William Julius Wilson 194?- American Structuralism Arlie Russell Hochschild 1940- American Symbolic Interactionism Theory Radical Lesbian Feminism The Declining Significance of Race The Truly Disadvantaged When Work Disappears The Second Shift Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IA—Introduction to Sociology—A Brief History of Sociology: Ability To Control The Labor Of Others, 7 “The problem of the twentieth century is the problem of the color line,”…14 ACT…15 Applied Sociology…14 August Comte…12 Bourgeoisie…13 bureaucracy…14 C. Wright Mills…11, 14 Charles Horton Cooley…15 Chicago School of Sociology…14 class, status, and power…13 Conflict model…10 Critical thinking…11 Durkheim…13 Émile Durkheim…10, 13 Eugenics movement…12 Functionalist model…10 Functionalist Paradigm…11 Georg Simmel…10, 14 George Herbert Mead…14 George Ritzer…11 Harriet Martineau…12 Herbert Blumer…15 Herbert Spencer…12 How to Observe Manners and Morals…12 Hull House…14 Ideal Types…13 INTERPRET…15 iron cage…14 Jane Addams…14 Karl Marx…10, 12, 13 labor power…13 legitimating mechanisms…13 Lester Ward…14 Looking-Glass Self…15 macrolevel approach…14 Margaret Sanger…14 Max Weber…10, 13 mechanical solidarity…13 Mechanical solidarity…13 microlevel approach…14 Mind, Self, and Society…14 modern natural and social sciences…12 Nazi Holocaust…12 organic solidarity…13 Organic Solidarity…13 owners of private property…13 owners of the means (land, labor, capital) and modes (technologies) of production…13 paradigm…10 paradigms…10 Paradigms…11 Paradigms and theories…10 Planned Parenthood…14 Positive Philosophy…12 Positivism…12 Proletariat…13 Pure Sociology…14 rationalization…14 REACT…15 Social Darwinism…12 Social Dynamics…12 social imperative…12 Social Statics…12 society is a mirror in which the individual is reflected…15 Sociological Imagination…11 Sociology…10–20 Some…17 Suicide…13 survival of the fittest…12 Symbolic Interactionist model…10 Symbolic Interactionist paradigm…15 Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm…14 the ability to control the labor of others…13 The Chicago School…14 The Communist Manifesto…13 The Conflict Paradigm…10 The Enlightenment…10, 12 The Sociological Imagination…11, 14 The Souls of Black Folk…14 The Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm…11 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of September 11, 2001 Terrorist Attacks…17 theory…11 Thomas’ Theorem…15 Three Major Sociological Paradigms…16 Tuskegee Experiment…12 value-free research…13 value-free theories…13 Verstehen…13 W. E. B. DuBois…14 William I. Thomas…15 Module IB—Social Science Research and Methodology Because Sociology is a science, it is necessary for Sociologists to conduct scientific research. Sociologists are interested in all aspects of human behavior; we want to know as much as we can possibly know about why people do the things that they do. Epistemology is the study of knowledge acquisition; it helps us to determine how we know what we know. Epistemologists (the people who study knowledge acquisition) tell us that there are five ways of knowing: experience, faith, tradition, authority, and science. Experience is one of the primary ways we have of gaining knowledge; the simple fact that we live in a physical and SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 19 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved social world, that we have senses, and that we are constantly processing information about our world tells us that experience is our earliest teacher—we learn because we constantly experience life. As a method of gaining knowledge, faith is also a very strong teacher. Human beings seem to be created for faith—we believe in or have faith in a great many things. We have faith in a deity or deities, we have faith in science to find solutions to various human problems, we have faith in our government to do the right thing for the people, we have faith in our family and friends, we have faith in our social institutions, and, generally, we have faith in other people. We acquire faith by learning to trust through the course of our lives. Traditional knowledge is the knowledge that comes from previous generations. Traditional knowledge teaches us about our sociocultural and sociostructural environment—we learn (through the socialization process) how to live with others in our society and at the same time, we learn the values and norms of our culture. By reading this course pack, you are acquiring authoritative knowledge. The things you learn from text and other non-fiction, information-based books is authoritative knowledge, as is learning from teachers or others who are experts in their field or who have expert knowledge in some specific area of information. Science, however, differs from all other ways that we have of gaining knowledge because science requires direct, systematic observation by people who are well trained to engage in such observation. Science tests theories by developing testable hypotheses that add to our body of knowledge about the physical and social world. Science is empirical (observable) knowledge that has been rigorously tested by using the scientific method: the very specific plan which allows us to observe critically, as objectively as possible, and methodically the natural and social world around us. The process of scientific inquiry uses the principle known as Occam’s Razor 51 which is the scientific idea, developed by William of Ockham, a 12th century British philosopher, that, all other things being equal, the simplest explanation for any event or phenomenon is usually correct. This is also called parsimony or elegance. Parsimony simply means that our theories, our hypotheses, our methods must be as simple as possible given the subject of the inquiry. Because of Occam’s Razor, scientists tend not to believe in conspiracy theories. After all, does it make more sense that Elvis really is dead and buried at Graceland or that he has been wandering around incognito for more than 30 years? Have we been visited by intelligent beings from other worlds? Probably not. Those who argue that we have had such extraterrestrial visitations never have any incontrovertible, hard, scientific evidence to prove their claims—their explanations are just too complicated and often too preposterous to fit the very narrow confines of the principles of Occam’s Razor. Elegant theories are those that simplify as much as possible complex ideas. Einstein’s elegant, parsimonious Special Theory of Relativity (E=MC2) is a nearly perfect example of elegance and parsimony. This simple little equation—energy equals mass times the speed of light squared—is the simplest possible explanation for the fourth dimension of space-time and how it functions. This elegant equation led to the discovery of atomic energy and the potential for humans to explore the processes of creation in distant galaxies and in the heart of the atom. All sciences use the principle of Occam’s Razor because it has proven both its worth and its accuracy for nearly a millennium. The ultimate goal of science is to explain cause and effect through the use of systematic and objective observation, measurement, and interpretation of data. This process or endeavor requires verification. Without verification of our methods and results, we have not really “done” science and our study is only a tentative, and partially unconfirmed, analysis and interpretation. 52 Verification means that another researcher has used our methodology for the same problem and has obtained identical or nearly identical results. (Verification is sometimes called replication.) At the end of 2002, there was a group who claimed that they had cloned a human being. Cloning is a very difficult and complex process that has many more failures than successes. Furthermore, there are serious moral and ethical issues concerning human cloning, so that most, if not all, countries have placed an indefinite ban on all human cloning. Nevertheless, the cult-like religious group the Raelians, announced to the media that they had, indeed, cloned a human being and that the newborn baby was perfectly healthy. However, they offered no proof of any kind that they had done anything of the sort. In fact, they made so many ridiculous excuses about why they had not produced the DNA evidence that the media soon had its fill of their claims and stopped airing any stories about them and their “clone.” The Raelians also violated the principles of Occam’s Razor! The process of conducting scientific inquiry also requires objectivity. However, although all scientists attempt to be as objective as possible, complete objectivity in science is a myth; our biases, our personal paradigms and belief systems guide the kind of research we do and guide the things we research. However, objectivity—putting aside our own personal biases and agendas—in data collection and analysis is a necessary part of scientific inquiry, and a goal to aim for even if perfect objectivity is unattainable. Nevertheless, by utilizing our rigorous scientific training and our highly honed critical thinking skills we are strongly aided in our goal of scientific objectivity. For many, many years there has been a controversy between the natural sciences and the social sciences. In fact, many of those in the various natural science disciplines have voiced their serious doubts about the propriety of referring to the social sciences as true sciences. The natural sciences include Chemistry, Physics, Biology, Botany, Zoology, Medicine, Astronomy, Geology, Paleontology, and Mathematics. The social sciences include: Sociology, Psychology, Anthropology, Philosophy, History, Geography, Economics, and Political Science. In order to quell this often contentious dispute, Fritz Machlup, an economist, developed, in his 1962 work The Production and Distribution of Knowledge in the United States, seven criteria for comparing the social (soft) sciences to the natural (hard) sciences. Machlup argued that these seven criteria are: 1) invariability of observations; 2) objectivity of observations and explanations; 3) verifiability; 4) exactness of findings; 5) measurability of phenomena; 6) constancy of numerical relationships; 7) predictability of future events. After extensive study of methodologies among the various natural and social sciences Machlup’s conclusion was that the social sciences are not inferior to the natural sciences, they are true science but they are very different because their subject matter (the natural world versus human behavior) is very different. 53 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 20 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved In all sciences, it is necessary to use some sort of plan in order to conduct scientific inquiry. Since the period of the Enlightenment, this “plan” has been the scientific method which is a systematic, organized series of steps that ensures maximum objectivity and consistency in researching any problem. There are a few basic steps in the scientific method: 1) defining the problem; 2) reviewing any pertinent studies that have been published in the scientific literature; 3) formulating the hypothesis; 4) selecting the research design; 5) collecting and analyzing the data; 6) developing the conclusion and discussing new directions for further inquiry into the same or a similar problem. 54 The Scientific Method: The Steps and Sub-Steps Explained Sub-Steps Explanation 1) Conceptual definition Using abstract, generalized ideas to narrow the topic and develop methods of creating specific definitions Define the Problem 2) Operational definition Developing a measurable, specific, unambiguous, clear, precise definition 1) Research old studies Find journals, books, articles, and data published before a certain date and read the pertinent studies 2) Research new studies Find journals, books, articles, and data published within the past 10 years 3) Compare previous studies with your Such comparisons allow us to determine proposed study whether we will be covering the same Review the Literature ground as previous researchers or breaking new ground, or a combination of both; we will also be able to analyze the methodologies of others so that we can determine the soundness of their methods and the robustness of their findings 1) Determine the IV If we are conducting an experiment, or a correlational study, we must attempt to describe and define the agent that will cause a change 2) Determine the DV If we are conducting an experiment, or a correlational study, we must attempt to describe and define the variable or variables that will be changed 3) Determine the null hypothesis This helps us determine whether our results will be based on pure chance rather than a true cause and effect relationship Formulate the Hypothesis 4) Determine the error term We must determine the amount of error or that will be allowed into our study; the Determine the Research Objective error term accounts for human error as well as accounting for the idea that the change in the DV was completely random 5) Write the hypothesis We must know our IV, DV, population, sampling techniques, subjects (various information about our subjects such as race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, disability, education, occupation, area of residence, etc. might be necessary in order for us to make certain determinations about our subjects); and error term 1) Quantitative Research Design Quantitative studies make rigorous use of Select the Research Design statistics and the scientific method Step SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 21 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved The Scientific Method: The Steps and Sub-Steps Explained Sub-Steps Explanation a) Determine the type of statistical There are hundreds of statistical analysis that will be used analyses, but there are only a few that are used regularly— distribution, r2; t-tests; z-scores; cross-tabs, chi-squared, ANOVA (analysis of variance), and MANOVA (multiple analysis of variance)—are a few such common methods of statistical analysis b) Determine the type of instrument The thing we use to gather our data is that will be used to gather data called the instrument; we must determine how we are going to gather our data; if we use an experiment we must carefully design the experiment so that no harm is done to any of our subjects; if we are not using an experiment, we might use questionnaires, surveys, interviews, or secondary analysis of existing data c) Create the instrument If we are using questionnaires, surveys or interviews, we need to write the questions or statements that will be used, and determine the type of scale we will use; the scale used permits us to measure the responses—when you evaluate your Select the Research Design instructors each semester, the scale used is a Likert-type scale which permits only a limited number of responses from the subjects d) Test the instrument for validity We must conduct a few “practice” tests and reliability (called pilot studies) to make sure that our instrument or experiment is valid— we are measuring what we think we are measuring—and reliable—we always obtain the same results 2) Qualitative Research Design Qualitative Studies use research objectives rather than a rigorous hypothesis; qualitative studies are much more subjective a) Determine the type of observation We must decide how much participation that will be used will be necessary in order to gather the information we need b) Determine the instrument that will The thing we use to gather our data is be used to gather data called the instrument; we must determine how we are going to gather our data; if we use an experiment we must carefully design the experiment so that no harm is done to any of our subjects; if we are not using an experiment, we might use questionnaires, surveys, interviews, or secondary analysis of existing data c) Create the instrument If we are using questionnaires, surveys or interviews, we need to write the questions or statements that will be used 1) Determine the population Based on the problem, we choose the Collect and Analyze the Data group of people from which our subjects will be chosen; this is also the group that is the focus of study; people who might be interested in our findings because those findings would apply to them Step SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 22 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved The Scientific Method: The Steps and Sub-Steps Explained Sub-Steps Explanation 2) Determine the random selection There are various computer programs technique that will be used that can be put to use to help us randomize the population Collect and Analyze the Data 3) Randomly select subjects Because populations are often too large to study we usually choose a representative sample—people who are typical (average) of the whole population; each member of the population must have an equal chance of being chosen for the study 4) Administer the instrument If we are using a questionnaire or survey we need some method of administering it to the subjects; in some case social sciences hire firms that actually administer the instrument and collect the raw data 5) Collect the completed instruments Pick up the surveys, questionnaires, completed interviews from whoever administered the instrument 6) Code the raw data Decide how the raw data will be coded for input into a computer; if coding techniques are not very clear and very specific, errors may result 7) Input the raw data Input the coded raw data into the computer 8) Determine the form of statistical Once the data has been entered, the analysis that will be used social scientist must decide what kind of statistical analysis to run; sometimes more than one form of analysis will be used 9) Run the computer analysis Enter into the computer the form of statistical analysis you want to use 10) Analyze the completed data The computer will print out the codes and the numbers; it’s up to the scientist to interpret what those numbers mean 11) Determine findings After all analysis has been completed, we must determine what we discovered and what that discovery means 1) Write a report that discusses, in detail, The final step in the scientific method is each aspect and each step in the to write a paper that covers each step of completed study our study and discusses our methods, our hypothesis, our population, our sampling techniques, the type of coding used, the type of statistical analysis used, and our interpretation of the meaning of our Develop the Conclusion findings 2) Suggest new areas of study The paper we write should include suggestions for new areas of study for the same problem 3) Develop new hypotheses The paper we write should contain at least one new hypothesis for ourselves or other scientists to explore The first step in any study is trying to discover what we want to know. Most of the time, the direction in which scientific inquiry takes us is based on our own, personal understanding of the world in which we live. Our education will lead us to believe some things more strongly than others or to accept certain paradigmatical approaches over others. We will learn, as part of our education, what others have done and what still needs to be done in our particular scientific/academic discipline. We will learn also what interests us, what piques our curiosity, what fascinates or perplexes us and this will lead us to conduct scientific inquiry Step SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 23 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved into certain, relatively specific areas, and while scientists might be interested in a great many things, there is only so much time and money to “do” science. The first step in the scientific method is to define the problem, the problem being the content or purpose of our study— the specific aspect of the physical or social world that we wish to study. The problem is the thing we want to know and we must define it by stating as clearly as possible what it is that we hope to investigate. We want to be sure that we are studying what we think we are studying (which is called validity) and we want to be sure that there is no ambiguity for ourselves or for those who will read the written report of our study. Developing a definition often can be difficult because we must be very specific, unambiguous, clear, precise, and parsimonious. Furthermore, our definition must contain measurability—we must be able to state with precision specific numerical values for our problem. Therefore, the definitional process involves several steps, the first of which is to develop a conceptual definition of the problem under analysis. A conceptual definition involves the use of defining a concept through the use of other concepts, (a concept is an abstract idea or general thought) in order to develop an operational definition which is an explanation of an abstract concept that is specific, unambiguous, clear, precise, parsimonious, and measurable. Operationalizing our definition of the problem is a necessary and important part of any scientific investigation, because we must be able to define our terms accurately enough that they will be completely unambiguous to anyone who is helping us in our research or who reads the published analysis of our research. 55 By reviewing the literature we are sifting through previous studies conducted by others and reviewing, as completely as possible, all of the relevant scholarly studies and information concerning the particular area that we wish to study in order to refine the problem under study, clarify possible techniques (methods) and eliminate or reduce the number of avoidable mistakes. 56 Because we always start out with some idea of what we want to know and because we are trained scientists, we have formulated an educated guess concerning the possible results of our inquiry. The actual formulation of the hypothesis, which is a speculative statement about the relationship between two or more factors (variables), tells us what we are looking for in our research and is a complex procedure requiring the use of statistics. A hypothesis must be testable; it must be capable of being evaluated, and we must begin by being as precise as possible. In fact, there is a regularized and routinized procedure for writing a hypothetical statement. Because there are two different types of research methodologies, only one of which (called quantitative research which is a statistical analysis) requires strict adherence to the scientific method, we often use research objectives (for the methodology involving qualitative research which relies on observation of behavior and a somewhat subjective interpretation of the meaning which people give their behavior) which is an outline of the specific goals or purposes for the research project rather than a formalized hypothesis. Sociologists rarely use the experimental method because of the potential for psychological or social harm to the humans whose behavior we are studying. However, from time to time, under very highly controlled conditions, we may engage in use of the experimental method. 57 The experimental method, described as simply as possible, makes use of two (or more) variables, (a variable is a measurable trait of a characteristic that is subject to change under different conditions—a variable is anything that can be measured and that can change over time), 58 the Independent Variable (which is called the IV and is the agent that causes a change) and the Dependent Variable (which is called the DV and is the thing that is changed). In an experiment, there is a group of people being studied who are called the subjects. As an example, let’s pretend that we are a pharmaceutical manufacturer and we have developed a new drug for depression called AntiDep. In order to ascertain the efficacy (how well it works) of the drug we must experiment with a large group of people over a fairly long period of time. The subjects will be administered a test to determine the amount of depression (the DV) they are suffering in a procedure called a pre-test which creates a baseline which is an initial measurement from which it can be determined if any change has occurred; without a baseline, no quantitative scientific research has any validity. They will then be divided, as equally and as randomly as possible, into two groups: the experimental group and the control group. The experimental group will receive our new drug, AntiDep which is the IV, and the control group will receive a placebo (perhaps a sugar pill). None of the subjects must ever know what group they are in (this is called a single blind study). In fact, sometimes even the researchers don’t know which group any given subject is in until the final stage (this is called a double blind study). After the experiment has run its course, the subjects are once again brought together and they take another test to measure the amount of depression they are suffering (this is called a post-test). If the AntiDep (the IV) is proven effective, the subjects in the experimental group will be shown to suffer from less depression than they did earlier and also from less depression than the control group compared to the original baseline for both groups and to the post-test results for both groups. In other words, if the AntiDep (the IV) works, the amount of depression (the DV) will have changed for the better. This is a cause and effect relationship: the IV (our drug) reduced the amount of depression (the DV)—the IV caused a change in the DV. Because of the ethical considerations involved in Sociological research, we often cannot use the experimental method which leaves us to engage in correlational studies. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 24 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Model of the Experimental Method Hypothesis: The IV will change the DV in the subjects as compared to the DV in a control group who will receive a placebo. This is a double-blind study. The error term is .01. IV: Independent Variable—the thing that causes a change DV: Dependent Variable—the thing that is changed Subjects: the people who are in our experiment (they must be described in the hypothesis, and the method used to choose them must also be explained) Experimental Group: the subjects who will receive the treatment Control Group: the subjects who will receive the placebo Baseline: initial measurement from which it will be determined if any change has occurred, determined by measuring the difference between the results of a pre-test and a post test Pre-Test: determines the baseline; measures the amount of depression in all subjects Post-Test: measures the amount of depression in all subjects Single-Blind Study: the subjects do not know what group they are in; subjects must never know what group they are in Double-Blind Study: neither the subjects nor the researchers know what group anyone is in Experimental Group All Subjects Take Pre-Test Establishes Baseline All Subjects Take Post-Test Control Group Difference from Baseline Shows Amount of Change If the amount of change is greater for the Experimental Group than for the Control Group, and within the parameters for the amount of error, the hypothesis has been proven Correlational studies rely on statistical analysis just as the experimental method does, however, correlational studies only indicate that a change in one variable coincides with a change in another variable. Correlations may indicate causality but they never, prove causality. Correlations only show that there is a relationship between two variables, and although they do indicate the strength of the relationship, they do not prove causality; a one-to-one (1:1), or perfect correlation in which the variables change at the same rate over the same period of time, indicates a very strong relationship, but still does not prove causality. Various problems can occur in correlational and experimental studies including spurious variables in which there is a statistical but meaningless relationship, intervening variables in which a third variable comes between the IV and the DV, and confounding variables which are variables that are unanticipated, often overlooked, and that can seriously compromise the results of an experiment such as that in the Hawthorne Effect. The Hawthorne effect, based on a seriously flawed experiment conducted by Elton Mayo at the Hawthorne plant of AT&T’s wholly owned Western Electric Chicago subsidiary from 1927 through 1932, states that positive differential treatment and increased status of factory workers may motivate those workers to higher levels of productivity regardless of other possibly negative environmental conditions. In other words, according to Perrow “[t]he attention apparently raised morale, and morale raised productivity.” 59 Perrow is arguing that the various experiments conducted at Hawthorne (changes in the light intensity of the workplace, the bank wiring group, and the mica-splitting test room) led social scientists to adopt the human relations model—a model that sounds good and looks good on paper but that is defective in operationalization so that the resulting findings are also defective largely due to the huge numbers of variables. The Hawthorne effect indicates that, when people know they are being watched, it effects significantly their behavior. The Hawthorne experiment failed because the entire experiment was invalid: the researchers were not measuring what they thought they were measuring. Instead of measuring worker productivity (the DV) based on environmental changes in the workplace (the IV), they were measuring the strength of the effect of researcher intrusiveness and the desire of the subjects to please the researchers. 60 61 Because we want to make sure our study is accurate and meaningful, we must make certain that the instrument (experimental methodology, survey, or questionnaire) we are using is both valid and reliable. Validity is the degree to which a measure or scale truly reflects the phenomenon under study; it means measuring what is supposed to be measured. Reliability is SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 25 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved the extent to which a measure provides consistent results; it is always getting the same results, even if those results are wrong! A measure may be reliable without being valid, but all valid measures are always reliable. For example, if I am measuring with a broken or inappropriate device, my results will always be the same even though they are wrong; therefore, they are reliable (always the same) but they are not valid (because they are wrong). However, if my results are always correct (valid) they must be reliable. 62 An Extremely Simplified Model of the Hawthorne Experiment Hypothesis: The IV is the workplace environment which will create changes in the DV which is worker productivity in the subjects as compared to the DV in a control group whose workplace environment will not change. IV: Independent Variable—workplace environment DV: Dependent Variable—worker productivity Subjects: assembly line workers manufacturing telephone switching equipment Experimental Group: 6 female workers in the experimental Bank Wiring Room Control Group: workers in the regular Bank Wiring Room Baseline: initial measurement of productivity of all workers Pre-Test: determines the baseline; measures the total and individual amount of productivity in all subjects Post-Test: measures the total and individual amount of productivity in all subjects Single-Blind Study: N/A; all subjects knew what group they were in Double-Blind Study: N/A; all subjects and the experimenters knew which subjects were in which groups In any statistical analysis there is a mathematically determined “error term” built into our equations which helps us to make sure that our correlational studies are as accurate as possible and that the relationships shown are real relationships. 63 Nevertheless, it is incumbent upon any researcher or any scientist (or any critically thinking person), to look skeptically on any correlational study in which either the error term, or the research methodology, or the hypothesis, or the number of subjects, or the actual variables are unknown. y EXAMPLE: As the number of jobs in the economy increases, the amount of personal savings also increases. x Positive Correlation: As one variable increases at some rate over some period of time, a second variable also increases. If there is a statistical relationship, there is a positive correlation. The distance between the variables (in the figure to the left the distance is indicated by the green arc) as shown on a graph, shows the strength of the relationship. y x EXAMPLE: As the people’s belief in their government decreases, the number of people voting also decreases. Positive Correlation: As one variable decreases at some rate over some period of time, a second variable also decreases. If there is a statistical relationship, there is a positive correlation. The distance between the variables (in the figure to the left the distance is indicated by the green arc) as shown on a graph, shows the strength of the relationship. y x EXAMPLE: As the number of living wage jobs increases, the crime rate decreases. Negative Correlation: As one variable increases at some rate over some period of time, a second variable decreases. If there is a statistical relationship, there is a negative correlation. The distance between the variables (in the figure to the left the distance is indicated by the green arc) as shown on a graph, shows the strength of the relationship. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 26 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved y x EXAMPLE: As the price of gas increases, the number of people driving to work in Houston does not change. No Correlation: As one variable changes, a second variable does not change. Therefore, there is no statistical relationship, and thus, no correlation. The distance between the variables as shown on a graph, shows the strength of the relationship. A research design is a detailed plan or method for obtaining data scientifically. There are two basic types of research design in the social sciences: quantitative which relies on statistics and qualitative which relies on observation. These two types are usually combined in Sociological research. Quantitative research designs emphasize the use of numbers and statistics to analyze and explain social events and human behavior. Some quantitative designs use secondary analysis which makes use of existing data and is often used in comparative/historical studies. The Census Bureau; Departments of Labor and Justice; General Social Survey and many other academic and governmental entities provide such data, often free of charge on the internet. Experimental designs which are attempts to discover cause-and-effect relationships between two variables are also quantitative as are surveys which use questionnaires or interviews to obtain data, (surveys are difficult to design well) and questionnaires which are a series of statements or questions to which an individual is asked to respond and consist of closed-ended questions which use standardized responses, offer very few choices to the respondent, and are the easiest to analyze, and open-ended questions which require the respondent to create an answer and are rather difficult to analyze. 64 Qualitative research designs involve the use of systematic observation focusing on the meanings people give to their social actions. They require subjective interpretation on behalf of both the subjects and the researcher. Qualitative designs use research objectives rather than rigorous scientific hypotheses and consist of such techniques as ethnographic interviews which means learning from people or writing about people, or talking with people in an effort to learn as much as possible about them and their behavior by focusing on a small number of significant individuals (sometimes called informants—a member of a group who is willing to share her/his experiences with the researcher) in particular cultures or sub-cultures. Participant observation is a technique in which a researcher systematically observes the people being studied while participating with them in their activities. William Foote Whyte’s Street Corner Society is a classic example of participant observation in Sociological literature. In the late 1930s, Whyte, a PhD candidate at Harvard University, began a study of Italian immigrants in South Boston. At the time, it was believed that there was little social organization within immigrant communities and that this lack of social organization prevented assimilation and fostered crime. Whyte, by living with these immigrants and getting to know them quite well over a period of more that a year, was able to show that there was a great deal of social organization, that the men, instead of simply hanging aimlessly on street corners were engaged instead in sharing information about employment, politics, social activities and the like. Although Whyte’s participation with his subjects was overly involved, nonetheless, his study is a classic in participant observation methodology as well as in the necessity of conducting such studies rather than merely taking at face value what we suppose to be true about any given group. In case studies there is intensive observation of a particular person, group, or event which, although permitting detailed data to be gathered does not always generalize to a wider population. In content analysis the researcher examines and analyzes communications and focuses on words, themes, or patterns in various media 65 . One such study by a reporter found that the media descriptions of children who were murderers of other children differed based on the race or ethnicity of the children. White children were generally referred to as “freckle-faced,” “angelic,” “all-American,” while minority children were depicted as “sinister,” “dark,” and “frightening.” Thus, content analysis was responsible for showing the glaring, if unintended, racism inherent in our society. Once the research design has been chosen we can get to the fun part of research which is the collection and analysis of data which consists of deciding who is going to be in your study which is called sampling. Sampling determines who will be chosen for a research study and the method used to make those choices. In statistics, we refer to the group of people to whom we would like to generalize our research findings as a population. A population can be only a few people or can be everyone who lives in the United States. In a study on ovarian cancer, the population would be women. In an analysis of voter choice in a presidential election the population would be the entire country. Because we generally do not have the time or the money to study all members of any given population, we must choose a representative sample which is a selection from a larger population that is statistically found to be typical of that population. It is the part of the population that is actually used in any given research study but it must be of sufficient size in order for the results to be statistically meaningful (more than 40 subjects are required). Generally speaking, we use a random sample in which every member of the entire population being studied has the same chance of being selected. In other words, each member of the target population has an equal chance of being chosen as a research subject. Because random samples might be too large we often resort to the use of a stratified random sample which is a proportionate number of the random sample. 66 However, it is absolutely essential that our sample is truly random or our results could be disastrously wrong. At the end of the 1948 presidential campaign between Democrat President Harry Truman and former New York Governor Thomas Dewey, a Republican, a major polling organization conducted a poll by calling people on the phone and asking them who they would be voting for for president. Overwhelmingly the results favored Dewey. There is a very famous photograph taken the day after that election of newly-elected Harry Truman holding up a newspaper that had a banner headline SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 27 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved stating: “Dewey Wins!” The problem with that particular study was in the sampling technique used. In 1948, fewer than 50% of the U. S. population had telephones and those who did tended to be wealthier than average. Then, as now, those who are wealthier than the average tended to vote Republican. Therefore, the pollsters were actually sampling wealthier-than-average Republicans with telephones. If the same poll was conducted today it would be accurate, but at the time, the results were laughably wrong—so wrong that nearly everyone uses this as a textbook example of poor sampling techniques! In order to be able to analyze our data in a qualitative study it usually appears in a form conducive to that end. Sociologists often create scales which are indicators of attitudes, behavior, and characteristics of people or organizations. The Likert-type scale is standard in our discipline. A Likert-type scale, named after its creator, offers closed-choice statements and only a limited number of possible responses from the subjects. A Scantron-type test is a kind of Likert-type scale as are the evaluations that students give their faculty each long semester. 67 The final step in the scientific method is to develop a conclusion and to terminate a specific phase of our investigation and also, and equally importantly, to generate ideas for future study. If our hypothesis has been supported; then we have “done good science,” however, failure to support a hypothesis is also valuable because it prevents others from blindly marching into a hypothetical or theoretical cul de sac. 68 The Code of Ethics of the American Sociological Association, like the Hippocratic Oath, declares, as its first tenet that the Sociologist must never do any harm (psychological, physical, social, spiritual, economic) to another human being. This creates ethical issues in research that we must take into consideration before beginning any scientific inquiry. Today, all universities and research institutions have human subjects committees who are responsible for overseeing and approving or denying any and all proposed research, as well as monitoring on-going research in order to ensure that the code of ethics is not being violated and that no subject or researcher is being harmed in any way. Because a few studies and experiments crossed boundaries that are unthinkable today, we now attempt to maintain, with certainty, our ethical and moral responsibilities as scientists and as members of our society. The Milgram (Yale) and Zimbardo (Stanford) studies in obedience and role embracement are two studies that led to the development of ethical codes and watchdog committees. Thompson and Hickey, in their textbook Society in Focus give a detailed explanation of the Zimbardo experiment. In an attempt to understand what it means to be a prisoner or a guard, Philip Zimbardo and his colleagues screened over 70 volunteers who answered an ad in a Palo Alto, California, city newspaper for both jobs. They ended up with about two dozen young men whom they described as mature, emotionally stable, normal, intelligent college students from middle-class homes throughout the United States and Canada—“the cream of the crop of this generation.” Half were arbitrarily designated as prisoners by a flip of the coin; the others became guards in the experiment’s simulated prisons. Researchers told the “guards” about the seriousness and danger of the situation and recommended that they create their own formal rules for maintaining law, order, and respect during their eight-hour, three-man shifts. The “prisoners” were picked up at their homes by a city police officer in a squad car; they were searched, handcuffed, fingerprinted, and booked at the Palo Alto station house and taken blindfolded to the simulated jail. There they were stripped, deloused, put into a uniform, given a number, and put, with two other prisoners, into a cell that was supposed to be their home for the next two weeks. How did the experiment fare? Zimbardo had to discontinue the experiment after only six days because of the frightening behavior of the mock prisoners and guards. The students could no longer clearly distinguish where reality ended and their experimental roles began. Dramatic changes occurred in the thinking and behavior of the subjects. In less than a week, “self-concepts were challenged and the ugliest, most base, pathological side of human nature surfaced.” Source: Philip Zimbardo. “Pathology of Imprisonment.” Society 9 (April), 1972:4-8. Copyright © 1972 by Transaction Publishers: all rights reserved. 69 Perhaps Stanley Milgram’s obedience experiments are the most widely known by academics and lay people alike. Milgram’s experiments were conducted at Yale University in the early 1960s in response to Milgram’s concern over the groveling obedience shown by all levels of military and civilians during the Nazi regime in Europe from 1936 to 1945. Carole Wade and Carol Tavris in their textbook, Psychology: Second Edition. describe this investigation. [In] Stanley Milgram’s dramatic study of obedience to authority, participants [subjects] thought they were part of an experiment on the effects of punishment on learning. Each was assigned, apparently at random, to the role of “teacher.” Another person, introduced as a fellow volunteer, was the “learner.” When the learner, seated in an adjoining room, made an error in reciting a list of word pairs he was supposed to have memorized, the teacher [subject] had to give him an electric shock by depressing a lever on an ominous-looking machine. With each error the voltage was to be increased. The shock levels labeled on the machine ranged from SLIGHT SHOCK to DANGER—SEVERE SHOCK and, finally, XXX. In reality, the “learners” were confederates [graduate students assisting in the research] of Milgram and did not receive shocks, but none of the “teachers” [subjects] ever realized this. The actor-victims played their parts convincingly, even pleading to be released. 70 Sadly, fully two-thirds of the subjects, out of more than 1,000 people, both male and female, from all walks of life, “inflicted what they thought were dangerous amounts of shock” to another person! 71 Today, researchers in both the natural and social sciences are bound by codes of ethics, are monitored by various oversight committees, and are much more careful about monitoring their own behavior so that no harm comes to their subjects or to the researchers and, therefore, to the value of the research itself. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 28 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Key Terms and Concepts for Module IB: Social Science Research Design and Methodology An Extremely Simplified Model of the Hawthorne Experiment…27 Authority…20 baseline…25 basic steps in the scientific method…22 case studies…28 causality…26 cause and effect…21 cause and effect relationship…25 Code of Ethics…29 collection and analysis of data…28 conceptual definition…25 confounding variables…26 content analysis…28 control group…25 Correlational studies…26 Correlations…26 define the problem…25 Dependent Variable…25 develop a conclusion…29 Dewey Wins…29 double blind study…25 DV…25 Epistemology…20 ethnographic interviews…28 Experience…20 Experimental designs…28 experimental group…25 experimental method…25 Faith…20 formulation of the hypothesis…25 Fritz Machlup…21 goal of science…21 Hawthorne effect…26 Hawthorne Effect…26 Hawthorne experiment…26 human subjects committees…29 hypothesis…25 Independent Variable…25 intervening variables…26 IV…25 knowledge acquisition…20 Machlup’s conclusion…21 Milgram…29 Model of the Experimental Method…26 natural sciences…21 Negative Correlation…27 No Correlation…28 objectivity…21 Occam’s Razor…21 one-to-one (1:1), or perfect correlation…26 operational definition…25 Operationalizing…25 Participant observation…28 population…28 Positive Correlation…27 post-test…25 pre-test…25 qualitative research…25 Qualitative research designs…28 quantitative research…25 Quantitative research designs…28 questionnaires…28 random sample…28 Reliability…26 representative sample…28 research design…28 research objectives…25 reviewing the literature…25 Sampling…28 scientific inquiry…21 scientific method…22 scientific research…20 secondary analysis…28 seven criteria for comparing the social (soft) sciences to the natural (hard) sciences…21 single blind study…25 social sciences…21 Sociology is a science…20 spurious variables…26 stratified random sample…28 strength of the relationship…26 subjective interpretation…28 subjects…25 surveys…28 The Scientific Method: The Steps and SubSteps Explained…22 Tradition…20 Validity…26 variable…25 variables…25 verification…21 Verification…21 William Foote Whyte’s Street Corner Society…28 William of Ockham…21 Zimbardo…29 Module IIA—Culture Of primary importance to the study of human behavior is the study of culture which is the totality of learned, socially transmitted behavior. Culture defines our Weltanschauung, in fact, culture determines everything about us including our ideas, norm, values, customs, and artifacts, in other words, what and how we think, how we behave, what we believe, our understandings of right and wrong and good and evil, how we interact with one another, and what we make. William F. Ogburn (1886-1959) wrote that there were two aspects to culture: material culture which is the physical or technological aspects of our daily lives (food, houses, factories, raw materials, etc.), and non-material culture which are our ways of using material objects (customs, beliefs, philosophies, governments, and patterns of communication). From Ogburn’s concepts we have developed the idea of three types of culture: cognitive culture which is what we think and believe, normative culture which is what we do and how we behave, and material culture which is what we make and how we use the natural world. 72 Cognitive culture (what we think or believe), leads to our values (those aspects of the human experience that we believe to be moral). SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 29 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Cognitive Culture Values Normative Culture This model shows that from our cognitive culture (what we think or believe), comes our values (the moral concepts that are the basis of any given society), which leads to normative culture (our concepts of what is acceptable concerning our behavior, based on our values), which leads to the actual behaviors themselves which reflect both ideal as well as real culture. Ideal Culture Behavior Real Culture How we are How we actually supposed to behave behave From our value system, we develop concepts concerning societally acceptable behavior so that normative culture, which concerns behavior, is based in the cognitive culture of any given society. Most people in any given society know and understand the values (cognitive culture) and norms (normative culture, i.e. behaviors) of that society; however, people do not always behave normatively. The difference between how we are supposed to behave and how we actually do behave is the difference between ideal culture and real culture. Ideal culture embodies the highest values of a society and presupposes that everyone will know, understand, and take to heart those values, thereby being guided by those values to behave always in moral, socially acceptable ways. However, it is clear that people do not always do what they are supposed to, so our ideal culture in the United States tells us that “all men are created equal” but our real culture shows us that inequality based on many aspects of master status is rampant. Parents are supposed to love, support, and protect their children (ideal culture), but we regularly read newspaper articles concerning child abuse (real culture). Clearly then, what we say we value and how we actually behave may be very different indeed. A society is the people who live within the boundaries of a nation-state or country and is defined as a fairly large number of people living in the same geographical territory who are relatively independent of people outside their area and who participate in a common culture and share a similar material and nonmaterial culture. Members of any given society generally share a common language which is a major, possibly primary, element of culture. The study of language and linguistics is a major component of philosophy, anthropology, psychology, and sociology. Language is “any verbal or non-verbal communication engaged in by humans, animals, or even machines. . . . The ability of the human race to structure sentences [and meaning] out of essentially arbitrary words which are themselves constructed from individually meaningless sound “phonemes” is sometimes thought to be the feature that most distinguishes it from other species.” 73 All humans have language and all human languages are extremely complex—there is no such thing as a primitive language. Linguists from various disciplines have studied language origins for many years and have been able to determine that there are several major language groups throughout the world that are related in some way or other. However, there are a few languages, such as Basque, which is related to no other human language and there are also such seemingly odd relationships as the Finno-Ugric language group which includes only Finnish, Estonian, Lapp, and Hungarian! Unfortunately many languages have gone extinct and many more are in jeopardy of being lost—when a language goes extinct, the culture also dies, because language stores culture! Language is made up of various verbal symbols— spoken words and sounds. There are currently 3,000 to 5,000 languages in the world, 2/3rds of which will go extinct in the next 50 years, and some languages are subsets or dialects of other languages. 74 Psycholinguist Noam Chomsky has argued that humans possess, in the Brocca’s region of the brain, a language acquisition device or LAD which permits us to automatically process language. Chomsky argues that human beings’ brains are “pre-wired” and “hard-wired” for language; that the very structure of our brains permits us to use and understand language. In other words, all humans have the ability to learn any human language. Babies do not need to be taught to speak. In fact, babies babble in the rhythms of the language(s) they hear spoken around them. Interestingly, deaf babies born to deaf parents babble using their fingers, and babble in the same rhythms their parents use when signing! 75 Sapir and Whorf were linguists who developed the Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis which states that language precedes thought; language is culturally determined, and does not merely reflect or voice ideas but actually shapes those ideas. What is said, by whom it is said, the manner in which it is said, the specific words used (formal, informal, slang, stylized, etc.), who it is said to, and the context in which it is said are all necessary components in analyzing language. Everyone, everyday analyzes the language of others. Our ability to interpret meaning develops out of our shared understanding of meaning. Language is also comprised of nonverbal symbols such as “body language,” clothing or fashion styles, hairstyles and color, body adornment, and gestures. Like verbal language, nonverbal language is culturally defined, culturally understood, and very often culturally specific. Language is dynamic and changes over time. New languages develop, some languages go extinct, old words die, new words are born, other words have their meanings changed. 76 The phrase “and eek men shal nat make ernest of game” is in Middle English, a language that is no longer spoken by any living culture, but it is a language that is often read by students of early British literature for it is from Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales and means “don’t take things so seriously!” Middle English is a language that is readable, learnable, and understandable today even though it has not been spoken for nearly a thousand years. Elizabethan English, the language spoken during Shakespeare’s time, sounds strange to our ears today; e.g., “wherefore art thou Romeo,” means “why are you named Romeo,” not “where are you, Romeo.” Both Middle English and Elizabethan English are SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 30 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved examples of the dynamic and changing nature of language; it is only dead languages—languages that are not spoken on daily basis by a society—that do not change over time. A Few English Words with Non-English Roots Algebra—Arabic Saloon—Lithuanian Ambulance—French Safari—Swahili Cartoon—Italian Gumbo—Bantu Chocolate, Avocado—Nahuatl* Saint—Latin* Cozy—Norwegian Wisdom—German Cow—Sanskrit* Wagon—Dutch Tree—Sanskrit* Farfetched—Yiddish† Family—Sanskrit* Klutz—Yiddish† Mama—Sanskrit* Forbid—Old English Dada—Sanskrit* Sink (down)—Armenian Crazy—Swedish Cigar—Spanish Cream—Celtic Cargo—Spanish Critical—Greek Banana—Portuguese Moose—Algonquin Storm—Old High German Seagull—Welsh Soup—Old Norse *Dead Languages—these are languages that are not spoken, on a daily basis, by a living, ongoing society/culture. Sanskrit is one of the most ancient written languages in the world and is the basis of Latin as well as the Celtic languages. †This language will be dead within another 50 years Of the 3,000 to 5,000 languages in the world today, 2/3 of them are going extinct which means that they will be unrecoverable because they have never been written down. When the last speaker of a language dies, the language also dies, taking the culture with it into oblivion. Language, thought, and culture are interrelated. Language enables people to store culture by storing meanings: the names of gods, and the ideas of religion and the spirit world, the relationships among family and extended family members, place names and their meaning, the names of plants and animals, the name of the people themselves are all lost when a language goes extinct even though the people may live on, they have fundamentally and inexorably changed. About 2/3rd of all languages today are in danger of going extinct. Conquerors, in the past, have attempted to prevent indigenous people from speaking their own language, thereby destroying the culture of the conquered people, making it easier to communicate with them, making them easier to rule, and preventing them from engaging in secret revolt. One of the reasons that new African slaves in the American South were not permitted to speak their native languages was to prevent them from talking behind the backs of their white masters as well as to rob them of their gods, their values, their customs, their culture and to force upon them the realization that they were a subjugated and enslaved people from whom their masters could take away virtually anything, including the slaves’ sense of their own humanity. Since all peoples share language, language is considered a cultural universal. 77 Cultural universals are general material and non-material practices found in every culture. They are adaptations to meet essential human needs but they are often expressed differently from culture to culture and from society to society. These expressions are adaptable and change over time. Some cultural universals include, but are not limited to: beliefs; calendars; customs; dance; family; food; games; government; language, law, marriage; music; norms; religion; sports; technology, values. Because cultural universals are manifested differently from society to society and since new adaptations create changes, William F. Ogburn developed the Cultural Lag Hypothesis which argues that as our material culture changes we face a period of maladjustment during which the nonmaterial culture is still adapting to new material conditions. The uses for the internet and cloning are modern examples. 78 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 31 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Cultural Universal Marriage Examples of Difference in a Few Cultural Universals Forms Examples of Differing Practices U.S. and The Second Industrialized and Third World World All societies throughout the world have some form of U.S.—the only Saudi Arabia— marriage. The four primary forms of marriage are: legal form of polygyny polygyny (poly=many, gyny=woman); monogamy marriage is (mono=one, gamy=marriage); polyandry (poly=many, monogamy Oneida Colony andry=men); cenogamy (ceno=community, (19th century U.S.A.)— gamy=marriage). Belgium, the cenogamy Netherlands, and Polygyny—the oldest, most accepted form of marriage; Canada are either India— one man has more than one wife at the same time considering or polyandry have passed laws Monogamy—the most modern, most practiced form of permitting marriage; one person has one spouse at a time (in the marriage between industrialized world, serial monogamy is practiced— homosexuals people do not stay married, but get married and divorced (gays and and remarried) lesbians) Polyandry—an old, but extremely rare, form of marriage in which one woman has more than one husband at the same time Cenogamy—a fairly modern, but rare form of marriage in which people are married to multiple spouses at the same time (group marriage) Calendar Sports and Games Family NOTE: Polygyny, Polyandry, and Cenogamy are all different forms of polygamy (many marriages) All societies have some method of marking the passage of periods of time from knotted strings to sundials, to mechanical and digital timepieces to calendars. Calendars show the passage of long periods of time or the passage of seasons and are cultural universals. There is archaeological evidence that board games may have existed as much as 20,000 years ago. Sports are also ancient and often have their roots in pre- or post-war revels. Nuclear—parents and children living in their own separate residence (most modern form) Extended—parents, children, and other blood or adopted kin living in extremely close proximity (most ancient, most common form) U.S. (and the world for business and legal purposes)—2003 A.D. U.S.—football Nuclear family; blended family China—4702 Islam—1424 (based on the date when the Qur’an was given by God to Mohammed) Jews—5764 (based on the supposed date of the creation of the world) World—soccer Extended family (e.g. Nigeria, Mexico, etc.) Blended—parents with children of previous marriages (a modern form, based on nuclear family model) SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 32 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Cultural Universal Education Religion Law/Politics/Government Examples of Difference in a Few Cultural Universals Forms Examples of Differing Practices U.S. and The Second Industrialized and Third World World Formal—the use of formalized learning, by rote or from Formal education Hunterbooks, in classrooms with paid teachers (the most modern Gatherer, form, even though it extends back several thousand years) Pastoral, Horticultural Informal/Traditional—life learning; training of individuals people and small groups by demonstrating necessary life skills as worldwide— a concomitant of day-to day living; learning by watching informal and doing Polytheism—worship of more than one deity (most Christianity, Islam— ancient form) Islam, Judaism— monotheistic monotheistic Hindu, Monotheism—worship of one deity (most modern form) Buddhist, Chinese Traditional— polytheistic Democracy—rule by the will of the people (most modern Democratic Kwakiutl and form) republics or Tlingkit Constitutional Indians— Republic—rule by popularly, democratically elected monarchies (i.e., chiefdoms representatives (began in ancient Greece about 3,000 years England, Spain) ago) New Guinea tribes people— Chiefdom—rule by a powerful individual who is permitted Big Man to rule, but not necessarily chosen to rule, by the will of the people (most ancient form) Thailand— constitutional Big Man—similar to a chiefdom monarchies Monarchy—rule by a king or queen who is believed to be chosen to rule by a deity (ancient form) U.S.S.R.— oligarchy Oligarchy—rule by a few very powerful individuals North Korea, Iraq under Saddam Hussein, Cuba— dictatorships Plutocracy—rule by the wealthiest members of a society Dictatorship—rule by a single extremely powerful individual; no dissent by or choice for the people is permitted Theocracy—rule by clergy SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 33 Iran— theocratic © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Cultural Universal The Economy Medicine Media Examples of Difference in a Few Cultural Universals Forms Examples of Differing Practices U.S. and The Second Industrialized and Third World World Capitalism—a free market, money-based system of Capitalism China, North exchange in which the government has little control or Korea, Cuba— authority over the means and modes of production; stock communism and commodities markets determine the value of goods and services HunterGatherer, Communism—a money-based system of exchange in Pastoral, which the government owns all means and modes of Horticultural production and has virtually complete control and people authority worldwide— barter Barter—a system in which people directly exchange with one another goods and services for other goods and Europe from services (most ancient system) 1500 A.D. until late 19th century— Mercantilism—a system in which merchants control the mercantilism means and modes of production; used during the era of European colonial domination to maintain economic control of the colonies by merchants and colonizing governments Modern/Western—the use of science and the scientific Modern/Western Traditional method Traditional—the use of ancient practices and herbal remedies For-Profit—a modern, industrial method of transmitting cultural information and entertainment by mechanical and electronic means (almost always for profit); operated by a few, large, often multi-national, corporations For-profit Traditional Traditional—relatively small groups of traveling performers or messengers who convey information by word of mouth The primary elements of culture are language (which has already been discussed), values, and norms. Values (which are part of our cognitive culture) are the collective conceptions of what is considered good, desirable, and proper, or bad, undesirable, and improper in any given culture. Values are indications of what the entire society finds to be important and moral. Values may be very specific or very general but they influence public and private behavior of groups and individuals and serve as a criterion for evaluating the actions of others. Although values may change over time, they tend to remain relatively stable and enduring. For example, there are some values that are characteristic of American culture. 79 American core values, those ideas and concepts by which we identify ourselves as a people, include: individualism and freedom (which brings up the question of what individualism and personal ideas of freedom does to group solidarity and our understanding of peoplehood. What, for example are the political ramifications of this value?) Equality of opportunity only, not of outcomes, is a value as old as America itself. As a concomitant is the concept of achievement which assumes that anyone can get ahead if she/he tries hard enough, or, as former President Bill Clinton always said, “work hard and play by the rules.” Unfortunately, this value often sets up a competitive, zero-sum-game mentality in which people believe that if others have opportunities they themselves will be left out. Efficiency and practicality are also core to the American value system, but George Ritzer equates these values with McDonaldization; the homogenization of society to the point that we become trapped in Weber’s “iron cage” of bureaucracy. As Americans we also believe in, or value, progress and technology, but is progress always good? Philosopher and social critic Cornel West argues that our American attachment to material comfort and consumerism (we measure others and are measured by our “stuff”—the things we acquire). West argues that consumerism is responsible for social pathologies brought on by feelings of relative deprivation: when people feel they don’t have what they want they will steal it. Work is a core social value for Americans which may be the reason why we are the richest, most productive, most powerful nation in the world, but we also value leisure which often manifests itself as manic vacations and “shop ‘til you drop” mentalities. Social values are determined by the larger society or culture but they are also determined by Master Status 80 which is SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 34 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, disability, and SES (Socioeconomic status = education + occupation + income) and is determinative of one’s social class. 81 Norms (which are part of our normative culture) are widely shared and widely understood established standards of behavior maintained by any given society. They are “prescriptions serving as common guidelines for social action [behavior]. Human behavior exhibits certain regularities, which are the product of adherence to common expectations or norms. . . . the term refers to social expectations about ‘correct’ or ‘proper’ behavior.” 82 Norms may be formal (generally written norms that involve strict rules for punishment of violators, such as laws which are the body of rules, made by government for society, interpreted by the courts, and backed by the power of the state), and informal which are generally understood but not precisely recorded standards of behavior. The three primary types of norms are folkways, mores, and laws. 83 Folkways are a type of norm. They are informal rules and expectations that guide people’s everyday behavior and include such things as everyday etiquette, manners, proper attire for a given situation, and basic concepts of self-control in all levels of social interaction. Folkways may differ depending on Master Status and situation and violations are not severely sanctioned. Folkways are loosely defined and loosely applied by individuals and although violations are not generally seen as threats to the social order, persistent violation is usually seen as deviance. 84 Mores (pronounced morays) are the norms that people consider essential to the proper working of society. Mores have moral and (sometimes) religious significance and define what a culture or society deems to be right and wrong, good and evil. Mores do not necessarily apply equally to all members of society and may be dependent on SES and Master Status. However, sanctions are formal or formalized, and there are clearly defined rewards or punishments which are administered by authorized social agents. Conformity to mores is ensured by internalization as well as by the negative sanctions imposed by social agents. Mores are based on the values or value system of a society. When mores become formal and are written down or codified they become laws which are formal rules enacted and enforced by the power of the state, which apply to every member of a society. The application of laws is sometimes dependent on SES or Master Status. Formal negative sanctions apply to violations, however, the severity of sanctions is often dependent upon the severity of the violation. Law is the method that large-scale societies use in order to maintain their system of government and to control their populations. Law may be criminal or civil. Criminal law deals with crime, punishment, and the power of the state to maintain social control. Civil law determines the relationships among citizens both private and corporate. 85 Large-scale industrialized societies are characterized by various levels of diversity. The larger the society the more likely it is to contain both subcultures and countercultures. A subculture is a segment of society which, although sharing most of the mores, folkways, and values of the larger society, differs in some significant and noticeable way. It is a culture within a larger culture and characteristic of large-scale, complex societies. Subcultures in America may be based on race or ethnicity, sex or gender, age, religion, disability, SES, or social class. Members of subcultures are not usually seen as deviant, but may be seen as being slightly outside the mainstream. Countercultures, on the other hand, are subcultures that are often seen as deviant because they tend to reject societal norms and values and seek alternative lifestyles. Gangs, cults, militias, and hate groups are all examples of countercultures. Members of countercultures are often employed in non-mainstream jobs—tattoo artists, drug dealers, grunge musicians, etc. Sometimes, people are confronted with a level of diversity that causes discomfort and this discomfort is called culture shock. 86 Culture Shock is disorientation, uncertainty, fearfulness, and a feeling of being out of place when immersed in an unfamiliar culture. Culture shock often occurs when visiting or migrating to a foreign country, however, it is possible to feel culture shock in one’s own country, and even in one’s own city. Large-scale industrial cities are characterized by their racial, ethnic, sexual, cultural, and social class diversity. Culture shock is often based on ethnocentrism which is the tendency to assume that one’s own culture and way of life are superior to all others. Although some degree of ethnocentrism is necessary for social cohesion, it frequently creates conflict between different or diverse cultural groups. However, practicing cultural relativism can be effective in overcoming culture shock. Cultural relativism which views people’s behavior from the perspective of their own culture, places a priority on understanding other cultures rather than dismissing them as “strange” or “exotic.” Cultural relativism was first proposed by anthropologist Franz Boas (1858-1942) who argued that “culture should be understood in terms of its own framework of meaning, rather than being judged by outside investigators according to the values of their own culture.” 87 In other words we must attempt to “walk a mile in someone else’s shoes” before we judge their sociocultural practices as odd or bizarre. 88 Cultures are sometimes plagued by xenocentrism which is the belief that the products, styles, or ideas of one’s society are inferior to those that originate elsewhere and is an economic plague in underdeveloped and developing nations, or xenophobia which is extreme, usually irrational, fear and hatred of other sociocultural groups and is based on extreme ethnocentrism and complete disregard for cultural relativism. 89 Sadly, both xenocentrism and xenophobia lead to sociocultural practices which are educationally and economically detrimental to the societies that practice them. Third World countries often have been convinced by their former colonial masters that they are incapable of sustaining an industrial base and the people have been convinced that any products developed in their own countries are inferior to those that are produced in more industrialized nations. Thus, xenocentrism leads to the collapse of local industries because of the lack of a local market. Xenophobia generally creates a closed-off society like that of the former Taliban government in Afghanistan or the current government of Kim Jung Il in North Korea which has shut its people off from any normative contact with the outside world. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 35 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIA—Culture “and eek men shal nat make ernest of game”…31 A Few English Words with NonEnglish Roots…32 American core values…35 body language…31 Body Ritual among the Nacirema…37 cognitive culture…30 Countercultures…36 Cultural Lag Hypothesis…32 Cultural relativism…36 Cultural universals…32 culture…30 Culture Shock…36 dead languages…32 Dead Languages…32 ethnocentrism…36 Examples of Difference in a Few Cultural Universals…33 Folkways…36 Franz Boas…36 ideal culture…31 Language…31 language acquisition device…31 Language enables people to store culture…32 Language is dynamic…31 linguistics…31 Master Status…35 material culture…30 Mores…36 Noam Chomsky…31 non-material culture…30 normative culture…30 Norms…36 primary elements of culture…35 real culture…30–41 Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis…31 SES…36 society…31 subculture…36 Subcultures…36 The Sacred Rac…40 Values…35 verbal symbols…31 William F. Ogburn…30, 32 xenocentrism…36 xenophobia…36 Module IIB—Socialization Socialization is the process whereby people learn the attitudes, values, and actions appropriate to individuals as members of a particular culture. It is the process of becoming human because it is through the socialization process that we learn how to interact normatively with other humans on a day-to-day basis. Feral children, those like Genie or Victor (discussed below), are children who suffered extreme levels of abuse and or neglect, could not learn to speak normally or to interact normally with others—in some regards they were more animal than human, and yet, ultimately they are human with human hearts and souls who have never had the opportunity to become full members of their society. Socialization affects the overall cultural practices of a society and, because of the “Looking Glass Self” shapes our self-images. It is through the socialization process that the personality (a person’s typical patterns of attitudes, needs, characteristics, and behavior) is shaped. Socialization is a reciprocal process—as we are changed by institutions, we in turn change those institutions, in other words, the “looking glass” reflects both ways. 90 There are many people in the social sciences who believe that human beings are born tabula rasa, which is a Latin phrase meaning “a blank slate.” We do not have the kind of instinctive behaviors that animals do: insects do not have to be taught how to build a nest or find food; fish, and many reptiles and amphibians are abandoned as soon as the female lays her eggs, most mammals are born with some instincts concerning herding or solitary behavior, how to find food, how to recognize and deal with danger, etc., but humans must be taught most of what we know. Human infants cannot survive on their own and humans have very long infancies and adolescences compared to other mammals. This extended period of childhood permits the young to learn how to survive, how to get along with their own kind, and to learn the cognitive and normative culture of their society. It is during the socialization process that this learning takes place. However, one of the major controversies that exists within the social sciences and between the social and natural sciences is that of Nature vs. Nurture (Heredity vs. Environment). What is it that forms us? How do humans become the people that they are? Most social scientists today acknowledge that the interaction between heredity and environment shapes human development. However the Nature/Nurture debate hinges around the dichotomy between: Biology (nature) versus Personal Circumstances (nurture); Heredity (nature) versus Environment (nurture); Genes (nature) versus Family Background (nurture); Physiological (nature) versus Social Influences (nurture); What We’re Born with (nature) versus What We Learn after We Are Born (nurture). However, since 20%-40% of the personality is formed before birth, it is clear that the individual does not develop in a vacuum and is, indeed, a part of a larger, wider society. 91 In order to be a fully functioning, normatively interacting member of society it is necessary that we are socialized into that society. It is through the socialization process that we come to internalize the norms and values of our culture. It is the way in which the expectations of our culture are learned. In 1970, the authorities in Los Angeles County were called to a house in which a child had been fastened to a child’s toilet seat in a darkened room that was filled with urine and feces. The child was quite small and she was unable to walk, stand erect, or talk. The authorities learned that she had been isolated, neglected, fed like a dog from a bowl on the floor, and beaten whenever she vocalized from the age of about 18 months until she was found at the age of 13. She was taken to a hospital where she was treated for her physical symptoms and was then released by the courts into the care of two child development psychologists and one psycholinguist from UCLA who called their young charge Genie. Genie, who beyond all possibility of SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 36 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved hope, was found to be of normal intelligence eventually learned to speak, but in very strange and syntactically incorrect sentences. She also learned to walk and to play, although she was always a rather awkward, shy, and clumsy child. She also began to grow until she reached a height of about five feet. Due to some extremely adverse and horrifically poor decisions by the courts, at the age of eighteen, Genie was returned to the care of her mother. Shortly thereafter Genie was placed in the county’s foster care system where she was again abused. Eventually Genie was place into a long-term care facility where she lives today, silently, in a self-imposed isolation from those around her. In 1800, in a village on the outskirts of Paris, France a “wolf boy” was captured. The child had apparently lived, like an animal, in the woods from approximately the age of 3 or 4 until the age of 13 or 14. Dr. Itard, the physician who assented to care for the child, named him Victor. It is impossible to ascertain how this child managed to survive without being killed by the wild animals in the forest, but he hunted small animals and dug burrows in the ground for shelter. Like Genie, Victor was never able to communicate on any normative basis, nor was he ever convinced to sleep in a bed or to wear clothes on a regular basis. Victor died when he was in his early thirties. Both Genie and Victor were social isolates or feral children, humans who were more like animals than humans—humans deserving of our love, pity, and concern, but humans who were never socialized and were therefore never able to interact with others on anything resembling a normative basis. These are horrific, rare, and tragic case studies, but they have taught us the necessity of socialization in the development of a fully functioning human. These are beings who know that they have a self, but are incapable of bringing it to fruition. It is only humans, chimpanzees, gorillas, and bottle-nosed dolphins who have a concept of the Self which is defined as the sum total of people’s conscious perception of their own identity as distinct from others. A significant indication of the understanding of the self comes from the fact that human beings, chimpanzees, and bottle-nosed dolphins are the only creatures who can look into a mirror and know that what they see is a reflection rather than another creature. By the time a child is 18 months old, they are able to understand that the image they see in a mirror is an image, a reflection, of themselves and not another child standing behind the glass even if they have never seen a mirror or their own reflection before. No other creatures are capable of this level of abstraction or understanding. Even people, chimpanzees, and bottle-nosed dolphins who have never seen their own reflection are capable of recognizing themselves in a mirror. In 1966, an infant, wild-born, female chimpanzee was adopted by Dr. Beatrix T. Gardener and Dr. Allen Gardener at Yerkes Primate Laboratory in Atlanta. The Gardeners are psycholinguists as well as developmental psychologists who were interested in discovering whether a chimpanzee could be taught American Sign Language (the gestural language used by the profoundly deaf). The baby chimpanzee was named Washoe and was taken to the Gardeners’ home where she was treated like a human child. Over time, Washoe did indeed learn a great many signs and even showed that she could think abstractly. By the time Washoe reached adulthood, she became too difficult to manage in a human house and the Gardeners found it necessary to return her to Yerkes. It took them more than a year to resocialize Washoe into the chimpanzee sociocultural environment that she had never known. In other words, they had to teach her how to be a chimpanzee, how to get along in a new and different environment, just as humans are resocialized when we leave home, take a new job, move in with another person, etc. Washoe did adapt, however, and even had a daughter, and an “adopted” son to whom she taught the sign language that she had learned! Washoe now lives at Central Washington University, likes onion oatmeal, and loves to look at shoe catalogues! According to Charles Horton Cooley’s (1864-1929) Looking Glass Self theory (society is a mirror in which the individual is reflected) the self is a product of our social interactions with other people and has three phases: 1) Imagining how we present ourselves to others; 2) Imagining how others evaluate us; 3) Our self image results from our interpretation of these impressions and the resultant self-images are dependent upon interpreting the attitudes of others. 92 In other words, we are shaped by our society, we are products of our society, we are inseparable from our society, and the reaction of society—all of those people around us with whom we come into contact everyday, whether we know them or not—influences our self-image, our selfesteem, our perception and conception of ourselves as acceptable members of our society. A positive reflection conveys a positive image, a negative reflection conveys a negative image which the individual may or may not accept. The Looking Glass Self is society’s judgment of our worth and acceptability, and the way in which we internalize that assessment determines our self esteem. In other words, we are all products of our society and products of our environment. George Herbert Mead (1863-1931), in his book Mind, Self, and Society said that the self is a person’s conscious recognition that he or she is a distinct individual who is part of a larger society. The self emerges through experiencing other people. For Mead there are two components of the Self—the I and the Me which are in constant interaction. The I is the self as subject and is the creative, spontaneous, uninhibited aspect of the self whereas the ME, which is the self as object, is the socialized self that recognizes it is part of a society. The Me represents the traditional, normative, inhibited, reactive aspect of the self and is based on how others will respond. According to Mead, the I and the ME are the basis of thought which allow us to act, react, and interact while taking others into account. Mead also argued that it is because of the influence of Significant Others (those individuals who are most important in the development of the self) that we learn how to function in our society. 93 Mead also developed a stage theory of the development of the self in which he said that the self cannot exist without society. The stages are: the Preparatory (Imitative) Stage in which children imitate those around them, especially family members; the Play Stage wherein children begin using and manipulating the symbols (gestures, objects, and language which forms the basis of human communication) of their culture; Role Taking, which is the process of mentally assuming the perspective of another thereby enabling one to respond from that imagined viewpoint, develops during this stage; and the Game Stage in which the child begins to consider several tasks and relationships simultaneously grasping not only their own social positions, but also those of others around them. According to Mead, the significant other is balanced by the Generalized Other SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 37 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved which is the child’s awareness of the attitudes, viewpoints, and expectations of society as a whole. The understanding of the Generalized Other (the expectations of society) teaches us to act based on how we think others will respond. 94 Erving Goffman (1922-1982) argues that if society is a mirror in which the individual is reflected, then we learn, through the socialization process, how to manipulate that mirror so that we will always be reflected as we want to be reflected. According to Goffman, we are socialized to present different aspects of ourselves to society depending on the circumstances in which we find ourselves and many of our daily activities involve attempts to convey impressions of who we are—consciously creating images of ourselves for others. Impression management is the altering of the presentation of the self and is situation dependent, we try to create a favorable (or sometimes unfavorable) impression in order to change the reflection in the mirror—we want others to view us only as we want to be viewed. Goffman also discussed face work which is the situation-dependent deception of the self and others which necessitates rationalizing in order to overcome or prevent negative self-images. 95 As we grow and develop throughout the life course we engage in many activities that are part of the process of anticipatory socialization which is the process of socialization in which a person “rehearses” for future positions, occupations, and social relationships. Anticipatory socialization aids the smooth and efficient functioning of a culture and helps members of a society become acquainted with the norms, values, and behavior associated with a social position before actually assuming a specific status. Anticipatory socialization includes but is not limited to such things as playing house, internships, work-study programs. Anticipatory socialization is often accompanied by rites of passage which are rituals, ceremonies, and informal recognitions of a person’s change in status that are culturally defined and are often based on changes in age, education, occupation, and marital status. 96 From time-to-time we must go through a process of resocialization which is the process of discarding former behavior patterns and accepting new ones as part of a transition in one’s life. This generally occurs in situations which typically involve considerable stress for the individual. Resocialization can include moving from one country to another, leaving a marriage, going off to college, learning to live alone or with another person, joining the military. Sometimes, however, resocialization involves resocialization in or out of a total institution. Total institutions are institutions which regulate all aspects of a person’s life under a single authority; where residents are cut off from mainstream society and the institution provides for all of the needs of all of its residents. Total institutions often represent a society in microcosm and often create their own culture. Goffman listed four characteristics of total institutions: 1) All aspects of life are conducted in the same place and are under the control of a single authority; 2) Any activities within the institution are conducted in the company of others in the same circumstances; 3) The authorities devise rules and schedule activities without consulting the participants; 4) All aspects of life are designed to fulfill the purpose of the organization. Entrance into a total institution is often accompanied by a degradation ceremony which is a process by which an individual suffers some kind of humiliation before entrance into a total institution. 97 Because human beings must be socialized with the help of others, there are various agents of socialization that aid in the process throughout the life span. All of the institutions of society are, in one way or another, agents of socialization. The family, of course, is the primary agent of socialization because it is within the bonds of family relationships that the child is first introduced into her/his sociocultural milieu. Religion, be it sacred or secular, provides meaning as well as offering a system of values that are usually compatible with the value system of the society, thereby reinforcing the internalization of norms. The educational system not only teaches those things that the society finds valuable, but also reinforces the sociocultural norms within the society’s value system. Peer groups, although not an institution of society, are crucial to the socialization process because it is within peer groups that equality of relationships occurs. Peer groups permit one to experiment with ideas, lifestyles, sexual relationships, same sex and opposite sex friendships, among other things, without fear of ridicule from parents, teachers, employers, religious leaders, or other authority figures. During the 20th century and the very early 21st century, however, mass media has become a major influence as an agent of socialization. Between the ages of 6 and 18 the average young person spends more time watching TV than doing homework; 15,000-16,000 hours vs. 13,000 hours. By age 16, the average TV viewer has seen; 200,000 acts of violence and 33,000 fictional murders. 56% of all American-made TV shows portray actual or threatened violence. Ageism, sexism, and racism, as well as many other negative aspects of our culture are reinforced by the media. We do not yet know where this will lead, but many studies are underway exploring the relationship between society and the influence of the media. 98 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 38 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Symbolic Interactionism Functionalism Conflict Paradigm The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of the Socialization Process 1) The socialization process is coercive, forcing us to accept the values and norms of society. 2) The values and norms of society are dictated and enforced by the Bourgeoisie. 3) The Proletariat follow and accept the values and norms of the Bourgeoisie because all of the institutions of society, particularly education, religion, and the economy are shaped to serve the exploitative purposes of the Bourgeoisie. 1) The socialization process is coercive, forcing us to accept to the values and norms of society. 2) The values and norms of society are agreed upon by all members of society because there is a “social contract” in effect which protects us from one another and keeps society stable and balanced. 3) People follow and accept the values and norms of society in order to maintain their own safety as well as maintaining the social order. 1) The socialization process is voluntary, and we can accept or reject the values and norms of society at will. 2) The values and norms of society change moment by moment based on our mutual, day-to-day interactions with one another. 3) People follow and accept the values and norms of society only if those values and norms serve their own needs and permit them to be more comfortable in their society. Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIB—Socialization agents of socialization…43 anticipatory socialization…43 Charles Horton Cooley…42 degradation ceremony…43 educational system…43 Erving Goffman…43 face work…43 family…43 Feral children…41 four characteristics of total institutions…43 Game Stage…42 Generalized Other…42 Genie…41 George Herbert Mead…42 Goffman…43 I…42 Impression management…43 institutions of society…43 Looking Glass Self…41, 42 mass media…43 Me…42 ME…42 Mind, Self, and Society…42 Nature vs. Nurture…41 Peer groups…43 Play Stage…42 Preparatory (Imitative) Stage…42 process of becoming human…41 Religion…43 resocialization…43 resocialize…42 rites of passage…43 Role Taking…42 Significant Others…42 Socialization…41–44, 41 socialization process…41 stage theory of the development of the self…42 tabula rasa…41–44 the Self…42 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of the Socialization Process…44 total institution…43 two components of the Self…42 Victor…41, 42 Module IIC—Social Interaction and Social Structure For some Sociologists, social interaction creates the social structure, for others the social structure creates the shape of our everyday interactions. Social interaction is the ways in which people respond to one another. According to Symbolic Interactionist Herbert Blumer, social interaction is building block of society. Blumer argues that the distinctive characteristic of social interaction is that “human beings interpret or define each other’s actions instead of merely reacting to each other’s actions.” 99 Social interaction, for the Symbolic Interactionists, is what makes society possible. The two primary types of social interaction include individual acts which are private, personal, and solitary, and social acts which are behaviors that are influenced by and shaped by the presence of others. 100 Social structure is “a term loosely applied to any recurring pattern of social behavior; or more specifically, to the ordered interrelationships between the different elements of a social system or society. Thus, for example, the different kinship [family], religious, economic, political, and other institutions of a society may be said to comprise its social structure, as might norms, values, and social roles.” 101 In other words, the social structure of any society is based on the relationships among the various institutions of society, as well as the ways in which norms, values, and social roles are manifested, and the understanding SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 39 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved and approval (consensus) of the population concerning those relationships and manifestations. Every society has a unique social structure. No one, for example, would argue that America and China have much in common, or that France and Nigeria are very much alike. Even though people everywhere have a great deal in common, their countries may be very, very different and in large part we are shaped by the social structure of the society in which we were originally socialized. In general, the Conflict Paradigm and the Functionalist Paradigm are in diametrically opposite corners in their descriptions of and explanations for human behavior. However, when discussing two aspects of the social structure, they are in complete agreement. For each, the social structure is objective/external, coercive, and concrete. For the Conflict Paradigm the social structure is objective, external to the individual, and coercive (what Émile Durkheim called social facts); it emphasizes that roles, statuses, groups, and institutions exist for the protection and maintenance of the elite, and is based on relations of exploitation often based on master status. There is no consensus among groups or individual members of society, there is only conflict over wealth, power, and status. The social structure is also concrete and exploitative. The Functionalist Paradigm sees the social structure as objective, external to the individual, and coercive; but argues that each and every component or element exists in order to create a stable and enduring society. Any society must have a relatively rigid, yet interactive structure in order to exist. The structure itself creates consensus. The social structure is concrete and stable. For both Conflictualists and Functionalists externality, objectivity, coerciveness, and concreteness are necessary to the social structure. They both agree that the social structure exists whether any individual human being exists within it. The society we are born into exists before we are born and it will exist after we die. Moreover, the possibility that we as individuals will have any significant impact on the shape of our society is extremely remote. Therefore, our society exists whether or not any given individual is there. As an objective entity, the social structure has a reality that supercedes and transcends the individual’s understanding of it. The social structure is more than the sum of its parts and is made up of more than just individuals, so that, for the Conflictualists and the Functionalists, the group is the basic unit of society, not the individual. The Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm differs dramatically from Conflictualism and Functionalism in that the social structure is viewed as subjective, accepted or rejected by the individual throughout the socialization process, and based on negotiated order in which the social structure is continuously created and recreated through micro-level interactions among individuals and small groups. At the micro-level, the social structure is based on social interaction, statuses, roles, groups, social networks, social institutions, and societies in which small groups and individuals create consensus. In this paradigm, the social structure is subjective, abstract, and constantly changing. In other words, the social structure exists within every individual and it is through our everyday interactions with one another that the abstract social structure is created, and continuously recreated, every moment of every day. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 40 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Paradigm The Three Sociological Paradigms: Views of the Social Structure Functionalism Conflict 1) The social structure exists in time and space, is objective/external, concrete, and coercive. 2) Roles, statuses, groups, and institutions exist for the protection and maintenance of the elite; the social structure is based on relations of exploitation often based on master status. 3) There is no consensus among groups or individual members of society, there is only conflict over wealth, power, and status. 4) The social structure is exploitative. 1) The social structure exists in time and space, is objective/external, concrete, and coercive 2) Members of society see the social structure as legitimate (acceptable and working properly) and therefore strive to maintain that social structure. Legitimation (acceptability) maintains social equilibrium or balance which maintains the status quo. 3) The structure itself creates consensus. 4) The social structure is stable Societal-Level Approach/ Unit of Analysis Macro Level—the group is the basic unit of society and the basic unit of sociological analysis. Macro Level—the group is the basic unit of society and the basic unit of sociological analysis. . Symbolic Interactionism 1) The social structure exists only in the minds of individuals and small groups and has Micro Level—the no objective reality; it is subjective/internal, abstract, voluntary, and in constant individual is the flux. basic unit of 2) The social structure is based on social interaction, statuses, roles, groups, social society and the networks, social institutions, and societies in which small groups and individuals basic unit of create consensus. sociological 3) The social structure is subjective, abstract, and constantly changing. analysis. 4) The social structure exists within every individual and it is through our everyday interactions with one another that the abstract social structure is created, and continuously re-created, every moment of every day. There are various mechanisms that engender change in the structure of any given society. Some sociostructural change may be very fast while other change may be so slow as to be virtually indiscernible. Some of the theories of sociostructural change include the economic determinism theory of Karl Marx, the bureaucratic determinism theory of Max Weber, the Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft theory of Ferdinand Tönnies, and the sociocultural evolution theory of Gerhard and Jean Lenski. Marx’s model of the social structure (below) argues that the economy is the primary driving mechanism behind all sociostructural change. According to Marx, “the history of all hitherto existing society is the history of class struggles . . . society as a whole . . . is split into two great hostile camps, into two great classes directly facing each other—bourgeoisie and proletariat.” Even when expressed symbolically, all class struggle is based in economics because society itself is economically based. The rule of the bourgeoisie, the owners of the means of production to whom the proletariat must sell its labor piecemeal for slave wages, has “agglomerated population, centralized means of production, concentrated property in a few hands . . . [and brought about] political centralization . . . with one government, one code of laws, one national class interest.” Marx’s model of the social structure is shown in the following chart. 102 Karl Marx’s View of the Social Structure Family Religion Education Law/Politics/ Media Medicine Government Superstructure the societal institutions that change according to economic conditions the Superstructure is DETERMINED BY the Substructure (the economy) The Economy Substructure the means (land, labor, and capital) and the modes (technology) of production effect the relations of production (how, when, where, by whom, and for how much all of the goods and services of any society are produced This model shows that Marx’s theory is based in economic determinism—the economy determines everything about society. According to Marx, the economic system (the substructure of society, which includes the means—land, labor, and capital—of production, and the modes—technology—of production) is determinative of the shape, the form, of all of the other institutions of SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 41 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved society. As a shift in the economic system takes place, that shift creates ripples which effect dramatic changes in the structure of the family, education, religion, law/politics/government, medicine, and media. The economy is the primary driving mechanism behind all social change; it is the economy that determines the structure of any given society. In the introduction to Hard Times, literarian Kate Flint writes of an article by Henry Morley which appeared in the magazine Household Words (Henry Morley, “Ground in the Mill”, Household Words, IX, 22 April 1854, p. 224) on the same page as chapters 6 and 7 of Charles Dickens’s serialized novel. The social questions alluded to within Hard Times form a dialogue with articles which looked at [the] appalling sanitary conditions [in the factories] . . . at the disgrace of those manufacturers who refused to obey the law and fence in their machinery. [There was, for example,] the article of Henry Morley titled “Ground in the Mill.” (Hard Times, p. xiv) There are many ways of dying. Perhaps it is not good when a factory girl, who has not the whole spirit of play spun out of her for want of meadows, gambols upon balls of wool, a little too near the exposed machinery that is to work it up, and is immediately seized, and punished by the merciless machine that digs its shaft into her pinafore and hoists her up, tears out her left arm at the shoulder joint, breaks her right arm and beats her on the head. (Hard Times p. xiv) In other words, Dickens and many of his contemporaries were clearly aware not only of the physical dangers of factory work but of the moral and spiritual danger to the human soul—what Marx called alienation. 103 Frederick Engels (, Marx’s friend, companion, and supporter wrote of the unbelievably horrific and therefore alienating conditions in which the working classes in Manchester, England lived in 1844: 104 Going from the Old Church to Long Millgate, the stroller has at once a row of old-fashioned houses at the right, of which not one has kept its original level; these are remnants of the old pre-manufacturing Manchester, whose former inhabitants have removed with their descendants into better-built districts, and have left the houses, which were not good enough for them, to a population strongly mixed with Irish blood. Here one is in an almost undisguised working-men’s quarter, for even the shops and beerhouses hardly take the trouble to exhibit a trifling degree of cleanliness. But all this is nothing in comparison with the courts and lanes which lie behind, to which access can be gained only through covered passages, in which no two human beings can pass at the same time. Of the irregular cramming together of dwellings in ways which defy all rational plan, of the tangle in which they are crowded literally one upon the other, it is impossible to convey an idea. And it is not the buildings surviving from the old times of Manchester which are to blame for this; the confusion has only recently reached its height when every scrap of space left by the old way of building had been filled up and patched over until not a foot of land is left to be further occupied. The south bank of the Irk is here very steep and between fifteen and thirty feet high. On this declivitous hillside there are planted three rows of houses, of which the lowest rises directly out of the river, while the front walls of the highest stand on the crest of the hill in Long Millgate . . . [sic] In one of these courts there stands directly at the entrance, at the end of the covered passage, a privy without a door, so dirty that the inhabitants can pass into and out of the court only by passing through foul pools of stagnant urine and excrement. This is the first court on the Irk above Ducie Bridge—in case any one [sic] should care to look into it. Below it on the river there are several tanneries which fill the whole neighborhood with the stench of animal putrefaction. . . . [sic] . . . [sic] At the bottom flows, or rather stagnates, the Irk, a narrow, coal-black, foul-smelling stream, full of debris and refuse, which it deposits on the shallower right bank. In dry weather, a long string of the most disgusting, blackish-green, slime pools are left standing on this bank, from the depths of which bubbles of miasmatic gas constantly arise and give forth a stench unendurable even on the bridge forty or fifty feet above the surface of the stream. But besides this, the stream itself is checked every few paces by high weirs, behind which slime and refuse accumulate and rot in thick masses. Above the bridge are tanneries, bone-mills, and gas works, from which all drains and refuse find their way into the Irk, which receives further the contents of all the neighbouring [sic] sewers and privies. It may be easily imagined, therefore, what sort of residue the stream deposits. Below the bridge you look upon the piles of debris, the refuse, filth, and offal from the courts on the steep left bank; here each house is packed close behind its neighbour [sic] and a piece of each is visible, all black, smoky, crumbling, ancient, with broken panes and window frames. The background is furnished by old barrack-like factory buildings. On the lower bank stands a long row of houses and mills; the second house being a ruin without a roof, piled with debris; the third stands so low that the lowest floor is uninhabitable, and therefore without windows or doors. Here the background embraces the pauper burial-ground, the station of the Liverpool and Leeds railway and, in the rear of this, the Workhouse, the “Poor-Law Bastille” of Manchester, which, like a citadel, looks threateningly down from behind its high walls and parapets on the hilltop, upon the working-people’s quarters below. 105 Dickens, in The Old Curiosity Shop describes such a scene as the place in which the odious dwarf Quilp keeps his offices and his home-away-from-home living quarters. In Oliver Twist Dickens describes such housing as the sort of place where Fagan ran his ring of boy thieves and where Bill Sykes and Nancy lived. Unfortunately, such conditions exist even today, often in SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 42 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved squatter’s camps of the megalopolises of Second and Third World countries but, far too often, in the United States itself. Writer and social critic Jonathan Kozol, for example, exposes the living conditions of the poor in Mott Haven and Hunt’s Point in the South Bronx in New York City in much the same terms. There are no factories there (and therefore no jobs), but there are incinerators that burn the refuse from hospitals, and there is an enormous prison directly across the street from one of the junior highs. 106 It was just such conditions that eventually led to the writings for which Marx has become so justly famous. Karl Marx's theory of the relationship between the economy and other components of the social structure is based on the dialectic of economic determinism, in which, to put it simply, the economy is at the core and is the foundation of all other social structures and determines and defines the form and practice of those structural components called social institutions. 107 Society, to Marx, is divided into two levels: the substructure, which is the economy and is bifurcated into the means (land , labor, capital) and modes of production (technology), and the relations of production (the social relations in and out of the work place); and the superstructure, which is a byproduct of and dependent upon the form and practice extant in the economic system. As the economic structure evolves from hunting-gathering, to simple farming, to feudalism, to capitalism, and eventually from capitalism to communism the superstructure changes in order to protect the economic system and those who control the means and modes of production (the ruling class or bourgeoisie). As technology changes each of the institutions of society 108 also changes. Within the family there is a split between home life and work life and the family is no longer the primary unit of production. The educational system changes in order to provide properly socialized and indoctrinated workers while the value system also changes to one that accuses and blames the individual for his/her own lack of economic success. Religion begins to espouse the premise that what occurs in this life is unimportant and that poverty is instrumental to living a good life and receiving one’s true rewards in the afterlife. Politics and government are dependent upon and reflective of the economic system which it supports by legislating in favor of the bourgeoisie who own or control the means and modes of production and, therefore, control the economic system, and, by default, the social structure itself. 109 In 1887 a German Sociologist named Ferdinand Tönnies wrote a book titled Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft (which means Community and Society), in which he argued that the rapid expansion of technology and large-scale industrialized societies was sounding the death knell for small-scale societies. Modernism presupposes a money economy, massive division of labor, industrialization, and urbanization. Ferdinand Tönnies, in 1887 wrote one of the more massive treatises on modernity entitled Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft or Community and Society sometimes translated as Community and Association. Tönnies, following many other earlier theorists beginning with Plato, posited that the rise of the capitalist industrial state in the late 19th century had profound implications for the character of interpersonal relationships among individuals and groups. Tönnies developed the polar opposite ideal types of Gemeinschaft and Gesellschaft which he used to explain the historical (and dialectic) change that was taking place as a result of the industrial revolution and various sociopolitical events that were occurring in his native Germany. Although similar to Durkheim’s concepts of Mechanical and Organic Solidarity, and Weber’s typologies of action orientation (Goal Orientation and Value Orientation which are rational, and Emotional /Affective Orientation and Traditional Orientation which are non-rational or irrational), Tönnies theory was all-encompassing including a Marxist interpretation of economics and a Hegelian view of history as a dialectic process. According to Tönnies, Community (Gemeinschaft) is intimate, real, ancient, organic, interconnected, consensual, sympathetic, unified (by blood ties, physical proximity, and intellectual ties or common belief and value systems), self-sufficient, paternalistic, and confining. Society (Gesellschaft) on the other hand is formal, artificial, new, inorganic, disconnected (by different and divergent belief and value systems), contractual, pitiless, disjointed, interdependent, ruled by capitalists for their own use and profit, and alienating. 110 “Gemeinschaft was the world of close, emotional, face-to-face ties, attachment to place, ascribed social status, and a homogeneous and regulated community. Gesellschaft has come to be linked with urbanism, industrial life, mobility, heterogeneity, and impersonality.” 111 Max Weber differed from Marx and argued that the primary driving mechanism behind all sociostructural change is the bureaucracy and NOT the economy. According to Weber, the bureaucracy determines, defines, and drives the economy which, in turn, drives all other social institutions. The bureaucracy is ubiquitous, survives even when other social institutions collapse, intrudes itself into every aspect of human life, and traps us in its “Iron Cage.” We will take a closer look at Weber’s theory of bureaucratic determinism in the next section. Gerhard Lenski and Jean Lenski, in their theory of sociocultural evolution, argue that technological change drives sociocultural change. Because technology is critical to social organization the complexity of the technology determines the complexity of the society. The Lenskis, among many others, maintain that there are six types of societies: 1) HunterGatherers—a society in which people make their living by some combination of hunting, foraging for wild foods, and fishing with simple technologies; 2) Pastoralists—a society that depends for its livelihood on domesticated animals; 3) Horticulturalists—a society in which hand tools are used to grow domesticated crops; 4) Agrarianists—a society that depends for its subsistence on crops raised with the help of plows, draft animals, and intensive agricultural methods; 5) Industrial Societies—a society that relies on machines and advanced technology to produce and distribute food, information, goods, and services; 6) Postindustrial Society—a society whose economic system is engaged in the processing and control of information. Michael Harrington said that postindustrial societies would be characterized by stratification between those who have access to information and those who don’t whom he called the information rich and information poor. 112 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 43 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Six Types of Societies 113 Type of Society HuntingGathering Pastoralists Horticulturalists Agrarianists Industrial Postindustrial Period of 100 TYA to Present 15 TYA to Present 10-12 TYA to Present 8 TYA to Present 18th to 20th Centuries 21st Century People make their living by some combination of hunting, foraging for wild foods, and fishing with simple technologies. 35-50 A society that depends for its livelihood on domesticated animals A society in which hand tools are used to grow domesticated crops. A society that depends for its subsistence on crops raised with the help of plows, draft animals, and intensive agricultural methods. A society whose economic system is engaged in the processing and control of information. 150-3,000 1,000-100,000 Millions to over a Billion A society that relies on machines and advanced technology to produce and distribute food, information, goods, and services. Millions to over a Billion Stone, Bone, Wood; Domesticated Animals; Human Power Sickle, Hoe; Animal-Drawn Plow Agriculture; Irrigation Agriculture; Animal Power; Machine Power; Electric, Petroleum, Nuclear Power Computer Information Technologies; Historical Dominance Primary Societal Characteristics Average Population Size Forms of Technology Human Power Human Power Millions to over a Billion Photonics; Robotics Wind Power Economy Subsistence; Several-Week Surplus. Surplus on the Hoof. Several-Month Surplus. Agriculture; Market Exchange Surplus. Industrial; Mass Production and Market Economy. Global Service Economy. Economic System Barter Barter Barter Capitalism, Communism. Capitalism, Communism. Settlement Pattern Nomadic Nomadic; SemiNomadic Semi-Permanent Villages Feudal, Semi-Feudal; Capitalism, Communism. Cities And Empires; Large Rural Populations Majority of Population in Cities Megalopolises Social Organization Family/Kin Bands; Little Stratification Chiefdoms; Chiefdoms; Religious and Military Specialization; Extreme Stratification Complex Institutions; Extreme Stratification Distinct Institutions; Growth and Development of the NationState; Widespread Stratification Growth of Scientific and Technical Institutions; Global Economic and Power Structures; Widespread Stratification Social Structure Gemeinschaft Gemeinschaft Gemeinschaft/ Gesellschaft Gesellschaft Gesellschaft Complex Complex Complex Monarchy Democratically Elected Leaders Dictatorships Oligarchy Plutocracy Monarchy Democratically Elected Leaders Dictatorships Oligarchy Plutocracy Monarchy Democratically Elected Leaders Dictatorships Oligarchy Plutocracy Ancient Egypt; Feudal Europe; Most 21st Century Third World Countries; Modern China United States; France; Japan; Australia; Canada; Most First World Countries; 7 of the 8 Nations of the World Economic Summit Most First World Countries; Emerging in 7 of the Extreme Stratification Division of Labor Sex and Age Sex; Age; Ownership of Animals Type of Leadership Acephalic (Leaderless) Chiefdom Chiefdom Modern Examples Pygmies of Central African Republic; !Kung of South Africa And Namibia; Masai of Kenya; Fulani of Nigeria; Navajo of American Southwest (Both Before 1970) SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 44 Gesellschaft Sex, Age, Ownership of Land and Animals; Military; Religious; Artisans Chiefdom Headman Big Man Yanomamo of Brazil; Dani of New Guinea Highlands 114 8 Nations the World Economic Summit of © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Four Theories of Sociostructural Change Theory Mechanism of Change Economic Determinism The Economy— As the economic system changes, all the other institutions of society change, which changes the relationships among people Ferdinand Tönnies Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft Urbanization— As societies move from rural to urban, the institutions of society experience huge levels of social change, which changes the relationships among people Gerhard Lenski and Jean Lenski Sociocultural Evolution Technology— As technology changes and new technologies are developed and widely utilized, the institutions of society expand, creating significant changes in the social structure, which changes the relationships among people Max Weber Bureaucratic Determinism Bureaucracy— As a society becomes more rational and routinized, the bureaucracy becomes the primary mechanism of social change and social control, which changes the relationships among people The four basic elements of the social structure are statuses, social roles, groups, and social institutions. Statuses (the idea of which comes to us from the works of Max Weber) are socially defined positions within any society and tend to be a hierarchical rankings of people and their positions based on various socially defined characteristics. Statuses are occupied, roles are played. Master Status includes race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, disability, and SES (socioeconomic status which is inclusive of the combined effects of income, occupation, and education). Master Status is a ranking that combines several factors to assess peoples’ positions in the stratification hierarchy (levels of social acceptance by the dominant group). Of all the statuses a person occupies, it is the one that largely defines who that person is, and what his or her goals and opportunities are. All people have at least one and possibly several Master Statuses. For example, this writer occupies several statuses in society: white, married, female, middle-aged, upper middle class, professor of Sociology and her Master Status (as is true with most people) is the way in which she defines herself to herself and others. Master Status includes those elements we are born with (ascribed statuses) as well as those we accomplish or attain through our own efforts (achieved statuses). Ascribed statuses include those aspects of ourselves that we are born with and that we do not generally change such as our race/ethnicity, sex, eye color and shape, hair texture, and basic physical appearance (phenotype). Achieved statuses on the other hand are those aspects of ourselves that require us to do something to accomplish such as our adult income, education, and occupation (SES). Everyone has master status—the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! It is not about social acceptability as such. Various parts of our master status make us more or less acceptable, more or less privileged vis á vis the dominant group, but everyone has race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, ability/disability, and SES (income + education + occupation) whether or not they are part of the dominant group. Consider a Hispanic doctor in the 1930s—his (note the male pronoun) master status as a doctor (SES) is privileged but his master status as a Hispanic (race/ethnicity) is not, vis á vis the dominant group. Both minorities and dominant group members have master status—to reiterate, the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! One’s Master Status, or the Master Status one chooses to present, is sometimes situationally dependent. For instance, this writer’s Master Status as a professor of Sociology generally becomes evident only when performing the role of professor of Sociology. Her Master Status as a white female, although always evident, is largely ignored unless whiteness or femaleness becomes a particular situational issue. 115 A social status (any status) is a social position which must be filled. However, any qualified person can fill any social position. Those of you who are reading this are probably college students—a status which must be filled because it is necessary for people in our culture to be formally educated. Some of you are probably parents— another status that must be filled because it is critical for any culture to add to its population. Some of you are employees who have jobs and go to work everyday—also a necessary status in society because the economy must be supported and maintained and there are basic social services necessary for the smooth operation of an industrialized society. Each status in society has Theorist(s) Karl Marx SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 45 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved certain obligations, expectations, duties, rights, and functions that go with them. College students are obligated to pay for their education, expected to do the reading and write the papers that have been assigned, required to come to class and complete the coursework satisfactorily in order to earn a passing grade, study hard, be treated with dignity and respect, and graduate. However, as we all know, some people fail to adequately fill their status. A social role is the way we fill the various statuses we occupy. You have probably heard someone say that someone else is “just taking up space” meaning that they are not doing their job or fulfilling the obligations, expectations, duties, rights, and functions that go with a specific status. They are not playing the role. We have all seen people in school plays who were wrong for a particular part, or who couldn’t remember their lines or their position on the stage, or who was simply bad at acting. That person (status=actor) is not playing satisfactorily the part (role=part). All of the various aspects of our Master Status (the primary social positions we occupy) and sometimes the way we play our social roles can and do effect our ranking on the stratification hierarchy which will be discussed in a later section. 116 117 Our social roles can often create situations in which we must make choices among different life options, this is called role conflict and it occurs when two or more incompatible expectations arise from two or more social positions held by the same person. Choosing which role to play may require making ethical choices: parent or student, student or friend, student or employee. Sometimes it becomes necessary for us to remove ourselves from a role that has become central to our sense of self, central to our identity. 118 Helen Rose Ebaugh, a former Roman Catholic nun and now a professor of Sociology at the University of HoustonCentral campus, developed, as the basis for her doctoral thesis, the theory of role exit which is the process of disengagement from a role that is central to one’s self-identity. Dr. Ebaugh’s experience of leaving the convent and the religious order set the stage for her discovery of role exit which has four stages: 1) doubt; 2) search for alternatives; 3) departure; 4) creation of a new identity. This process may be applied to leaving home for the first time, joining the military, getting married or divorced, graduating from a residential college, migrating to a new country, or many other occasions during our lives. 119 One of the four basic elements of social interaction is groups. A group may be a “combination of people who may or may not share a feeling of unity (as in social class groups) and may or may not be involved in regular social interaction (as in the case of certain ethnic groups)” 120 , usually, however, a group is a combination of people who do share feelings of unity and who do interact regularly. Charles Horton Cooley developed the idea that there are two kinds of groups which he called primary and secondary. A primary group consists of family and friends, (the people closest to you), and is “characterized by close, intimate, face-to-face interaction.” 121 Secondary groups, on the other hand are those people with whom you go to school, with whom you work, who belong to the same clubs or organizations, people who are not close and intimately related to you but who are relatively distant and impersonal. 122 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Groups Characteristic Primary Group Secondary Group Small Large Size Affective, Expressive Instrumental Relationships Informal Formal (Legal/Rational) Social Control Long-term Short-term Duration Family, friends Groups Members Corporations, churches, political parties 123 Social networks are a form of group interaction. Social networks are the total web of an individual’s relationships and group memberships—a series of social relationships that link a person to directly to others and therefore indirectly to more people such as family, friends, neighbors, peers, co-workers, club members, team members. Social networks have no clear boundaries or common goals and are characterized by primary and secondary group relationships. 124 It has been said that we are all within six people from any other person in the world, a concept called six degrees of separation. There is a computer game that is called “Six Degrees of Kevin Bacon.” Kevin Bacon is an actor who has been in motion pictures such as Footloose, A Few Good Men, The Hollow Man, and many others. According to the game, it is possible to connect anyone who has ever been in an American movie to Kevin Bacon within other six people. One night, while playing this game with some friends, we decided to see if any one of us could be connected, within six other people, to Kevin Bacon. (None of us has any experience in the motion picture industry or has any direct relationship with any one in that industry.) As it turned out, one of us knew a man, Monsignor John O’Sullivan who was the brother of Maureen O’Sullivan, an actor who played in Woody Allen’s Hannah and Her Sisters with another actor named Dianne Wiest who was in the film Footloose with Kevin Bacon! Another one of us had a great grandparent who knew someone who knew Lenin. Social networks mean that we are loosely connected to all the people we know, all the people they know, all the people they know, and so on, and so on, ad infinitum. Social institutions “consist of all the structural components of a society through which the main concerns and activities are organized, and social needs are met,” 125 they are “social practices that are regularly and continuously repeated, are sanctioned and maintained by social norms, and have major significance in the social structure. . established patterns of behavior organized patterns of beliefs and behavior centered on basic social needs.” 126 Functionalists argue that institutions are society’s method of caring for basic human needs and solving basic problems, while Conflict theorists maintain that institutions represent oppressive relationship that disproportionately benefit the elites, and the Symbolic interactionists posit that institutions change, are in a constant state of flux, and are representative of any variety of human interactions. Social institutions include: the family, education, religion, law/politics/government, the economy, medicine, and media. 127 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 46 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIC—Social Interaction and Social Structure Achieved statuses…50 Agrarianists…48 Ascribed statuses…50 bureaucracy…48 Charles Dickens…47 Charles Horton Cooley…51 Community and Society…48 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Groups…51 Conflict Paradigm…45 economic determinism…46, 48 family, education, religion, law/politics/governme nt, the economy, medicine, and media…51 Ferdinand Tönnies…48 four basic elements of the social structure…50 four stages: 1) doubt; 2) search for alternatives; 3) departure; 4) creation of a new identity…51 Four Theories of Sociostructural Change…50, 44–52 Frederick Engels…47 Functionalist Paradigm…45 Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft…48 Gerhard Lenski and Jean Lenski…48 Ground in the Mill…47 group…51 groups…50 Hard Times…47 Helen Rose Ebaugh…51 Herbert Blumer…44 Horticulturalists…48 Hunter-Gatherers…48 individual acts…44 Industrial Societies…48 information rich and information poor…48 just taking up space…51 Karl Marx’s View of the Social Structure…46 Marx’s model of the social structure…46 master status…50 Master Status…50 Max Weber…48 Michael Harrington…48 objective/external, coercive, and concrete…45 Pastoralists…48 performing the role…50 playing the role…51 Postindustrial Society…48 primary group…51 role conflict…51 role exit…51 Secondary group…51 SES…50 six degrees of separation…51 six types of societies…48 social acts…44 social institutions…50 Social institutions…51 social interaction…44– 52 Social networks…51 social position…50 social positions…51 social role…51 social roles…50, 51 social status…50 social structure…44, 45 Social structure…44 sociocultural evolution…48 statuses…50 Statuses…50 subjective, abstract, and constantly changing…45 Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm…45 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Views of the Social Structure…46 types of social interaction…44 Types of Societies…49 working classes in Manchester…47 Module IID—Groups and Bureaucracies As stated in the previous section, a group is any number of people with similar norms, values, and expectations who regularly and consciously interact. Charles Horton Cooley developed the concept of primary and secondary groups. But, in Sociological terms, there is more than this to group relationships. In-groups and out groups are of elementary concern to Sociologists who study inter-group relations. An in-group is any group that people identify with and to which they have a strong sense of loyalty and an out-group is a group that people consider less worthy and less desirable than their own group. In-group and out-group membership is entirely dependant upon one’s own loyalties and group identification. 128 Oftentimes, in-groups and their respective out-groups are 129 characterized by some level of rivalry, from the type of rivalry that exists between students of different universities to the much more serious rivalries between countries or religions which result in war and death. Some in-groups and their respective out-groups might include Aggies and Longhorns, or jocks and nerds. However, at its most serious and deadly level, in-group and out-group relationships include such lethal enmities as those between Muslims and Jews in Israel, between Indians and Pakistanis contending over the borders of Kashmir, or the problems between men and women, minorities and whites, rich and poor, Protestants (non-Catholic Christians) and Roman Catholics in Northern Ireland. Whether any one of these is an in-group or an out-group depends on one’s perspective and to which group one actually belongs. However, in the wider world, in-group and out-group relationships are decided by power. The ultimate in-group in any society is based on who holds and wields power. Therefore, when analyzing ultimate in-groups and out-groups in the world, the ultimate in-group is almost always male, wealthy, and middle-aged. The ultimate in-group in any society always creates social boundaries in order to consolidate and hold their power. Social boundaries may be material or symbolic devices that delineate who is inside and who is outside a group. Interactions between and among groups may be regulated by custom, law, or physical boundaries. Such boundaries include various aspects of master status such as race or ethnicity, sex or gender, age, religion, disability, and SES. The ultimate in-group in a society may set up physical boundaries such as ghettos or quarters, legal boundaries such as Jim Crow or other segregation laws, or symbolic boundaries such as skin color, eye shape, hair texture, sex, age, religion, or disability. Such social boundaries serve to maintain the power of the ultimate in-group and to prevent out-group members from gaining power. German Sociologist Georg Simmel developed a theory concerning the ways in which group size determines the quality of group relations. According to Simmel, people interact differently depending on the size of the group. In small groups, SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 47 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved people are able to interact simultaneously but as the number of group members increases, the relationships change dramatically. Although there are no specific numbers for when these changes occur, (we all know when a small group becomes a crowd); there is an almost palpable feeling that the quality of the group has changed as the quantity of the group changes. As groups increase in size the types of interactions among group members changes. The larger the group, the more formal group interactions become, and as groups grow in size, the need for various levels of leadership becomes apparent. Simmel maintained that there are three types of groups: the isolated individual, the dyad, which is a two-member group, and the triad, which is a three person group. The isolated individual is self-isolated but in still in a relationship because society nonetheless exists and the potential for interaction is always present. A dyad is the most intimate and fragile of all groups because if one group member leaves, the group no longer exists. A triad is a three person group which is much more stable than a two person group and which creates the opportunity for many more levels of interaction among group members. In a three-person group, the third person may play a mediating role, a unifying role, or a divisive role. According to Simmel, each of these types of groups is not just quantitatively different but differs in quality, one from the others. The largest possible group is a society and there are many theories of society that attempt to understand human relationships on such a grand scale. Each of the three Sociological paradigms tries to explain how and why humans relate to each other in the ways that they do, as well as trying to explain the mechanisms that create and maintain any given social structure. Another German Sociologist, Robert Michels in 1915, developed a theory called the “Iron Law of Oligarchy.” According to Michels, “He who says bureaucracy says oligarchy,” which means that rule by a few becomes the norm regardless of the goals or management style of the organization. Milovan Djilas argued that the Communist Party in Russia was doomed to become an oligarchy because power seeks to maintain itself. 130 Max Weber who as we learned in the previous section, differed from Marx, argued that the primary driving mechanism behind all sociostructural change is the bureaucracy and NOT the economy. According to Weber, the bureaucracy determines, defines, and drives the economy which, in turn, drives all other social institutions. The bureaucracy is ubiquitous, survives even when other social institutions collapse, intrudes itself into every aspect of human life, and traps us in its “Iron Cage.” The characteristics of bureaucracies are: 1) Division of labor in which specialized experts are employed in each social position to perform specific tasks; 2) Hierarchy of authority in which each position in a formal organization is under the control of someone else who is higher up on the ladder; 3) Written rules and regulations which provide clear standards, specific goals, and create an atmosphere of impersonality. (Unfortunately, as Robert Merton argued, impersonality may engender the bureaucratic personality which is overzealous conformity to official regulations rather than actual goals); 4) Impersonality means that positions NOT people are of utmost importance to the organization, and although it is meant to guarantee equal treatment it creates “the Iron Cage of Bureaucracy,” which traps us like unfeeling, uncaring cogs in a wheel; 5) Employment based on technical qualifications which is designed to prevent favoritism or nepotism. 131 132 Another German Sociologist, Robert Michels in 1915, developed a theory called the “Iron Law of Oligarchy.” According to Michels, “He who says bureaucracy says oligarchy,” which means that rule by a few becomes the norm regardless of the goals or management style of the organization. Milovan Djilas argued that the Communist Party in Russia was doomed to become an oligarchy because power seeks to maintain itself. 133 Each of the major Sociological paradigms has developed theoretical responses to the existence of bureaucracies. According to the Functionalists, bureaucracies serve a public good, are necessary for the proper functioning of society and provide access to the goods of society. The Symbolic interactionists argue that individuals within organizations set the goals and that organizations are not greater than the sum of their parts. The Conflictualists maintain that bureaucracies exist to serve the needs of the bourgeoisie and that they are exploitative. 134 As with many other aspects of society, there are certain consequences to bureaucracies. George Ritzer wrote a book titled The McDonaldization of Society in which he argued that society has become so homogenized or blended together that it functions like a fast-food restaurant. McDonaldized bureaucracies rely on: efficiency; predictability; quantifiability (which is the profit motive); and control. McDonaldization, according to Ritzer, adds to the iron cage and serves to dehumanize us by turning us into mindless machines, and mere dupes of the capitalist system which exists for its own benefit. 135 One of the most significantly detrimental aspects of group behavior, as recognized by Irving Janis, is Groupthink which is a group decision-making process in which the group makes more extreme choices than they would make individually. Groupthink occurs in small groups and is not the kind of behavior that generates riots or other forms of social action. In order for a decision-making process to be groupthink, it requires that group members are relatively cohesive and relatively familiar with one another. It is risk-taking behavior in which only two options, both worst-case scenarios, are considered; a decision-making process in which group members ignore alternative solutions in order to maintain group consensus and harmony. Groupthink ALWAYS produces negative results. Two aspects of Groupthink are: the Group Polarization Phenomenon—during the decisionmaking process, group members often shift toward extreme positions whether conservative or high-risk—and the Risky Shift Phenomenon—when the choice is culturally favored, people take greater risks in groups than if they had acted independently. Groupthink is the go-along-to-get-along justification, which means that groups are liable to make dangerously stupid decisions that no single individual would make alone. 136 A few examples of Groupthink are the Brio Super-Fund site, the Ford Pinto, Watergate, the Bay of Pigs invasion, the escalation of the Vietnam War, and the Bridgestone-Firestone tire debacle. 137 Not all group decision- making is Groupthink; Groupthink occurs when group members attempt to gain or maintain consensus at all costs. It is a process that creates group solidarity for a solution to a problem or for a conclusion to an argument that ignores alternatives and focuses only on mass agreement by group members—dissent has been effectively killed, therefore, there is no SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 48 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Symbolic Interactionism Functionalism Conflict one to point out the stupidity or dangerousness of the group’s decision; this only occurs in relatively small, relatively cohesive groups—it is not the behavior of a mob, or a jury, or a legislative body, or any group of people whose members are not intimately familiar with one another: familiarity and a desire to overcome any and all obstacles and objections in order to reach agreement and maintain harmony are the primary criterion for groupthink to occur. The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Bureaucracies Paradigm 1) The bureaucracy exists to serve the needs of the Bourgeoisie 2) The bureaucracy is exploitive, and creates an “iron cage” which traps the average worker. 3) The bureaucracy is the primary characteristic of large-scale industrial societies. 4) The bureaucracy is the rationalized, and exploitive form of human interaction in large-scale formal organization. 1) The bureaucracy exists to serve the needs of society. 2) The bureaucracy provides for the economic and social needs of a society and helps to maintain social stability. 3) The bureaucracy is a major characteristic of large-scale industrial societies. 4) The bureaucracy is the response to large-scale formal organizations. 1) The bureaucracy consists of groups of people interacting with one another in patterned ways, on a daytoday basis. 2) The bureaucracy provides a mechanism for social intercourse among disparate groups and individuals. 3) The bureaucracy is a major characteristic of large-scale industrial societies. 4) The bureaucracy is the method by which large-scale formal organizations create interaction. Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IID—Groups and Bureaucracies bureaucracy…53 characteristics of bureaucracies…53 Charles Horton Cooley…52 dyad…53 examples of Groupthink…53 Georg Simmel…52 George Ritzer…53 Group Polarization Phenomenon…53 group relationships…52 group size determines the quality of group relations…52 Groupthink…53 in-group…52 inter-group relations…52 Iron Law of Oligarchy…53 Irving Janis…53 isolated individual…53 legal boundaries…52 master status…52 Max Weber…53 oligarchy…53 out-group…52 physical boundaries…52 power…52 Robert Michels…53 rule by a few…53 SES…52 Shift Phenomenon…53 social boundaries…52 Social boundaries…52 society…53 the Iron Cage of Bureaucracy…53 The McDonaldization of Society…53 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Bureaucracies…54 theoretical responses to the existence of bureaucracies…53 three types of groups…53 triad…53 ultimate in-group…52 Module IIE—Deviance Deviance is behavior that violates the standards of conduct or expectations of a group or society. It is non-normative behavior that is defined by the mainstream or by those in authority or power. Deviance is always negatively sanctioned— punished—in some way by society. Those negative sanctions may be a simple and innocuous as mild ridicule or may be as serious and severe as the death penalty; the severity of the sanction is generally related to the severity of the deviance. Deviance, by definition, is behavior that violates social norms. Norms are widely shared and widely understood established standards of behavior maintained by any given society. They are “prescriptions serving as common guidelines for social action [behavior]. Human behavior exhibits certain regularities, which are the product of adherence to common expectations or norms. . . . the term refers to social expectations about ‘correct’ or ‘proper’ behavior.” 138 Norms may be formal (generally written norms that involve strict rules for punishment of violators, such as laws which are the body of rules, made by government for society, SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 49 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved interpreted by the courts, and backed by the power of the state), and informal which are generally understood but not precisely recorded standards of behavior. Norms are prescriptive they tell us what to do, and proscriptive telling us what not to do. The three primary types of norms are folkways, mores, and laws. 139 Folkways are informal rules and expectations that guide people’s everyday behavior and include such things as everyday etiquette, manners, proper attire for a given situation, and basic concepts of self-control in all levels of social interaction. Folkways may differ depending on Master Status and situation and violations are not severely sanctioned. Folkways are loosely defined and loosely applied by individuals and although violations are not generally seen as threats to the social order, persistent violation is usually seen as deviance. 140 Mores (pronounced morays) are the norms that people consider essential to the proper working of society. Mores have moral and (sometimes) religious significance and define what a culture or society deems to be right and wrong, good and evil. Mores do not necessarily apply equally to all members of society and may be dependent on SES and Master Status. However, sanctions are formal or formalized, and there are clearly defined rewards or punishments which are administered by authorized social agents. Conformity to mores is ensured by internalization as well as by the negative sanctions imposed by social agents. Mores are based on the values or value system of a society. When mores become formal and are written down or codified they become laws which are formal rules enacted and enforced by the power of the state, which apply to every member of a society. The application of laws is sometimes dependent on SES or Master Status. Formal negative sanctions apply to violations, however, the severity of sanctions is often dependent upon the severity of the violation. Law is the method that large-scale societies use in order to maintain their system of government and to control their populations. Law may be criminal or civil. Criminal law deals with crime, punishment, and the power of the state to maintain social control. Civil law determines the relationships among citizens both private and corporate. All criminal behavior is deviant, but not all deviance is criminal. 141 There are four elements of deviance: 1) norms which are the societal expectations of acceptable behaviors and which of course differ from one sociocultural environment to another; 2) acts, which are the actual behaviors involved; 3) actors who are the individuals involved; (a deviant act may not necessarily mean that the actor is deviant—e.g., normal speeding; Rosa Parks in Montgomery, Alabama; Dr. King’s Letter from Birmingham Jail.) 4) audience, which is the societal response. And, there are four relativisms of deviance: 1) time; specific periods or eras have different ideas about what is normal or deviant; e.g. shortly after the Elizabethan era (1533-1603) and during the reign of British King Charles I (1629-1640), people virtually never bathed because they believed that immersing themselves in water would kill them. In fact, British poet John Donne, in 1633 wrote a poem entitled “The Flea” which glorifies a fleabite as a deeply romantic thing, clearly telling us that people of that era had fleas and that having fleas was normative! 2) place is the physical environment and physical and social context; 3) situation; combines time and place with circumstances; 4) culture which is the sociocultural environment. 142 The Flea 143 Mark but this flea, and mark in this, How little that which thou deny’st me is; Me it sucked first, and now sucks thee, And in this flea, our two bloods mingled be; ... This flea is you and I, and this Our marriage bed, and marriage temple is . . . . John Donne 1633 Usually, when discussing deviance, we talk about the dysfunctional or negative consequences of deviance which include personal harm or injury; threats to existing norms; social and financial costs; social disruption; and danger of escalating deviance. However, there are some functional or positive consequences of deviance. Durkheim argued that, even in a society of saints and angels there would be deviance, therefore, deviance is an integral part of the social structure. According to Durkheim, deviance enhances group solidarity; helps to maintain social cohesion; reaffirms and reinforces norms because deviants are punished; promotes social solidarity when people unite for or against the deviates; and last but far from least deviance can bring about necessary innovation and social change. 144 Because deviance is an integral part of the society, all societies develop methods of preventing or punishing deviance. These methods are called social control and they refer to any mechanism that societies use to maintain their social norms. There are two major or primary forms of social control: voluntary and involuntary. Voluntary social control is internalized through the socialization process, it is our conscience, Mead's generalized other, Cooley’s Looking-Glass Self, and our anticipation and understanding of the social response. It is our own feeling that we will not engage in an act of deviance because it would be wrong. Involuntary social control exists because various agents of society exist. Involuntary social control means that we will not engage in acts of deviance because we might get caught and we are not willing to risk the consequences. Social control can also be formal or informal. Formal social control is based on law, law enforcement, and other official social agents and authority figures who have been invested by society with some level of enforcement power. Formal social control is used to deal with criminal deviance and all societies formalize or institutionalize methods of dealing with crime and punishment. The FBI and other law enforcement agencies list three basic types of crimes: violent crime which includes offenses against persons, homicide, aggravated assault, forcible rape, and robbery; property offenses which are non-violent crimes involving the taking or SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 50 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved destruction of the property of others and includes burglary, larceny/theft, auto theft, arson; and public order offenses which are also called victimless crimes and include prostitution, illegal gambling, and use of illicit drugs. 145 Informal social control is used when folkways or mores are violated, but it is generally not very effective unless there is a small, highly cohesive group or Gemeinschaft. Gossip, ridicule, shame, and ostracism are all effective when everyone lives close together, knows one another intimately, works and plays together, shares a common lifestyle, a common community, a common religion, and a common set of norms and values. Groups like the !Kung, the Hopi, and the Amish all use these methods of social control very effectively. Erving Goffman, in his book Stigma argued that the image in the Looking Glass can be manipulated by society in order to turn on non-acceptable members a mirror that shows lack of full social acceptance which Goffman called stigmas (a stigma is a mark or a visible sign). According to Goffman, these stigmas are: abominations of the body which include physical deformities, tattoos, piercings; blemishes of individual character which include mental illness and substance abuse or dependency; and tribal stigma which is discreditation due to one's race, religion, ethnicity, or group membership. 146 The three types of crimes listed by the FBI, (violent crime which includes offenses against persons, homicide, aggravated assault, forcible rape, and robbery; property offenses which are non-violent crimes involving the taking or destruction of the property of others and includes burglary, larceny/theft, auto theft, arson; and public order offenses which are also called victimless crimes and include prostitution, illegal gambling, and use of illicit drugs), 147 are all street crimes and do not include one of the most devastating forms of crime facing American society today: White Collar Crime. (Sutherland’s classic definition of white collar crime is that it is “a crime committed by a person of respectability and high social status in the course of his occupation.”) Both social status and occupational status are components of this concept and the occupational status and occupational position are the mechanisms by which the crime is committed. Social status (which, in our society is often a concomitant of power and wealth) often provides a veil behind which a perpetrator might be concealed and protected from prosecution. However, a wealthy, powerful, high-status person committing or being charged with murder (e.g., O.J. Simpson in 1994), assault (e.g. Mike Tyson), rape (e.g. Kobe Bryant in 2003), robbery, theft, arson, prostitution, gambling, or drug dealing does not qualify as a white collar crime. 148 White collar crime includes: “Crimes against Consumer, Environmental Crime, Institutional Corruption, Fiduciary Fraud, Crimes by the Government, Corruption of Public Officials, Medical Crime, and Computer Crime”. 149 White Collar crime is seldom prosecuted and is difficult to measure because the local police do not generally investigate white collar crime; victims often are unaware that they have been victimized; criminals are hidden behind a corporate veil of secrecy, power, wealth, and prestige; it is not as readily visible as street crime; its effects are postponed; and white collar criminals are, if not pillars of the community, certainly (seemingly) respectable citizens with strong ties to their communities. Because white collar crime is not included in the National Crime Victimization Survey (NCVS) or the Uniform Crime Reports (UCR) its prevalence must be measured using alternative methodologies such as cross-sectional studies of large corporations; industryspecific studies; and other forms of victimization surveys. 150 White collar crime includes such egregious examples of consumer fraud, institutional corruption, and fiduciary fraud as Enron, WorldCom, Arthur Anderson and Associates, Inc., ImClone and Martha Stewart, and all the other lesser known corporate scandals that have been plaguing us recently—someone once said that the street criminal commits a crime with a gun or knife, but the white collar criminal commits their crimes with a pen! According to BBC News On-Line: In just 15 years, Enron grew from nowhere to be America’s seventh largest company, employing 21,000 staff in more than 40 countries. But the firm’s success turned out to have involved an elaborate scam. Enron lied about its profits and stands accused of a range of shady dealings, including concealing debts so they didn’t show up in the company's accounts. As the depth of the deception unfolded, investors and creditors retreated, forcing the firm into Chapter 11 bankruptcy in December [2001]. More than [eighteen] months after a criminal inquiry was announced, the guilty parties have still not been brought to justice. 151 Diane Francis of Canada’s Financial Post, in a June 13, 2003 on-line article titled “Financial Incest in WorldCom Scandal: Ebbers’ Personal Links To Corporate Bankers Were Unacceptable,” wrote: How did Canadian Bernard Ebbers and his firm WorldCom Inc. soar rapidly to become one of America’s biggest telecom success stories, then become America’s biggest bankruptcy? Some of the answers are obvious: Wall Street, the auditing profession, sleazy management and incompetent directors. Buried in this scandal is also the questionable role played by some traditional banks. But first the context. WorldCom is going to end up being the biggest bankruptcy and also the biggest fraud in U.S. history. Its chief financial officer faces fraud charges, four officers have pleaded guilty and founder Mr. Ebbers may be charged too someday. The bankruptcy occurred after evidence came to light about US$11-billion worth of accounting irregularities. The corporation’s cratering into Chapter 11 protection marked the disappearance of US$180-billion worth of shareholder value. That’s roughly $300-billion, in Canadian currency, or equivalent to nearly half the value of the S&P/TSX composite index. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 51 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Two investigations came to light this week that point out that Mr. Ebbers, uncharged as yet, was firmly in control of WorldCom and may have helped orchestrate the accounting fraud that led to the company’s collapse. “Mr. Ebbers was aware at a minimum that WorldCom was meeting revenue expectations through financial gimmickry,” said a report issued this week by former Securities and Exchange Commission enforcement chief William McLucas. But the behaviour involving the Bank of America should also be seriously examined. The bank was a big lender to WorldCom. It was also a lender to Mr. Ebbers. 152 Therefore, it is little wonder that consumer advocate and former presidential candidate Ralph Nader, calls white collar crime “postponed violence,” because it is not until many years later that the average consumer is harmed by unsafe products or corporate wrongdoing, and very often it is not until many years after the commission of the crime that the public becomes aware of the activity. 153 The ImClone/Martha Stewart scandal is, at the time of this writing, the most recent example of corporate America run amuck. NEW YORK (AP)—Martha Stewart, the exemplar of “good things” who built an empire as an icon of tasteful living, was indicted Wednesday [June 6, 2003] on securities fraud and obstruction of justice charges that could result in a prison term. The indictment also charged Stewart with conspiracy and making false statements and her stockbroker, Peter Bacanovic, with perjury and obstruction of justice. “This criminal case is about lying—lying to the FBI, lying to the SC and investors,” U.S. Attorney James Comey said. “That is conduct that will not be tolerated. Miss Stewart is being prosecuted not because of who she is, but what she did.'” Stewart, 61, has denied wrongdoing in the ImClone stock sale. She claimed to have had an arrangement with her broker for the automatic sale of the stock when it dropped to a certain price. . . . The scandal surrounds Stewart's sale of 4,000 shares of biotech drug maker ImClone Systems Inc. on Dec. 27, 2001—the day before the government issued a disappointing report on an ImClone drug, sending the company's stock price tumbling. 154 NEW YORK, June 10—ImClone Systems founder Sam Waksal was sentenced to seven years and three months in prison Tuesday for an insider-trading scandal that ensnared his family and threatens Martha Stewart and her home decorating empire. He also was ordered to pay more than $4 million in fines and back taxes. U.S. District Judge William H. Pauley rejected Waksal’s plea for a lighter sentence based on ImClone’s cancer research, Waksal’s humanitarian work and the intense media interest surrounding the case. “The harm that you wrought is truly incalculable,” the judge said. 155 White Collar Crime is more costly than street crime in terms of money, lives and health, and damage to society. Street crime costs about $15 billion annually, whereas the annual cost of white collar crime is about $44 billion (3 times that of street crime). Moreover, murder rates are lower than death rates due to environmental carcinogens and the consequences of white collar crime are: polluted land, air, and ground water; birth defects; dangerous and sometimes deadly consumer products; hazardous working conditions; demoralization, cynicism, self-disenfranchisement; and increased incidences of social deviance in the form of property crimes and other white collar crime. For these and many other reasons, Rosoff writes that white collar crime is the most damaging form of deviance facing us today. 156 Since criminal behavior requires societal action, Criminologists and other Sociologists have developed various theories of rehabilitation and punishment. Specific deterrence theory argues that punishment will discourage an individual from reoffending (committing another crime), and recidivating (becoming incarcerated again). Does punishment really prevent people from reoffending and recidivating? General deterrence theories argue that the punishment of offenders will discourage the general populace from committing criminal acts or engaging in criminal activity. Deterrence theory also argues that crime and deviance will be deterred if negative social sanctions (especially punishment) are perceived to be certain, swift, and severe, but since perception is the operative concept and perceptions differ based on amount of actual experience with the criminal justice system, most Americans believe that our criminal justice system is a revolving door for criminals. Perceptions, however, are not reality, and the reality is that American justice is harsher than that of any other industrialized nation. Our sentences are longer for the same level of crime, and our prisoners serve longer! 157 The United States is the only industrialized nation that puts its citizens to death. Most Americans believe that capital punishment acts as a deterrent against crime but there is no scientific data to support this view. Fully 75% of all Americans support the death penalty, but some are beginning to question its fairness and are beginning to question the use of capital punishment for all but the most heinous crimes. The following are some basic pieces of data concerning the death penalty specifically and the criminal justice system in general. It costs 3-4 times more to put someone to death than to keep them in maximum security for forty years. Texas executes 2 times more people annually than all other states combined, (33 in 2002; 16 as of June 13, 2003.) 158 Minorities are proportionately more likely to be on death row than whites. The United States used to hold public executions, but there is no evidence that this decreased the capital crime rate. Capital punishment used to be applied for murder, rape, and cattle and horse theft as recently as the 1930s. There are currently 12 states that do not have the death penalty: Michigan, Iowa, Minnesota, North Dakota, Wisconsin, Alaska, Hawaii, West Virginia, Rhode Island, Vermont, Maine and SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 52 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Massachusetts. Of all people behind bars in the United States for any crime: more than 80% are functionally illiterate; more than 85% were high when they committed the crime for which they have been incarcerated, more than 52% of all prisoners are minorities; 95% of all prisoners are male; more than 85% of all prisoners were unemployed when they committed the crime for which they are incarcerated, approximately 85% are high school drop outs; approximately 38% are recidivists; recidivism drops to less than 3% when a college degree is earned while behind bars. 159 There are many theories that attempt to explain deviance. There are structural theories, social learning theories, and social control theories, and labeling theories among a variety of others. Structural theories argue that deviance is a result of structural causes; elements of the social structure itself. This is also called strain theory which states that society is structured in such a way as to cause huge inequalities and inequities which eventually lead to deviant behaviors when the means to achieving socially accepted goals are structurally blocked. Durkheim’s study of deviance led him to study the most deviant possible act: suicide. According to Durkheim there are structural causes for deviant behavior and his study attempted to discover what those causes were as they relate to the increase or decrease of suicide rates in Europe. 160 Suicide is a “term that may be applied to every case of death which results directly or indirectly from a positive or negative act, carried out by the victim himself, knowing that it will produce this result” (Suicide, p. 44; italics in original). The suicide rates are influenced by social forces beyond the control of any individual, the factors involved in increased suicide rates are: Protestantism for both sexes; childless marriage for women; obligation or duty to the larger community; crises in the economic bases; acceptability of divorce; hopelessness. Durkheim also developed a theory of four types of suicide which are: 1) egoistic suicide which is weak integration into a social (religious, domestic, or political) group; 2) altruistic suicide which is exceptionally strong integration into a community; 3) anomic suicide which is caused by unregulated or unrestrained social and/or economic activity; and 4) fatalistic suicide which is caused by excessive regulation. 161 Durkheim also developed the concept of anomie which is a condition of normlessness; social chaos; social upheaval; great social change; lack of social direction. Anomie, a major theme in the works of Émile Durkheim has often been described as a condition of normlessness in society. It is society itself that creates norms and values, and it is society itself that creates boundaries for human behavior. If the institutions of society are not functioning normatively, or if people perceive that the social structure is no longer legitimate, then there will be nothing to restrain our behaviors. Durkheim believed that individual humans, because we have insatiable desires, are incapable of developing or maintaining moral standards and that it is the social structure that keeps our moral compass in proper working order. Anomie is that state of society when the moral compass is out of order and the community can no longer control our desires. However, poets seem to understand anomie better than Sociologists. The Second Coming 162 Turning and turning in the widening gyre The Falcon cannot hear the falconer; Things fall apart; the center cannot hold; Mere anarchy is loosed upon the world, The blood-dimmed tide is loosed and everywhere The ceremony of innocence is drowned; The best lack all conviction, while the worst are full of passionate intensity. Surely some revelation is at hand; Surely the Second Coming is at hand. The Second Coming! Hardly are those words out When a vast image out of Spiritus Mundi Troubles my sight: somewhere in sands of the desert A shape with lion body and the head of a man, A gaze blank and pitiless as the sun, Is moving its slow thighs, while all about it Reel shadows of the indignant desert birds, The darkness drops again; but now I know That twenty centuries of stony sleep Were vexed to nightmare by a rocking cradle, And what rough beast, its hour come round at last, Slouches toward Bethlehem to be born? William Butler Yeats 1919 In William Butler Yeats’ post-World War I poem “The Second Coming,” 163 the poet presages the concept, only surmised in his time, of the expansion of the universe and rails against a modernity that leaves us small, voiceless, infinitesimal, and abjectly alone in the vastness of unfathomable time and space. Because we are out of control and unable to fashion even a puny particle of meaning or mastery out of the cosmic forces which threaten to overwhelm us at every turn, “things fall apart” (Yeats 820:3). And, Yeats argues, things must indeed fall apart when our entire human value system is at odds with the SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 53 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved comfortable past, the disturbing present, and the unforeseeable future. The war that the poet so disparages is not the end of war— the death and destruction unleashed by that conflict are not the end of war, but only the beginning of a terrifyingly unknown future where more cities will erupt in flames, and more innocent citizens will die ignoble deaths—“unknelled, uncoffined, and unknown” (Byron 305:1611). 164 In a pathetic cry of desperate hopefulness Yeats exclaims, “Surely some revelation is at hand / Surely the Second Coming is at hand!” (Yeats 820:9-10). But Yeats knows better, he knows that the Sphinx—that monstrous evil out of time immemorial, that vile creature whose jaws gush with the blood of humankind, whose claws drip with the gore of humankind; that reprehensible denizen of hell which severs humankind from itself; that satanic being who lies in wait at the gates of our cities and our souls—“is moving its slow thighs” (Yeats 820:16) toward the center of our hope. The “rocking cradle” (Yeats 820:20) of a possible civilized world in which humans do not murder humans is facing extinction at its own hand while the great beast, “its hour come round at last / Slouches towards Bethlehem to be born” (Yeats 820:21-22). And nothing, Yeats says, can save us from this horrific future, for, after “twenty centuries of [its] stony sleep” (Yeats 820:19), we have aroused death and set it loose upon ourselves—we have “cried ‘Havoc!’ and let slip the dogs” (Shakespeare III:1:273) 165 of our own inevitable destruction. The terrible Sphinx poses a terrible riddle “What dos it mean to be human?” a question that must be answered, but that we seem unable to answer, because we no longer have a language of community and civic-minded morality to keep us from falling apart. 166 Like the falcon, we turn, wider and wider, flying away from any common moral center into the depths of anomie. The late, lamented Tupac Shakur, also understood that loss of moral center, that inevitable destruction that we are loosing upon ourselves. His poetry (notwithstanding the lyrics to his music), like that of Yeats’, also addresses the loss of community and civic morality Liberty Needs Glasses 167 Excuse me but lady liberty needs glasses And so does Mrs. Justice by her side Both the broads R blind as bats Stumbling Thru the system Justice Bumbed into mutulu and Trippin’ on Geronimo Pratt But stepped right over Oliver And his crooked partner Ronnie Justice stubbed her big toe the invians Slavery was a learning phase Forgotten with out a verdict While Justice is on a rampage 4 endangered Surviving Black males I mean really if anyone really valued life And cared about the masses They’s take’em both 2 pen optical And get 2 pair of Glasses Tupac Shakur (1971-1996) Shakur’s poem “Liberty Needs Glasses” is a late 20th century example of a poet who understands all too well the anomic conditions of his times. The idea of justice, the rule of law, one of the core values of American culture has become utterly meaningless to a large segment of the American population. Meaninglessness and lawlessness —anomie—now reign because nothing, not even human life has value and blindness to social needs has become the norm. Furthermore, Shakur argues, when the values of a culture are merely empty words without actions, that society is in a state of moral decline and anomie. Robert Merton developed a theory based on the ways in which various groups in society respond to anomic conditions. Because American capitalism values individualism, financial success, high social status; and because the social structure may prevent achievement of the goals associated with core American values, some groups may resort to deviant behavior in order to overcome the feelings of strain. 168 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 54 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Response Accepts Societal Goals Yes Conformity X Innovation X No Merton’s Typology of Deviant Responses to Anomie Accepts Means to Examples Achieve Societal Goals Yes No Non-deviant response X X Criminal Behavior—Car jackers, drug dealers Bureaucratic Personality Ritualism X X Retreatism X X Religious Orders, Cults, Substance Abusers, Social drop outs Rebellion X X Attempts to change the social order—Castro, Tim McVeigh, September 11th Terrorists Merton’s Theory of Deviant Responses to Anomie posits that there are five types of responses, one normative and conforming and four deviant. These responses are conformity which is a non-deviant; normative response in which the societal goals are accepted and normative means of achieving the goals are practiced such as delayed gratification and acceptance of structural limitations on one’s ability to achieve. Innovation is a deviant response in which normative societal goals are accepted but the normative means of achieving those goals is rejected. According to Merton, innovators are criminals: bank robbers, embezzlers, drug dealers, white collar criminals who want instant gratification and who reject the structural limitations on one’s ability to achieve. Ritualism is rejection of societal goals while accepting the normative means of achieving goals; this is the bureaucratic personality who goes through the motions and for whom the ends are more important than goals. This person is a petty tyrant who is rule-bound and tries to maintain his/her position in a company by withholding critical information. Retreatism is a rejection of societal goals and a rejection of normative means of achieving goals. These are society’s drop outs. Rebels also reject societal goals and the normative means of achieving goals, but they differ from the retreatist in their overwhelming desire to change the social structure by deviant means: Fidel Castro; The Unabomber, Tim McVeigh, and the September 11th terrorists are examples. 169 170 Social learning theories argue that all behavior must be learned through social interaction and that the socialization process itself is responsible for teaching both conformity and deviance. Differential association theory was developed by Edwin Sutherland who stated that deviance is learned through association with other deviants;. If deviance is viewed as acceptable by the primary agents of socialization, then people are much more likely to become deviant themselves, unless something swiftly and vigorously intervenes. 171 Some social control theories argue that the normative mechanisms of society involved in involuntary social control are necessary to prevent deviance. Travis Hirschi developed social bonding theory which states that strong social bonds help to prevent deviance. When one is attached to parents, school, church; committed to conventional norms, involved in conventional activities, and believes in the validity of social norms (internalization), they will be much less likely to engage in acts of deviance even when confronted with deviant peers 172 173 . In 1957, Gresham Sykes and David Matza developed and tested a theory dealing with the ways in which juvenile criminals justify their deviant behavior. Sykes and Matza’s theory argues that we tend to rationalize, or make excuses to ourselves and others, concerning our deviant behavior in order to neutralize the negative psychic and social effects of our deviance and to make our deviance seem to be less important or less serious than it might actually be. (For Erving Goffman, this would be a type of face-work.) The five techniques of neutralization of deviance delineated by Sykes and Matza are: 1) denial of responsibility which is the “the dog ate my homework” or the “I was only following orders” excuse; 2) denial of injury is the technique used by the shoplifter who says that stealing is okay because the stores have insurance, or the wife beater who tells his wife that she can’t possibly be hurt because he loves her and would never hurt someone he loves; 3) denial of the victim is the rapist’s excuse when he says that his victim was asking for it because of the way she was dressed; 4) condemnation of the condemners is the excuse used by those who argue that, because social control agents engage in illegal activities (cops taking bribes or speeding), then they shouldn’t have to obey the rules either; 5) appeal to higher loyalties which is the excuse that a deviant act is not deviant because it was committed for God, country, family or some higher authority or greater good. 174 175 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 55 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Sykes and Matza’s Techniques of Neutralization of Deviance Each of These Techniques is an Excuse for Deviant Behavior; a Form of Face Work Technique Definition Examples In this technique, the deviant actor places The dog ate my homework Denial of Responsibility blame on others, refusing to accept The Nazis who said “I was only accountability for their own actions following orders” as a defense for murder “The Devil made me do it” In this technique, the deviant actor The shoplifter who argues that the stores Denial of Injury refuses to admit that anyone was hurt have insurance or charge too much The abusive parent who beats their children “for their own good” The drug user who argues that no one is being hurt and refuses to admit that drug money funds terrorism and is highly correlated to increased levels of crime In this technique the deviant actor places The excuse of the rapist “she was asking Denial of the Victim blame on the victim by arguing that for it” because of the way the victim the victim deserved whatever was dressed happened; blame is placed on the “It’s your own fault your car was stolen. victim You shouldn’t have bought such a fancy vehicle” “If you didn’t want to be mugged, you shouldn’t have been in that neighborhood with so much money in your wallet” The employee who steals because they think the company doesn’t pay them enough, even though the company is rich In this technique, the deviant actor Teens smoking, drinking, and using Condemnation of the Condemners argues that when various social drugs arguing it’s okay because their agents or authority figures behave parents do it deviantly, that deviance acts as Arguing that breaking the law (speeding) permission for deviance is alright because the police speed even when they’re not in hot pursuit Using the excuse that politicians take bribes, so why should we be honest in our public dealings. In this technique, the deviant actor “We’re on a mission from God” Appeal to Higher Loyalties argues that their behavior was not “I broke the law in order to protect and deviant because it was committed for defend the Constitution” some higher power or greater good “I had to steal because my family was starving” “My gang expected me to rob that store” Labeling theories were developed by various Symbolic Interactionists, including Howard Becker, 176 who argued that the mirror of society creates visions of people that may change a person’s self image. Social labels can be rejected or accepted and Edwin Lemert theorized that there are two types of responses to labeling. Primary deviance occurs when an individual violates a norm and is viewed as deviant but rejects the deviant label and maintains a conformist conception of her/himself, 177 178 e.g., Dr. King; Rosa Parks; Timothy McVeigh, Oliver North. Secondary deviance occurs when the deviant label is internalized and a deviant role is assumed, 179 180 e.g., Ozzie Osborne and Alice Cooper’s on-stage personas; Howard Stern’s onair persona; Marilyn Manson, Eminem. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 56 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Paradigm The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Deviance Conflict All of society is characterized by conflict—economic competition—between the bourgeoisie and the proletariat. 1) 2) 3) 4) Deviance is defined by those in power; therefore, what is deviant, is whatever offends the powerful, or whatever causes them to believe that they are losing power and control over the masses. Deviance is conditional, situational, and relative to time, place, situation, and culture. By declaring that certain groups are deviant, or treating certain groups as if they are, in some way, outside the boundaries of mainstream society, the ultimate in-group is able to maintain its power. Deviance exists in all societies, and all societies create institutionalized methods of preventing and punishing deviance. Functionalism All of society is characterized by societal stability. 1) 2) 3) 4) Behaviors are not offensive because they are deviant; they are deviant because they offend. Deviance is usually dysfunctional for society and arises from conditions of anomie. Deviance may be functional for society because it may bring about necessary social change. Deviance is integral to human societies. Deviance exists in all societies, and all societies create institutionalized methods of preventing and punishing deviance. Symbolic Interactionism All of society is based on day-to-day micro-level interactions between individuals and among small groups. 1) 2) 3) 4) Deviance is conditional, situational, and relative to time, place, situation, and culture. Deviance is based on the perceptions of individuals. The language used to label groups or individuals as deviant, is highly symbolic and “coded.” Individuals have the capacity to accept or reject the labels that society creates in the mirror. Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIE—Deviance !Kung…61 general…62 Deterrence theory…62 abominations of the body…61 Deviance…59 actors…60 Differential association acts…60 theory…65 Amish…61 Durkheim…63 Anomie…63 dysfunctional or audience…60 negative blemishes of individual consequences of character…61 deviance…60 capital punishment…62 Erving Goffman…61, 65 Cooley’s Looking-Glass Self…60 face-work…65 Crimes against factors involved in Consumer, increased suicide rates…63 Environmental Folkways…60 Crime, Institutional Corruption, Formal social control…60 Fiduciary Fraud, Crimes by the four elements of deviance…60 Government, Corruption of Public four relativisms of deviance…60 Officials, Medical Crime, and four types of suicide…63 Computer Crime…61 functional or positive culture…60 consequences of deviance…60 data concerning the Gemeinschaft…61 death penalty General deterrence specifically and the theories…62 criminal justice Gossip, ridicule, system in SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 57 shame…61 Hopi…61 Informal social control…61 Involuntary social control…60 Labeling theories…66 Law…60 laws…60 Liberty Needs Glasses…64 Looking Glass…61 Mead's generalized other…60 Merton’s Theory of Deviant Responses to Anomie…65 Merton’s Typology of Deviant Responses to Anomie…65 Mores…60 most damaging form of deviance…62 negative social sanctions…62 neutralization of deviance…65 norms…60 Norms…59 ostracism…61 place…60 postponed violence…62 Primary deviance…66 property offenses…60, 61 public order offenses…61 Ralph Nader…62 Robert Merton…64 Rosoff…62 Secondary deviance…66 situation…60 social bonding theory…65 social control…60 social control theories…65 Social labels…66 Social learning theories…65 Specific deterrence theory…62 Stigma…61 strain theory…63 Street crime…62 street crimes…61 Structural theories…63 suicide…63 suicide rates…63 Sykes and Matza…65 Sykes and Matza’s Techniques of Neutralization of © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Deviance…66 The Flea…60 The Second Coming…63 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Deviance…67 three basic types of crimes…60 three primary types of norms…60 three types of crimes listed by the FBI…61 time…60 tribal stigma…61 Tupac Shakur…64 violent crime…60, 61 Voluntary social control…60 white collar crime…62 White collar crime…61 White Collar Crime…61 William Butler Yeats…63 Module IIIA—Stratification Stratification is the unequal ways in which the goods of society are distributed. Sociologist Craig Oettinger defines stratification as “who gets what and how much they get over time.” Ruth Dunn’s definition is “the unequal distribution of and unequal access to the goods of society: wealth, power, and status.” According to Abercrombie, et. al., “social differences become social stratification when people are ranked hierarchically along some dimension of inequality, whether this be income, wealth, power, prestige, age, ethnicity, or some other characteristic.” 181 Gerhard Lenski argues that stratification is based on distributive systems of “who gets what and why?” (p. viii) and that “social stratification [is equated with] the distributive process in human societies—the process by which scarce resources are distributed” (p. xxvi). 182 Oftentimes scarce but valued resources are distributed based on Master Status. Because every society has some level of stratification—even in the least complex hunter-gatherer cultures men have authority over women and the old have authority over the young 183 —our position in our society is based on our Master Statuses. Everyone has master status—the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! It is not about social acceptability as such. Various parts of our master status make us more or less acceptable, more or less privileged vis á vis the dominant group, but everyone has race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, ability/disability, and SES (income + education + occupation) whether or not they are part of the dominant group. Consider a Hispanic doctor in the 1930s—his (note the male pronoun) master status as a doctor (SES) is privileged but his master status as a Hispanic (race/ethnicity) is not, vis á vis the dominant group. Both minorities and dominant group members have master status—to reiterate, the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! The stratification hierarchy is the layers or levels of any social structure—it is the way people classify or categorize themselves and others. The American stratification hierarchy is evident to all even though we tend to be relatively oblivious to it. For example, the majority of Americans think of themselves as middle class whether they make $25,000 per year or $250,000. Clearly, a vast difference in definitions of middle class is required in order for people with such disparate incomes to include themselves in this largest layer or social category. Even President George H. Bush who comes from a very wealthy family and is worth several millions of dollars spoke of himself as middle class during his abortive run for a second term in 1992. The media often refers to former President and Mrs. Bill Clinton as middle class even though they were worth nearly three million dollars in 2000. Our ability to enjoy such resources as personal autonomy--control of our own live—health, physical comfort, creature comforts, education, employment opportunities in a high paying and satisfying job, the respect of others, and a long life span are all related to our position in the stratification hierarchy. How we live, where we live, the things with which we surround ourselves, the kind of food we eat, the style and quality of the clothes we wear and the other forms of body adornment we use, the music we listen to, the way we dance, our patterns of speech, virtually everything about us is determined in greater or lesser extent by our social class—our position on the stratification hierarchy. The way we treat others and the way we classify others is also largely based on our perceptions of where they are located on the stratification hierarchy. W. I. Thomas (1863-1947) is justly famous for his work with Florian Znaniecki (1882-1958) concerning the assimilation processes undergone by Polish peasant immigrants to the United States. Indeed, they are responsible for our concepts of the social types they defined as “the Philistine,” “the Bohemian,” and the “creative man” that informed our social dialogue both in academia and in popular culture in the 1950s, 60s, and 70s. However, Thomas is most widely know for what has come to be called Thomas’ Theorem which states that “if men define situations as real, they are real in their consequences. . . .Once meaning has been assigned, their consequent behavior is shaped by [that] meaning. If people believe in witches such beliefs have tangible consequences—they may, for example, kill those persons assumed to be witches. This then is the power the human mind has in transmuting raw sense data into a categorical apparatus that could make murderers of us all. Once a Vietnamese becomes a “gook,” or a Black a “nigger,” or a Jew a “kike,” that human being has been transmuted through the peculiar alchemy of social definition into something wholly “other” who is now a target of prejudice and discrimination, of violence and aggression, and even murder.” 184 In other words, we act on what we think is real regardless of its ontological reality. Our beliefs, our perceptions guide our behavior. We treat people based on what we perceive to be their basic characteristics often based solely on our perception of their place in the stratification hierarchy. Stereotypes and discriminatory behavior are almost always based on such perceptions. Our own position in the stratification hierarchy is judged just as we judge that of others and based on the same SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 58 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved generally superficial qualities. What are the first things you notice when you meet someone for the first time? Do the things you notice color your analysis of that person? Various Sociological, Psychological, and Social-Psychological studies indicate that, based on first impressions of strangers, we think attractive people are smart; fat people are sloppy and not very bright; well-dressed people are smarter, richer, and more attractive than people who are less well-dressed; non-white males are dangerous and sinister; white people are smarter, richer, more attractive, more honest, and more trustworthy than ethnic or racial minorities (even in the eyes of racial and ethnic minorities). In other words, the way we form our initial opinions of the intrinsic human value—the basic human worth—of a stranger is based largely on those external aspects of the person that society has determined are acceptable or not acceptable. We are a class-driven society, but those American core values of equality and independence for all also blinds us to the class structure, the social structure and the stratification hierarchy that effects so profoundly and with such grave consequences our day-today interactions with our fellow human beings. Social differentiation is a process in which people are set apart for different treatment by virtue of their statuses, roles, and other social characteristics. Social inequality is a condition in which people have unequal access to wealth, power, and prestige, and according to Rossides “even in the simplest societies, the old are usually given authority over the young, parents over children, and males over females.” Social stratification is a form of inequality in which categories of people are systematically ranked in a hierarchy on the basis of their access to scarce but valued resources (the Goods of Society, which are wealth, power, and status). Oettinger’s definition of stratification is “social stratification determines who gets what and how much they get over time,” and Dunn’s definition of stratification is “the unequal distribution of and unequal access to the goods of society (wealth, status, power).” Social positions are ranked in order of importance and have differential rewards, and differential life chances. They are transmitted across generations and although they are relatively rigid at the extreme ends, they tend to be fluid in the middle. Social mobility is the ability of people to move among the layers of the stratification hierarchy; to occupy different social positions. 185 Max Weber gave us the major dimensions of stratification which are wealth, power, and status or prestige. Wealth is a person’s total economic assets. Power is the ability to influence over resistance. There are three different kinds of power: personal power which is the ability to affect one’s own life (also called autonomy); social power which is the ability to affect the lives of others; and coercive power which is the use or threat of force or violence by persons or groups against others; this is the power of the state or the thug with a gun. Status/Prestige is the respect and admiration people attach to various social positions. 186 Forms of stratification include the closed form in which the boundaries between/among the layers are impermeable, statuses are ascribed, and social mobility is limited by custom, tradition, ideology, and law. In the open form the layers between/among the boundary layers are permeable, statuses are achieved, and social mobility is aided by custom, tradition, ideology, and law. 187 Within the two forms of stratification there are four systems of stratification. The slave system includes two distinct strata: a category of people who are free and a category of people who are legally the property of others. Slave systems are a closed type of society characterized by differential power, lack of complete social mobility and few, if any legal rights. Slavery is maintained by custom, ideology, and law. In a caste system membership in ranked categories of people is hereditary and permanent, and marriage between members of different categories is prohibited; Caste systems are totally closed societies where status is ascribed, there no social mobility, and they are maintained by custom, ideology, law. Traditionally there were four major castes in India’s Hindu-based caste system: Brahman—priests, educators; Kshatriya— rulers, landowners, warriors; Vaishya—merchants; Shudra—artisans, peasants; Dalit (Harijan-children of God)— untouchables, who are literally outcastes because they are outside of the caste system. The estate system is feudalism, which is a social hierarchy centered on the monopoly of power and ownership of land by a group of victorious warriors (lords), who were entitled to labor, goods, and military service from peasants who were the vast majority of the agrarian population. 188 Feudalism endured from the 11th to the 20th century. Estate systems are relatively closed types of societies where there is extreme inequality with virtually no middle class—only the very rich and the very poor and although there was some social mobility, this system was also maintained by custom, ideology, and law. The class system is a product of modern industrial capitalism. In a class system the economic factor is the most important in determining differences, and achieved statuses (gained by ability and merit) are the principal means of determining a person’s rank. This is a relatively open type society, and the boundaries between/among the layers are based on master status. There is greater economic equality but greater relative deprivation in the class system and although there is little social mobility at the extremes, there is great mobility at the center. The class system is characterized by a small, very wealthy upper class, a large, diverse middle class, and a mobile working class. Unfortunately, a relatively large and growing underclass has been characteristic in the US for the past 40 years. 189 190 Based on two seemingly highly divergent paradigms—Conflictualism and Functionalism—all of the major theories of stratification have been developed. All of the theories from the Conflict viewpoint focus on the negative aspects of inequality arguing that stratification is based on exploitation of subordinate groups, therefore they attempt to explain all SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 59 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights stratification as a type of class conflict. The Functionalists, on the other hand, view stratification in one of two ways: functional and dysfunctional. Those who view stratification as functional argue that inequality is necessary for societies to grow, and that without inequality there would be no social incentives for progress (e.g., Kingsley Davis and Wilbert Moore). The Functionalists who see stratification as dysfunctional argue that inequality destroys incentives for progress (e.g., Robert Merton and Melvin Tumin). Kingsley Davis and Wilbert E. Moore—The Functionality of Stratification—originally published, April 1945—Although this writer personally believes that Davis and Moore’s argument is tautological, teleological, and elitist it is, nevertheless, the basis for a profound sociological controversy. Essentially, the Davis-Moore debate centers on the pivotal question of whether a good society can exist in the face of universal inequality. A requisite of the Davis-Moore hypothesis is a creaming effect, wherein the best that a society has to offer for any given rare position rises to assume that position. The functionality of stratification, according to Davis and Moore is predicated on the following major points: 1) talent differs among individuals; 2) the duties associated with different positions vary according to pleasantness, importance to social survival, and amount and scarcity of the talent required; 3) duties must be performed with diligence; 4) inducements or rewards are distributed differentially according to position; 5) rewards must add to comfort and sustenance, humor and diversion, and self-respect and ego-expansion; 6) positions have various built-in perquisites and rights; 7) easily filled positions do not need to be highly rewarded; 8) positions that are important but hard to fill require high rewards; 9) all positions require some skill or training and the more skill and training that is required, the higher the rewards; 10) rarity or scarcity of talent or length and expense of training requires high rewards (in Grusky, pp 39-44). The creaming effect that Davis and Moore posit demands that the society is relatively closed and elitist, but it will require a look at another theorist in order to fully develop the Davis-Moore debate—Melvin Tumin argues that stratification is dysfunctional. Melvin Tumin—The Dysfunctionality of Stratification—originally published, August 1957 191 —As a critical counterpoint to Davis and Moore, Tumin argues that stratification is dysfunctional for society, that it decreases the adaptability of the society, “the ubiquity and antiquity of . . . inequality has given rise to the assumption that there must be something both inevitable and positively functional about such social arrangements” (in Grusky, p. 47). Twelve years after Davis and Moore published the article in question Tumin argued that creaming is inhibited by stratification, and makes the following eight points concerning “the negative functions of institutionalized social inequality” (in Grusky, p. 52) as a critique in which “social stratification systems function to: 1) limit the possibility of discovery of the full range of talent available; 2) set limits upon the possibility of expanding the productive resources of the society; 3) provide the elite with the political [authority] necessary to procure acceptance and dominance of an ideology which rationalizes the status quo [a Marxian view because control of ideology is crucial to status quo maintenance and control of the masses]; 4) distribute favorable self-images unequally throughout a population, thereby limiting the creative potential in men [and women?]; 5) encourage hostility, suspicion, and distrust among non-elite classes thus limiting the possibilities of extensive social integration; 6) distribute unequally the sense of significant membership in the society; 7) distribute loyalty unequally among members of a society; 8) distribute the motivation to participate in the society unequally” (in Grusky, pp.52-53). However, when determining whether a system is functional, one must ask, along with legendary Sociologist Robert Merton, “Functional for whom?” 192 According to Weber, wealth, power, and status are very closely linked, so that those with high levels of one generally enjoy high levels of the others. Wealth is all of a person’s assets: anything that you could possibly sell, while income is wages, plus any income producing assets. Status or prestige, is the level of societal respect given to any specific position. There are several models of power. The pluralistic model was developed by Robert Dahl whose Political Science studies tend to show that power is distributed among many interest groups including political parties, corporations, professional associations, individuals, and many other groups. The elite model of C. Wright Mills contends that power is held by the power elite: a small group of top corporate, political, and military leaders that is supported by the media and entertainment industries. Several studies, including those by Domhoff and Useem support Mills’ theory that the governing class is made up of a wide group of the wealthy who maintain contact through interlocking social circles. E. Digby Baltzell, in 1964, wrote that the upper class has a consciousness of kind and that the elite are usually WASPs White, Anglo-Saxon Protestant background. 193 Coleman and Rainwater have conducted innumerable studies which tend to show that social standing is ranked by perceptions of income, authority, family background, speech patterns, manners, morals, and overall lifestyle. In 1898 Thorstein Veblen wrote The Theory of the Leisure Class which argued that the elite are characterized by conspicuous consumption and conspicuous leisure; a sort of Lifestyles of the Rich and Famous idea. Power elite theories, and there are many of them, are all, in some measure, rooted in the Conflict Paradigm. C. Wright Mills (1916-1962), a long, tall, Texan from Waco wrote what may be the definitive elite theory of power distribution in America titled The Power Elite. At its most fundamental level Mills’s theory, which has had significant support from SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 60 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights many researchers including Baltzell, states that there is in American society a small but powerful group of people, all of whom have similar backgrounds and know one another, in the government, military, and private industry who, supported by the media, have enough power (money and influence) to effect the socioeconomic and sociopolitical system. This militaryindustrial complex has great sway over the social structure of the United States and may ultimately lead to anomic conditions for the average American. The powers of ordinary men are circumscribed by the everyday worlds in which they live, yet even in these rounds of jobs, family, and neighborhood they often seem driven by forces they can neither understand nor govern. ‘Great changes’ are beyond their control, but affect their conduct and outlook nonetheless. The very framework of modern society confines [these ordinary men and women] to projects not their own, but from every side, such changes now press upon the men and women of the mass society, who accordingly feel that they are without purpose in an epoch in which they are without power. (in Grusky, p. 161) Model of C. Wright Mill’s Power Elite Theory Business Leaders Serve in Government Former Officers Serve in Government Government Former Officers Get Jobs in Industry Military Entertainers Campaign for and Raise Money for Politicians Businesses Produce Technology for Military and Entertainment Industry Industry/Business War/Military/Anti-Crime Movies and TV Entertainment This model (above) shows Mill’s Power Elite theory. The government, military, and industry (business) are interlocked because they share personnel. In turn, they are supported by the entertainment industry through films, books, magazines, television and other forms of media that produce a favorable image of the “government-military-business” triumvirate to the public at large while obscuring the interlocking relationships that give them even greater power than might seem evident from a cursory glance. These interlocking relationships maintain the power of these elites while insuring against scrutiny by the public at large. Those who do have the purpose and the power are the few, the proud, the very, very rich. People whose names we might not know, people who work often behind the scenes but nevertheless influence the sociopolitical and socioeconomic course of nations. These are the same people who Thorstein Veblen was discussing somewhat satirically in The Theory of the Leisure Class as well as those idle rich who Edith Wharton so thoroughly castigated in her turn-of-the-twentieth-century novels The House of Mirth and The Age of Innocence. Thorstein Veblen (1857-1929), tongue planted firmly in his cheek but with venomous intensity worthy, some say, of the satire of Jonathan Swift in “A Modest Proposal” or the desire of Dr. Gulliver to separate himself from humankind and live only among the Houyhnhnms, 194 contends that the wealthy, the Leisure Class, live differently from the non-rich and are envied and emulated by the non-rich. Veblen, a farm boy from Minnesota, discusses conspicuous leisure and conspicuous consumption by arguing that, in America, wealth confers status (honor) and it is status that is envied and emulated by those of the lower classes who seek to bask in the glow of the “radiant body” of the wealthy. 195 Conspicuous leisure exists among those social classes for whom earning their daily bread is not only unnecessary but may indeed be repugnant. I order to enjoy such leisure one must engage servants who are so stratified themselves that some of them do very little actual labor. The less one does, then, the higher the status. Conspicuous consumption is best described as buying unnecessary things for the sole purpose of displaying to other that you can buy things that have no real usefulness. 196 Jazz-age writer F. Scott Fitzgerald said the rich are different and Ernest Hemingway responding to that statement said, “Yeah, they have more money.” This probably apocryphal conversation points up an age-old argument—are people qualitatively different because of their position on the stratification hierarchy, or is that difference merely quantitative? At the end of the year 2000, the United States had more millionaires than ever before, and Bill Gates was the richest man in the world with somewhere between 45 and 90 billion dollars. The United States is capable of producing enormous amounts of wealth, and most Americans are investors in the stock and bond markets. And yet, the United States is also plagued by poverty, even though our politicians seldom speak about it, and the presidential race of 2000 was almost completely lacking in any SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 61 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights conversation over the plight of the poor. The tables below, are incontrovertible proof that the ultimate in-group in the world is rich, white, American and European men. 197 The United States is inarguably the richest nation in the world with an economy (GDP—Gross Domestic Product—the total value of all goods and services produced and sold within the borders of a country in one year; does not include imports or exports) of over $14 trillion ($14,000,000,000,000). Other wealthy nations include: England, Germany, Italy, Spain, Sweden, Austria, Switzerland, Denmark, Norway, Netherlands, Belgium. England, France, Germany, Italy, and Spain have a combined population of about 300 million (approximately 20 million more people than the United States), but their combined economies are valued at slightly less 4/5 (80%) that of the United States! In other words, the United States is richer than the 5 largest countries in Western Europe combined! 198 199 For more information go to the CIA World Factbook at https://www.cia.gov/library/publications/the-world-factbook/. Also see: United Nations Economic and Social Development website at http://www.un.org/esa/; G8 Information Center at http://www.g7.utoronto.ca/; G8 Profile from the BBC at http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/americas/country_profiles/3777557.stm; World Economic Forum at http://www.weforum.org/en/index.htm. To put this into even more stark relief, the following chart shows that the five largest states in the United States— California, Texas, New York, Florida, and Illinois—with a combined population of 103.7 million are as wealthy as the entire nation of Japan, and California, alone, is as wealthy as all of Russia, which has 4 times the population! (California would be the sixth wealthiest nation in the world if it was not a state, and Texas would be the 10th richest nation. The total population of the five largest states is 103.7 million or 12.33% of the combined populations of the G-8. These five largest states account for 35.33% of the wealth of the United States, 15.74% of the total wealth of the G-8 nations, and nearly 1% of the total wealth of the entire world. 200 And yet, even with this vast ability to generate wealth, at the end of 2000, eighteen percent of all American children lived in poverty and nearly 35% of children in Houston in 2003 lived in such poverty that they do not have enough to eat on a day-to-day basis. The government-determined poverty line is set so that an individual who makes less than $8,959, and a family four making less than $17,761 is considered poor. Poverty levels are based on subsistence levels for food, clothing, and shelter. The feminization of poverty is a social condition in which women, particularly teenage mothers, elderly widows, divorced women, and female heads of single-parent households, constitute a disproportionate share of the poor as is shown in the following tables. 201 202 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 62 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Single Female Head of Household Indicating the Feminization of Poverty Difference from Single Female Head of Household Percent in Poverty for Given Year 1990 to 2000 Race/Ethnicity 1990 2000 37.2 27.9 -9.3 All 29.8 22.1 -7.7 White 26.7 18.0 -8.7 White Non-Hispanic 50.6 38.7 -11.9 Black 53.0 36.5 -16.5 Hispanic 20.7 19.5 -1.2 Asian This table, Single Female Head of Household Indicating the Feminization of Poverty, shows that woman-headed household have also seen dramatic changes in poverty for 1990-2000 but also shows that single women with children are many times more likely to be poor than any other minority group, and single women with children who are racial/ethnic minorities are substantially more likely to be poor. Some of this poverty can be attributed to fathers who do not pay child support, and some can be attributed to the welfare system itself which prevents single women from working outside the home. Furthermore, the minimum wage, as it currently exists, is insufficient to meet the needs of a family. Child Support Payments to Custodial Parents-1997 Number of Parents (in 1,000s) Supposed to Actually Receive Received Payments Payments 6,331 4,335 6,331 4,335 674 385 Percent Difference Number of Parents (in 1,000s) No Payments Percent Not Paid Received 0.68 1,996 0.32 All Parents 0.68 1,996 0.32 Mothers 0.57 289 0.43 Fathers Custodial Mothers 8,861 6,551 0.74 2,310 0.26 White 1,434 764 0.53 670 0.47 Black 688 433 0.63 256 0.37 Hispanic Marital Status 1,559 1,174 0.75 385 0.25 Married 2,357 1,738 0.74 619 0.26 Divorced 765 507 0.66 258 0.34 Separated 1,547 855 0.55 692 0.45 Never Married Educational Attainment Less than HS 976 536 0.55 440 0.45 Diploma 2,336 1,513 0.65 823 0.35 HS Graduate Some College, No 1,476 1,041 0.71 435 0.29 Degree 653 515 0.79 138 0.21 Associate Degree Bachelors Degree 891 730 0.82 161 0.18 or More Of the 78 million children under the age of 19 in the US in 1999, which represents 29% of the total population, 22.9 million (or 29%) lived in families where one parent was not present. Eighty-five percent of all custodial parents are mothers. The above table (Child Support Payments to Custodial Parents-1997) shows that, of the total number of mothers who are supposed to receive child support, 32% do not, and of the fathers who are supposed to receive child support, 43% did not. What this table fails to show is that of those receiving payments, 26.6% of mothers and 25.5% of fathers received only partial child support payments in 1997. White mothers are much more likely to receive child support payments than black mothers (only 53%) or Hispanic mothers (only 63%). Furthermore, the never married are much less likely to receive child support than still married, separated, or divorced women. Education plays a significant role in child support. Women with a college degree or with some college are much more likely to receive child support payments than their less-well educated sisters. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 63 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Forty-five percent of women who have not completed high school and 35% of those with only a high school diploma do not receive any child support payments at all. Educated women are more likely to be able to afford good legal counsel and to understand their legal options concerning the collection of child support. However, what is clear from this table, is that women who are supposed to receive child support payments often do not, which means that children go hungry and the welfare rolls increase. Fathers who refuse to pay child support are a leading factor in the feminization of poverty and the impoverishment of children in the US. There are many theories of the causes of poverty. Among these theories is a functionalist approach promulgated by Oscar Lewis and called the culture of poverty. According to Lewis, the culture of poverty is a distinctive set of beliefs, values, norms, and attitudes that trap a small number of the urban poor in a permanent cycle of poverty. William Julius Wilson, however, argues that lack of jobs creates poverty. Charles Murray, a functionalist and conservative social critic has written in his book Losing Ground that out-of-wedlock childbirth among black women is responsible for the poverty levels in the African American community. Herbert Gans, a Marxist Sociologist, wrote The War Against the Poor in 1995 in which he wrote that pervasive poverty is functional because: the poor have the lowest status; society’s dirty work gets done cheaply; it creates jobs in the “poverty industry;” when the poor are classified as deviant it upholds mainstream values; and the poor absorb the cost of social change. William Julius Wilson and Charles Murray are, arguably, the two most influential social theorists regarding the dismantling of the poverty and social welfare programs of the Great Society which was first implemented by the Lyndon Baines Johnson administration in the late 1960s. Largely due to the writings of these two theorists and the increasing sociopolitical conservatism of the U. S. Congress and the polity, policies and programs including Affirmative Action, Aid to Families with Dependent Children (AFDC) which is now Temporary Aid to Needy Families (TANF), and other social welfare programs are being dismantled at blinding speed. The two social theorists being considered differ not only in their ideas but also in their backgrounds. William Julius Wilson is a moderately conservative, African American social scientist, author of several books and articles including The Truly Disadvantaged, The Declining Significance of Race, and When Work Disappears. He is a fellow of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, a past-President of the American Sociological Association, a former Professor of Sociology and Public Policy at the University of Chicago, and is currently the Chairman of the Department of Sociology at Harvard University. Charles Murray is a highly conservative, white social scientist and the author of several books and articles including Losing Ground and The Bell Curve. He is a fellow of the American Enterprise Institute, a former social policy advisor to Vice-President Dan Quayle, a writer, and is currently a social policy theorist for the American Enterprise Institute. 203 According to Wilson, poverty is caused by the following socio-structural factors: joblessness, an economic structure which offers fewer life chance, Hyperghettoization, 204 structural constraints on the ability of individuals to achieve, and down-turning economic cycles. Murray’s argument is a culture of poverty argument which asserts that inner city minority (particularly black) communities are mired in poverty for the following reasons: illegitimacy, the welfare system which destroys initiative, crime, unrecognized or unused opportunities, laziness, and acceptance of poverty as a way of life. 205 Social mobility involves the movement of people from one social position to another in the stratification system. Blau and Duncan studied fathers and sons and whether the education and occupation of the fathers had any impact on the education and occupation of the sons. They found that there was greater mobility at the center than at the extremes, and that the sons’ education had more impact on sons’ occupations than did fathers’ education or occupation. Featherman and Hauser also found great social mobility at the center but very little at the extremes. More recent studies have compared mothers and daughters, mothers and sons, and fathers and daughters, and the findings are all the same; the child’s education is the single strongest and most factor in the SES of the adult child. In other words, the ability of the individual to achieve a good education is more indicative of that individual’s adult SES than any other factor. Social mobility in the United States is possible, there is more opportunity here than almost any other place in the world, and yet, for some, those opportunities do not seem to exist. 206 Writer and social critic Jonathan Kozol, in his book Amazing Grace: The Lives of Children and the Conscience of a Nation, wrote, in 1995, about the children who live and go to school in the Mott Haven and Hunt’s Point areas of the South Bronx in New York City. In his now classic book he discusses the intractable, grinding poverty of all of the people in these two area, the shocking physical and educational conditions of the schools, the fact that none of the schools have libraries, the buildings where children die because absentee landlords taking money from the government refuse to fix broken elevators, where rats run through the walls of the tenements and eat through the electrical wires, where girls become prostitutes at the age of twelve, where drug use is rampant, where AIDS is at epidemic proportions, where hope itself is often lost. In writing about the apartment building where a child died because of a broken elevator door, Kozol declares “the kennel where I leave my dog while I am in New York is cleaner and smells better. The kennel also has a place where dogs can go outside and have some fun in the fresh air” which the children there cannot do. 207 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 64 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights The number 6 train from Manhattan to the South Bronx makes nine stops in the 18-minute ride between East 59th Street and Brook Avenue. When you enter the train, you are in the seventh richest congressional district in the nation. When you leave, you are in the poorest. The 600,000 people who live here . . .make up one of the largest racially segregated concentrations of poor people in our nation. Brook Avenue, which is the tenth stop on the local, lies in the center of Mott Haven, whose 48,000 people are the poorest in the South Bronx. Two thirds are Hispanic, one third black. Thirty-five percent are children. In 1991, the median household income of the area, according to the New York Times, was $7,600. 208 A woman who teaches 5th grade in the Houston Independent School District (HISD), takes her children on two field trips every year: one to downtown Houston (which the children can see from their homes near the Heights), and one to a shopping mall because none of her students has ever been in a mall! 209 The following tables are statistical indications of the serious nature of American poverty and the many ways it impacts the life chances of millions of human beings. 210 Per Cent Distribution of Various Socioeconomic Stratification Data by Race/Ethnicity (1997) Race or Ethnic Origin Asian and American Hispanic Indian Origin Socioeconomic Characteristics White Black Pacific Islander Years of Education Elementary 0-8 years 7.5 8.8 9.8 — — High School 1-3 years 9.4 16.3 5.3 — — Years of Education High School 4 years 33.9 35.8 23.2 65.6 54.7 College 1-3 years 24.5 25.8 19.6 — — College 4+ years 24.6 13.3 42.2 9.4 10.3 Labor Force Status Civilian Labor Force 67.5 64.7 68.3 — 67.9 Employed 64.6 58.2 65 — 62.6 Unemployed 2.8 6.5 3.2 — 5.3 Unemployment Rate 4.2 10 4.7 — 7.7 Not in Labor Force 32.5 35.3 31.7 — 32.1 Family Characteristics Married Couple w/ Own Children 37.2 23.3 78.5 65.8 72.2 Unmarried Female Householder w/ Children 8.5 30.7 13.2 26.2 24.4 Unmarried Male Householder w/ Children 2.2 3.8 8.3 8 7.4 1996 Family Income < $5,000 2 7.8 3.9 — 4.9 $5,000-$ 9,000 3.9 11.1 3.8 — 9.8 $10,000- $14,999 5.4 10.7 5.3 — 11.6 $15,000- $24,999 13 17.6 11.4 — 21.5 $25,000- $34,999 13.5 14.3 10.9 — 15.5 $35,000- $49,999 18.3 15.1 15.8 — 15.1 $$50,000 44.1 23.3 48.7 — 21.5 Median Income in Dollars $44,756 $26,522 $49,105 $21,619 $26,179 Families Below Poverty Level 8.6 26.1 12.6 27.2 26.4 Persons Below Poverty Level 11.2 28.3 14.4 31.2 29.4 Housing Own Home 69.2 45.5 52.3 — 43.1 Rent 29.2 52.9 46.5 — 56.9 The above table, Per Cent Distribution of Various Socioeconomic Stratification Data by Race/Ethnicity (1997), indicates the levels of stratification that exist among racial and ethnic minorities in the United States. Whites are more likely to be high school and college graduates, are more likely to be employed, more likely to be in intact two parent families, more likely to earn at or above the national median income, and more likely to own their own home than minorities. Minorities are significantly more likely to be poor than whites: blacks, 3 times; Asians 1.28 times, Native Americans 2.79 times; Hispanics 2.63 times. Home ownership, a major part of “the American dream” and an indicator of wealth is significantly higher among whites than minorities who are much more likely to rent than to own their homes. On each of the measures in this table, SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 65 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights minorities fare less well than whites, with the exception of Asians who show a higher rate of educational attainment than any other single racial or ethnic group. Although Asians show a higher than average family income, they also have more family members working than whites, so that per person family income is greater for whites than for any other group. Poverty Thresholds in 2000 by Size of Family and Number of Related Children Under 18 Size of Family Unit Related Children under 18 None One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight One Person 8,959 Under 65 8,259 65 and over Two People 11,531 11,869 Householder under 65 10,409 11,824 Householder over 65 13,470 13,861 13,874 Three People 17,761 18,052 17,463 17,524 Four People 21,419 21,731 21,065 20,550 20,236 Five People 24,636 24,734 24,224 23,736 23,009 22,579 Six People 28,347 28,524 27,914 27,489 26,696 25,772 22,579 Seven People 31,704 31,984 31,408 30,904 30,188 29,279 28,334 28,093 Eight People 38,138 38,322 37,813 37,385 36,682 35,716 34,841 34,625 33,291 Nine People or More This table, Poverty Thresholds in 2000 by Size of Family and Number of Related Children Under 18, shows the government-established poverty thresholds for the year 2000. People, based on the number of people in a household, earning at or below the value listed, are considered poor. Therefore, a single person under 65 who earns $8,959 or less annually is considered poor. A family of 4 whose total household income is $17, 761or less annually is considered poor. As the number of people in the family increases the poverty threshold also increases, so that a family of 9 is considered poor if the family income is $33, 291 or less. 1990 and 2000 Poverty Level Differences among Specified Groups Negative Number Indicates a Decline in Poverty Levels Since 1990 Race/Ethnicity All People below Poverty Level, by Percent 1990 2000 Percent Difference 13.5 11.3 -2.2 All 10.7 9.4 -1.3 White 8.8 7.5 -1.3 White Non-Hispanic 31.9 22.1 -9.8 Black 28.1 21.2 -6.9 Hispanic 12.2 10.8 -1.4 Asian This, 1990 and 2000 Poverty Level Differences among Specified Groups, table shows the difference in poverty rates and the decline in poverty rates from 1990 to 2000. There was a decline in overall poverty rates of 2.2% for the decade, and while the poverty rate for blacks declined by nearly 10%, blacks are still more than twice as likely to be poor than whites, and while Hispanic poverty rates also declined a dramatic 7%, they are still more than twice as likely to be poor than whites although less likely to be poor than blacks. Asians in 1990 and 2000 were more likely than whites to be poor but their overall poverty rates declined by 1.5% and are closer to the poverty rates of whites than any other racial or ethnic minority. 1992 Business Ownership Statistics By Race Race Total U. S. Firms (in actual Percent of All U. S. Total U. S. Sales Percent of All Sales numbers) Firms Receipts (in $ Receipts millions) 17,253,143 100 3,324,200 100 All 620,912 3.6 32,197 1 Black 705,672 4.1 104,100 3.1 Asian 862,605 5 76,842 2.3 Hispanic 15,063,954 87.3 3,111,061 93.6 White This table, 1992 Business Ownership Statistics by Race, shows that business ownership, which is an indicator of the economic well being of any given group, is severely skewed toward white Americans who own 87.3% of all businesses and earn 93.6% of all sales. Minorities, therefore, show significantly less business ownership, and a concomitant reduction in economic well-being. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 66 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Share of Aggregate Income by Quintile (Fifths—Each 5th Represents 14.41 Million Families in 1999) and Top 5% (Represents 3.6 Million Families in 1999) of Families 1980 to 1999 (in Percent) Year Lowest Difference Second Difference Third Difference Fourth Difference Highest Top Fifth from Fifth from Fifth from Fifth from Fifth 5% Highest Highest Highest Highest Fifth Fifth Fifth Fifth 5.4 35.5 12.2 28.7 17.6 23.3 23.8 17.1 40.9 15.6 1970 5.3 35.8 11.6 29.5 17.6 23.5 24.4 16.7 41.1 14.6 1980 4.8 38.3 11.0 32.1 16.9 26.2 24.3 18.8 43.1 16.1 1985 4.7 29.7 10.9 23.5 16.9 17.5 24.1 10.3 34.4 16.5 1986 4.6 39.2 10.7 33.1 16.8 27.0 24.0 19.8 43.8 17.2 1987 4.6 39.4 10.7 33.3 16.7 27.3 24.0 20.0 44.0 17.2 1988 4.6 40.0 10.6 34.0 16.5 28.1 23.7 20.9 44.6 17.9 1989 4.6 39.7 10.8 33.5 16.6 27.7 23.8 20.5 44.3 17.4 1990 4.5 39.7 10.7 33.5 16.6 27.6 24.1 20.1 44.2 17.1 1991 4.3 40.4 10.5 34.2 16.5 28.2 24.0 20.7 44.7 17.6 1992 4.1 42.9 9.9 37.1 15.7 31.3 23.3 23.7 47.0 20.3 1993 4.2 42.7 10.0 36.9 15.7 31.2 23.3 23.6 46.9 20.1 1994 4.4 42.1 10.1 36.4 15.8 30.7 23.2 23.3 46.5 20.0 1995 4.2 42.6 10.0 36.8 15.8 31.0 23.1 23.7 46.8 20.3 1996 4.2 43.0 9.9 37.3 15.7 31.5 23.0 24.2 47.2 20.7 1997 4.2 43.1 9.9 37.4 15.7 31.6 23.0 24.3 47.3 20.7 1998 4.3 42.9 9.9 37.3 15.6 31.6 23.0 24.2 47.2 20.3 1999 This table, Share of Aggregate Income by Quintile, shows that, as the rich get richer, the poor get poorer. The wealth created in the US from 1970 to 1999 is distributed unequally across groups and the share of income of American society, divided into fifths (quintiles) shows the extreme disparity between the richest and poorest among us. In 1970, the top 20% (highest fifth or highest quintile) earned 40.9% of all the income earned in the US, in 1999, that amount increased to 47.2%. At the same time, the lowest 20% (lowest fifth or quintile) earned 5.4% of all income in 1970 and only 4.3% in 1999! In other words, as the old Depression-era song says, “the rich get rich and the poor get poorer, in the meantime, in between time, ain't we got fun!” From U.S. Census Bureau No. 216 Educational Attainment by Race/Ethnicity, and Sex 1960-2000 (College Graduate or Higher) by Percent All Races White Black Asian Hispanic Year Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female 9.7 5.8 10.3 6.0 2.8 3.3 --------1960 13.5 8.1 14.4 8.4 4.2 4.6 ----7.8 4.3 1970 20.1 12.8 21.3 13.3 8.4 8.3 ----9.4 6.0 1980 24.4 18.4 25.3 19.0 11.9 10.8 44.9 35.4 9.8 8.7 1990 27.8 23.6 28.5 23.9 16.3 16.7 47.6 40.7 10.7 10.6 2000 This table, From U.S. Census Bureau No. 216 Educational Attainment by race/Ethnicity, and Sex 1960-2000, shows that white males are more likely to than any other group except Asians to graduate from college. This table also shows the dramatic increase in the number of Americans of all races/ethnicities earning college degrees. In 1960 only 9.7% of all American males and only 5.8% of all American females earned college degrees. By 2000, those numbers had increased to 27.8% for males and 23.6% for females. Similar dramatic increases can be seen in college graduation for male and female racial and ethnic minorities. Even though racial and ethnic minorities and women earn college degrees in lesser percentages than white men, they are earning degrees at higher rates than ever before. Only 2.8% of black males earned degrees in 1960, but by 2000, 16.3% had earned a degree. Black women have always been slightly more likely to earn a degree than black males, but the reverse has traditionally been true for Hispanics. However, since 1970, the percentage of Hispanic women earning degrees is almost equal to the percentage earned by Hispanic males. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 67 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Dropout Rates by Race/Ethnicity and Sex for Selected Years and Percent Change Dropouts by Category 1975 1999 Percent Change Total 5.8 4.7 -1.1 5.4 4.4 -1.0 White 5.0 4.1 -0.9 Male 5.8 4.7 -1.1 Female 8.7 6.0 -2.7 Black 8.3 5.2 -3.1 Male 9.0 6.8 -2.2 Female 10.9 7.1 -3.8 Hispanic 10.1 6.9 -3.2 Male 11.6 7.3 -4.3 Female The table directly above shows the high school drop out rates for 1975 and 1999. The dropout rate has declined for all racial and ethnic groups, but most dramatically for Hispanics of both sexes. Dropout Rates by Race/Ethnicity and Sex for Selected Years and Percent Change Dropouts by Category 1975 1999 Percent Change Total 15.6 13.1 -2.5 13.9 12.8 -1.1 White 13.5 13.9 0.4 Male 14.2 11.8 -2.4 Female 27.3 16.0 -11.3 Black 27.8 16.3 -11.5 Male 26.9 15.7 -11.2 Female 34.9 33.9 -1.0 Hispanic 32.6 36.4 3.8 Male 36.8 31.1 -5.7 Female The table directly above, in contrast to the previous table, shows high school completion rates. In this case, the percentage of change shows dramatic increases in the number of young people who have graduated from high school, which complements the above table. Decreased drop out rates will result in higher completion rates. In this table, black males and females have increased their high school completion rates by more than 11% from 1975 to 1999. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 68 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Paradigm The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Stratification/Inequality All of society is characterized by conflict—economic competition—between the bourgeoisie and the proletariat. Conflict 1) 2) 3) 4) Inequality is generated and maintained by those in power in order to maintain their power. Various groups in society are delineated by those in power and then are pitted against each other in a struggle for wealth, power, and status. The powerful exploit everyone in order to engender false consciousness—the belief that the non-elites have the potential to become rich and powerful. The elites will do anything in order to maintain their power. Functionalism All of society is characterized by societal stability. 1) 2) 3) 4) Inequality is less widespread than the Conflictualists believe. Inequality, in general, is functional for society because it engenders competition which serves as an incentive for people to attempt to rise to the top. Inequality, overall, is highly dysfunctional for society because it fails to permit large groups of people from competing for the goods of society. Inequality is always functional (adaptive) for some segments of society and dysfunctional (non-adaptive) for others. Symbolic Interactionism All of society is based on day-to-day micro-level interactions between individuals and among small groups. 1) 2) Inequality is based on individual reactions to their own perceptions of the social structure. Because the social structure is subjective, inequality is also subjective and based on individual interpretations. Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIA—Stratification in the U.S. 5 largest countries in Western Europe…74 Amazing Grace: The Lives of Children and the Conscience of a Nation…77 Blau and Duncan…77 Brahman…69 C. Wright Mills…70 caste system…69 Charles Murray…77 class system…69 closed form…69 coercive power…69 conspicuous consumption…71 Conspicuous consumption…71 conspicuous leisure…71 Conspicuous leisure…71 creaming effect…70 culture of poverty…77 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 69 Reserved Dalit…69 Davis-Moore debate…70 E. Digby Baltzell…70 elite model…70 estate system…69 feminization of poverty…75 five largest states…75 Forms of stratification…69 four major castes…69 four systems of stratification…69 functionality of stratification…70 G-8 nations…75 Herbert Gans…77 income…70 Jonathan Kozol…77 Kingsley Davis and Wilbert E. Moore…70 Kshatriya…69 lack of jobs creates poverty…77 Lifestyles of the Rich and Famous…70 Losing Ground…77 major dimensions of stratification…69 master status…68 Master Statuses…68 Max Weber…69 Melvin Tumin…70 open form…69 Oscar Lewis…77 personal power…69 pluralistic model…70 poverty…75 poverty is functional…77 power…70 Power elite theories…70 SES…68 Shudra…69 slave system…69 Social differentiation…69 Social inequality…69 Social mobility…77 Social positions…69 social power…69 Social stratification is a form of inequality in which categories of people are systematically ranked in a hierarchy on the basis of their access to scarce but valued resources…69 Status…70 Status/Prestige…69 Stratification…68–83 stratification hierarchy…68 stratification is dysfunctional for society…70 The Bell Curve…77 The Declining Significance of © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Race…77 The Dysfunctionality of Stratification…70 The Functionality of Stratification…70 the goods of society (wealth, status, power)…69 The Power Elite…70 The Theory of the Leisure Class…70, 71 The Truly Disadvantaged…77 The War Against the Poor…77 theories of the causes of poverty…77 Thomas’ Theorem…68 Thorstein Veblen…70, 71 ultimate in group…72 United States is inarguably the richest nation in the world…74 Vaishya…69 W. I. Thomas…68 WASP…70 Wealth…70 wealth, power, and status…69 Weber…70 When Work Disappears…77 William Julius Wilson…77 Module IIIB—Global Stratification Just as individuals and groups are hierarchically ranked, so are nations. Inequality exists among nations as well as within nations and there are rich (First World), middle-class (Second World), and poor countries (Third World). The goods of society—wealth (the total value of one’s assets), power (the ability to influence over resistance), and status (social prestige)—are scarce but necessary and create competition within nations as well as among nations. In 1995, the 140 developing nations accounted for 78% of the world’s population, but possessed only 16% of the world’s wealth. 211 The four statistical measures of inequality in the world are found in the chart below and are: life expectancy rates; literacy rates; infant mortality rates; and standard of living which is measured based on per capita GNP or per capita GDP. The standard of living is represented by the per capita (per person) GNP and per capita (per person) GDP. The per capita (per person) GNP (Gross National Product) is the total value of the goods and services produced and sold by any given country in any given year (includes exports) whereas the GDP (Gross Domestic Product) is the total value of all goods and services produced and sold within a nation in one year (and does not include exports). Per capita means per person so that per capita GNP is the per person productivity of a nation. The life chances of people differ according to the amount of inequality in their nation as well as their nation’s ranking on the world stratification hierarchy—the poorer the nation, the poorer the life chances, the richer the nation, the greater the life chances. These life chances are statistically measured by life expectancy rates, literacy rates, infant mortality rates, and per capita GDP or per capita GNP. Since the shift from colonialism to self-rule, many nations have suffered extreme poverty. This poverty has severe consequences and though its causes are complex and controversial, nevertheless the statistical measures of inequality are based on the inability of 3rd World nations, regardless of the causes, to maintain sufficient financial resources to support the medical, educational, communications and transportation, and utilities infrastructure. The poorest nations of the world are not always lacking in natural resources and raw materials but are lacking in the ability to exploit those natural resources and raw materials without the help of richer nations and their technical and managerial expertise. 212 The truly terrible problems faced by Third World and emerging nations do not have simple causes: the causes are multivariate and deeply ingrained in both geopolitics and local cultures. However, to simplify an extremely complex issue, the geopolitical situation began with the colonialization of non-white, tribal or monarchical peoples, by white Europeans beginning in about 1500 A.D. For 450 years, the non-white peoples of the world were vassals of the mercantilistic economies of the colonizing nations. When the “iron curtain descended across Europe” 213 there was a global conflict between the two superpowers—the Soviet Union and the United States—that was called the Cold War. From about 1948 until about 1992, the world was held hostage by the threat of global thermonuclear war. Third World and emerging nations were pawns in this great conflict as the two super powers attempted to sway geopolitics by installing puppet governments and by arbitrarily and dangerously supporting “friendly” dictatorial regimes who would serve as buffers to “unfriendly” regimes—the Soviet Union and the United States both engaged in this practice; Castro in Cuba was supported by the USSR, Noriega in Panama was supported by the US, for example. In most cases—particularly in Southeast Asia, Africa, and the Caribbean—these dictators were corrupt, tribalistic leaders of mostly illiterate pastoral, horticultural, or agrarian peoples who had lived for millennia under the rule of hereditary monarchs or tribal leaders who had come to power through bloody coups, tribal, or internecine wars, and who held all the power and almost all the wealth in their societies. As a consequence of all of these conditions, the Third World still suffers from illiteracy, grinding poverty, starvation, virtually non-existent medical care, and the looting of their natural resources and labor power by multinational corporations, with the support and aid of corrupt leaders and officials. The geopolitical situation has changed, however, and with that change, has come a malign neglect of the poorest people in the world by the richest people in the world. Europe and the United States seem to intrude into the Third World only when their own economic interests are at stake. Because the population of most poor countries is largely rural and there is very little transportation and communications infrastructure and the costs of vehicles and fuel and maintenance are very high, there is little possibility that people will be able to move easily to the larger cities where health care and education are readily available. Furthermore, the expenses of schooling for SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 70 Reserved © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights doctors, teachers, and other education and health workers is very high and the return on the investment is often very low in rural areas where barter is more normative than cash transactions. It takes cash money, very good credit, or the promise of large shares of profits to buy the equipment necessary to exploit natural resources and to pay for the experts who are able to run and maintain the equipment and create the various business and engineering systems that are required, and in countries where the majority of the people do not have running water, electricity, telephones, or roads, finding capable workers is also problematic. Third World poverty is a difficult and complex issue with myriad causes and few solutions. However, Immanuel Wallerstein has developed World Systems Theory which is a Marxist approach to world inequality. World Systems Theory and other Marxist theories such as dependency theory contend that world inequality is the result of colonialism which is the maintenance of political, social, economic, and cultural domination over a people by a foreign power for an extended period of time. Since 1500 A.D., every continent and every country in the world (except Antarctica) has been owned, in whole or in part, by a European nation. The major colonizing nations are Great Britain, France, Spain, Portugal, The Netherlands, Belgium, the United States, Italy and the colonized nations/areas include India, parts of China, all of Southeast Asia, all of South America, much of the Middle East, all of Central America, all of North America, all of the Pacific Islands, Greenland, and Australia. Between 1914 and 1948, most of the colonized countries of the world had gained their freedom and had become independent nation-states. By 1980, colonialism largely had become a phenomenon of the past but independent rule has been, in many cases, extremely problematic. In many countries, independence has created greater social and economic inequality, exploitation of the poor, and political instability because, when the colonial masters left, the institutions of society collapsed creating severely anomic conditions. In general, the former colonies did not know how to form governments, maintain the physical infrastructure, educate its populace, provide health care, or develop its natural resources without the support of the colonizers which leads to neocolonialism, the dependence on more industrialized nations, including their former colonial masters, for managerial and technical expertise, investment capital, and manufactured goods. When the colonial masters departed, they left behind a population that, for generations, had been deliberately kept poor, rural, illiterate or barely literate, and on foot. Such a population is easy to control but is unable to stand up to the rigors of a freedom it has never known in living memory. Colonialism is only one aspect of Third World poverty. Internal wars, corruption of government officials, the aftermath of the Cold War, and the inattention of Western nations are all contributive factors to the seemingly intransigent poverty of over a billion people in the world. The following “If the World Were A Village of 100 People,” from the internet, is an indication of the way the world looks, and the ramifications of the vast disparities in wealth among the world’s peoples. If the World Were A Village of 100 People by C. Douglas Lummis When you woke this morning, did you look forward joyously to the day? When you go to bed tonight, do you think you will be filled with satisfaction? Do you think the place you are is precious? It is to you who cannot say right away, “Yes, of course” that I send this message. If you can read this, the things around you might start to look a little different. In the world today, 6 billion 300 million people live. If this world were shrunk to the size of a village, what would it look like? If 100 people lived in this village, 52 would be women, 48 would be men. 30 would be children, 70 would be adults. 7 would be aged. 90 would be heterosexual, 10 would be homosexual. 70 would be nonwhite, 30 would be white, 61 would be Asian, 13 African, 13 from North and South America, 12 Europeans, and the remaining one from the South Pacific. 33 would be Christians, 19 believers in Islam, 13 would be Hindus, and 6 would follow Buddhist teachings. 5 would believe that there are spirits in the trees and rocks and in all of nature. 24 would believe in other religions, or would believe in no religion. 17 would speak Chinese, 9 English, 8 Hindi and Urdu, 6 Spanish, 6 Russian, and 4 would speak Arabic. That would account for half the village. The other half would speak Bengal, Portuguese, Indonesian, Japanese, German, French, or some other language. In such a village with so many sorts of folks, it would be very important to learn to understand people different from yourself and to accept others as they are. But consider this. Of the 100 people in this village, 20 are undernourished, 1 is dying of starvation, while 15 are overweight. Of the wealth in this village, 6 people own 59% (all of them from the United States), 74 people own 39%, and 20 people share the remaining 2%. Of the energy of this village, 20 people consume 80%, and 80 people share the remaining 20%. 75 people have some supply of food and a place to shelter them from the wind and the rain, but 25 do not. 17 have no clean, safe water to drink. If you have money in the bank, money in your wallet and spare change somewhere around the house, then you are among the richest 8. If you have a car, you are among the richest 7. Among the villages, 1 (from the United States) has a college education. 2 (from the United SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 71 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved States) have computers. 14 cannot read. If you can speak and act according to your faith and your conscience without harassment, imprisonment, torture or death, then you are more fortunate than 48, who cannot. If you do not live in fear of death by bombardment, armed attack, landmines, or of rape or kidnapping by armed groups, then you are more fortunate than 20, who do. In one year, 1 person in the village will die, but in the same year, 2 babies will be born, so that at the year’s end the number of villagers will be 101. If you can read this site, that means you are thrice-blessed. First, because someone thought of you and sent you this message. Second, because you are able to read. Third, and most important, because you are alive. Someone once said: “What you send out comes back again.” So sing from the bottom of your heart, dance with your body waving free, and live, putting your soul into it. And when you love, love as though you have never been wounded, even if you have. And love the fact that you and others, live here in this village. Perhaps if enough of us learn to love our village, it may yet be possible to save it from being torn apart. 214 Colonialism was based on an economic system called mercantilism which was a system in which the colonizing nation forced the colony to sell its raw materials ONLY to the colonizer and to buy finished goods ONLY from the colonizer at whatever prices the colonizing nation determines. Mercantilism was a very good system for the European colonizers—it made them rich beyond the dreams of avarice, but it served to virtually enslave entire native populations and to pull the wealth of the colonies away from the indigenous people. World Systems Theory is based in the Conflict Paradigm and was engendered by Immanuel Wallerstein. World Systems theory posits that there are three types of countries: Core or “First World,” Semi-Peripheral or “Second World,” and Peripheral or “Third World.” Core countries exploit the peripheral countries’ labor, natural resources, and raw materials, while semiperipheral countries serve as “middlemen” between the core and the periphery (this part of the theory has not proven to be entirely accurate); and peripheral countries are exploited by the core and the semi-periphery and forced to maintain their DEPENDENCE on the core. Immanuel Wallerstein, the “father” of World Systems Theory, contributed to the social science literature primarily in the mid-1970s. William Roseberry, in an article concerning proletarianization of indigenous peasant populations, summarizes and enumerates Wallerstein's propositions as follows: (1) The world system is integrated economically rather than politically. That is, it is a world economy composed of numerous politically independent but economically interdependent states. (2) The world system is economically differentiated, composed of (a) a core, consisting of the states at the developed center of the world economy (for example, the United States and northwestern Europe); (b) a periphery, consisting of the underdeveloped states in the so-called Third World (for example Bolivia, Honduras, and Jamaica); and (c) a semiperiphery, composed of buffer states that have more opportunities for development than peripheral states, exercise some degree of economic influence over their neighbors, but are nonetheless not “core” (for example, Mexico, Venezuela, South Africa, and various Mediterranean and East European countries). (3) This internationally structured inequality is a deeply rooted historical product, created with the formation of a capitalist world economy in the sixteenth century and shaped across four centuries of colonial and postcolonial change. Social processes in particular regions can be understood only in terms of the place and function of those regions within the larger world system. Indeed, it is common for world-system theorists to explain problems in the periphery or semiperiphery in terms of two factors: (a) developments occurring in the core; or (b) the maintenance requirements of the system as a whole. (Roseberry 110-111) 215 Multinational Corporations are commercial organizations which, while headquartered in one country, own or control other corporations and subsidiaries throughout the world and help to maintain the power of the core nations over the semiperiphery and periphery. Multinationals buy, sell, and produce goods and services across the globe and are becoming extremely powerful both economically and politically in the core as well as in the periphery and semi-periphery. Multinational corporations create jobs where jobs did not exist before and therefore help to grow the economies of Third World countries. However, multinationals also exploit the land, labor, and capital of poor countries by insisting on enormous tax breaks, putting economic pressure on Third World governments to either abandon or fail to enforce environmental laws, worker protection laws, and child labor laws. 216 Modernization Theory is a functionalist theory of stratification. Modernization is the far-reaching process by which peripheral nations move from having traditional or less developed institutions to those characteristic of more developed societies. Modernization theory argues that, since modern societies tend to be urban, literate, and industrial; have sophisticated transportation systems and media; tend to be organized within the nuclear family unit rather than the extended-family model; demonstrate a shift in allegiance from traditional sources of authority such as parents, elders, and local religious leaders to newer authorities such as government officials, the undeveloped, underdeveloped, and developing nations have cultures that prevent them from fully utilizing their natural and human resources. The cultural patterns of the peripheral and semiperipheral nations is so much at odds with those of core countries that drastic social change is necessary in order to pull these countries into the modern world. The poorest countries in the world, according to Modernization theory, have cultures based on tribalism and SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 72 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved traditional patterns of authority; barter rather than money economies, lack of universal formal education, high fertility and birth rates; and extended families and kin-like relationships all of which keep theses countries mired in poverty regardless of the amount of financial and technological aid they receive from the core. 217 Four Statistical Measures of Inequality in the World 218 Life Expectancy Literacy Rate** Infant Mortality Rate* Rate† Position Country Per Capita GDP‡ Entire World 1st World (Core) World 63.94 77.00 51.55 $7,600 United States 77 97 6.7 $36,200 Japan 78 100.0% 7 $21,090 Mexico 71.76 89.6% Brazil 63.24 83.3% 36.96 $6,500 South Korea 72 96.8% 8 $9,810 India 62.86 52% 63.19 $2,200 Afghanistan 46.24 31.5% 147.02 $800 Somalia 46.6 24% 123.97 $550 Sierra Leone 45.6 31.4% 146.52 $500 East Timor 64.9 48% 51.99 $500 * the number of years one can expect to live ** the ability to read and write a simple paragraph about one’s daily life in one’s own language by the age of 15 years † the number of deaths per 1,000 live births of infants who do not reach their first year of life ‡ the total value of all goods and services produced and sold within a nation in one year (does not include exports) nd 2 World (Semiperiphery) 25.36 $9,100 3rd World (Periphery) **Note: Women, worldwide, are 50%-66% less likely to be literate than men. There are parts of the world, such as Afghanistan, where it was recently illegal to teach females to read and write. Source: CIA World Factbook, 2002. Decade 1900 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 07/01/99 07/21/03 20th Century World Population Growth by Decade (in Billions) 219 Population 1.65 2.52 3.02 3.70 4.45 5.30 6.01 6.31 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 73 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Comparison of Richest to Poorest Countries Based on Selected Demographic Characteristics 220 Characteristic WORLD United Japan Mexico Brazil India Afghanistan Somalia Sierra East States Leone Timor Population in 6,233 275 127 102 175 1,100 27 7.5 5.4 .9 Millions Age Structure as % of Total Population 0-14 29.2 21.12 14.64 33.32 28.57 33.12 42.2 44.54 44.73 N/A 15-64 63.7 66.27 67.83 62.28 65.9 62.2 55.01 52.69 52.12 N/A >65 7.1 12.61 17.53 4.4 5.45 4.68 2.79 2.77 3.15 N/A Birth 21.16 14.2 10.04 22.77 18.45 24.48 41.42 47.23 45.11 28.07 Rate/1,000 Death 8.93 8.71 8.34 5.02 9.34 8.74 17.72 18.35 19.19 6.52 Rate/1,000 Net Migration N/A 3.5 0 -2.77 -0.03 -0.08 11.11 5.96 10.23 51.07 Rate/1,000 Infant 51.55 6.76 3.88 25.36 36.96 63.19 147.02 123.97 146.52 51.99 Mortality Rate/1,000 Life 63.94 77.26 80.08 71.76 63.24 62.86 46.24 46.6 45.6 64.9 Expectancy Rate Fertility Rate 2.73 2.06 1.41 2.62 2.09 3.04 5.79 7.11 6.01 3.88 Literacy Rate 77% 97 99 89.6 83.3 52 31.5 24 31.4 48 as % of Total Population Per Capita 7,600 36,200 24,900 9,100 6,500 2,200 800 600 500 500 GDP in Constant Dollars % of 27 12.7 N/A 27 17.4 35 N/A N/A 60 42 Population below Poverty Level Population 1.23 0.9% 0.17% 1.5% 0.91% 1.55% 3.48% 3.48% 3.61% 7.26% Growth Rate The age structure of any society is an indication of the productive capacity of that country. Those individuals who are under 14 years of age or over 65 years of age are considered a dependent population. Those whose food, shelter, health care, and general welfare is dependent on the work of others—the dependent population—are those who are too young or too old to earn a living for themselves and must be supported. If the ratio of the dependent population to the working age population—those between 15 and 64 years of age—is very high, the country is much more likely to be poor. Countries with a large number of children compared to the working population are often among the poorest countries because there are fewer working age adults. The birth rate is based on the average number of annual births per 1,000 people in a given population. The death rate is the average number of annual deaths per 1,000 people in a given population. High birth rates coupled with high death rates are very strong indicators of poverty. “The net migration rate is based on the number of people who enter or leave any given country calculated per 1,000 people in the population. The net migration rate is the difference between the numbers of those leaving a country and the number of those entering a country. This entry includes the figure for the difference between rate the number of persons entering and leaving a country during the year per 1,000 persons (based on midyear population). An excess of persons entering the country is referred to as net immigration (e.g., 3.56 migrants/1,000 population); an excess of persons leaving the country as net emigration (e.g., -9.26 migrants/1,000 population). The net migration rate indicates the contribution of migration to the overall level of population change. High levels of migration can cause problems such as increasing unemployment and potential ethnic strife (if people are coming in) or a reduction in the labor force, perhaps in certain key sectors (if people are leaving).” 221 The infant mortality rate is the number of deaths per 1,000 live births of infants who do not reach their first birthday. The life expectancy rate is the number of years one can be expected to live. The higher the infant mortality rate and the lower the life expectancy rate, the greater the likelihood of extreme levels of poverty in a nation. The fertility rate is the average number of pregnancies per woman in any given population. Countries with very high fertility rates are often poor. The fertility rate, birth rate, and dependent population are closely related. The population growth rate is the percentage of annual population increase in any given country. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 74 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved The table above shows that, in comparison to the population of the world, the United States is a wealthy, highly productive nation with a strong educational system, an effective government, a medical infrastructure that permits some level of health care even for the poorest of its citizens, and a robust communications system. Sierra Leone, by contrast, is one of the poorest countries in the world as indicated by the very large dependent population, the high birth, death, and infant mortality rates, the very low life expectancy and literacy rate, the extremely marginal per capita GDP and a high population growth rate. Their French and Belgian colonial masters left Sierra Leone a divided, desperately poor country with virtually no education, legal, political, governmental, economic, medical, or communications infrastructure. As is true of many Third World nations, the rise of colonialism prevented them from learning how to exploit their own natural resources and the collapse of colonialism forced them into dependence on the good will of other nations for their very survival. The 62 Poorest Countries in the World Continent/Location World Country Per Capita Per Cent Least Developed Poverty GDP below Country Ranking Poverty Level 22 Angola 1330 N/A Africa 18 Benin 1040 37 18 Burkina-Faso 1040 45% Burundi 600 70% 4 Yes 21 Central African 1300 N/A Republic 17 Chad 1030 80 Democratic Republic 590 N/A 3 Yes of Congo 24 Djibouti 1400 50% 32 Equatorial Guinea 2100 N/A Eritrea 740 N/A 10 Yes Ethiopia 700 64 8 Yes 29 Gambia 1770 N/A 31 Guinea 1970 40 15 Guinea-Bissau 900 N/A Yes 34 Lesotho 2450 49.2 19 Liberia 1100 80 14 Madagascar 870 70 Yes Malawi 660 64 7 Yes 13 Mali 840 64 Yes 30 Mauritania 1800 50 15 Mozambique 900 70 Yes 12 Niger 820 63 Yes 16 Rwanda 1000 70 Sierra Leone 500 68 1 Yes Somalia 550 N/A 2 Yes 23 Sudan 1360 N/A Tanzania 610 51 5 Yes 25 Togo 1500 32 20 Uganda 1200 35 14 Zambia 870 86 Yes 11 Afghanistan 800 N/A Asia Yes 28 Bangladesh 1750 36 20 Bhutan 1200 N/A 25 Cambodia 1500 36 East Timor 500 42 1 Yes 26 Laos 1630 40 25 Myanmar (Burma) 1500 25 24 Nepal 1400 42 41 El Salvador 4600 48 Central America 38 Guatemala 3700 60 33 Honduras 2300 53 35 Nicaragua 2500 50 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 75 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Continent/Location South America Eastern Europe Middle East The 62 Poorest Countries in the World World Country Per Capita Poverty GDP Ranking 41 37 39 36 42 43 6 16 12 Paraguay Suriname Albania Armenia Bulgaria Romania Gaza Strip (Palestine) West Bank (Palestine) Yemen 4600 3500 3800 3350 6200 6800 625 Per Cent below Poverty Level 36 N/A 30 55 35 45 45 1000 50 820 N/A Least Developed Country Yes Yes Island Nations Cape Verde 1500 32 North Atlantic 25 Comoros 710 60 Indian Ocean 9 Yes Haiti 1700 80 Caribbean 27 Jamaica 3700 34 Caribbean 38 Kiribati 840 N/A North Pacific (Equator) 13 Yes Maldives 3870 N/A Arabian Sea 40 Samoa 3500 N/A South Pacific 37 Sao Tome and 1200 N/A South Atlantic (Gulf of 20 Principe Guinea) Solomon Islands 1700 N/A South Pacific 27 Tuvalu 1100 N/A South Pacific 19 Vanatu 1300 N/A South Pacific (New Hebrides) 21 Of the 268 nations in the world, those listed above are the 62 poorest: 30 (48⅓%) are in Africa, 8 (13%) in Asia, 4 (6½%) in Central America, 2 (3¼%) in South America, 4 (6½%) in Eastern Europe, 3 (5%) in the Middle East (2 of which are in the disputed lands of Israel), and 11 (17¾%)are island nations. Not all of those listed are classified as Least Developed Nations which are the abjectly poorest nations on earth. “The United Nations classifies countries as ‘least developed’ based on three criteria: Income: currently set at annual gross domestic product (GDP) below $900 per capita Quality of life: including life expectancy at birth, per capita calorie intake, primary and secondary school enrollment rates and adult literacy Economic Diversification: based on the share of manufacturing in GDP, share of the labour force in industry, annual per capita commercial energy consumption and merchandise export concentration as indexed by the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD).” 222 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 76 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIB—Global Stratification age structure…87 Wallerstein…84, 85 measures of birth rate…87 independent rule…84 inequality…83 colonialism…84 infant mortality Four Statistical Colonialism…85 rate…87 Measures of Comparison of Richest infant mortality Inequality in the rates…83 World…86 to Poorest Countries life chances…83 Based on Selected goods of society— Demographic life expectancy wealth, power, and Characteristics…87 rates…83 status…83 Conflict Paradigm…85 literacy rates…83 Gross Domestic Product…83 Core…85 mercantilism…85 dependency theory…84 Gross National Modernization Product…83 Theory…85 dependent population…87 If the World Were A Multinational fertility rate…87 Corporations…85 Village of 100 People…84 First World…83, 85 neocolonialism…84 net migration rate…87 Immanuel four statistical Per capita…83 per capita GDP…83 per capita GNP…83 Peripheral…85 productive capacity…87 Second World…83, 85 Semi-Peripheral…85 standard of living…83 The 62 Poorest Countries in the World…88 Third World…83, 85 World Systems Theory…84, 85 Module IIIC—Stratification by Race and Ethnicity Racial/Ethnic Discrimination in America—1776-1998 1776—Sally Hemings 1845—Native American Party—An anti-immigration group held convention in Philadelphia; attempted to stop immigration to U.S. 1852—Know-Nothings formed American Party Gained control of some legislatures Wanted to: Ban Catholics and other immigrants (mostly Southern Europeans) from holding offices Create literacy tests Restrict immigration based on national origin 1854—Commodore Matthew Perry opens trade between US and Japan 1857—Dred Scott Decision established legal doctrine of slaves as property 1864-1874—Reconstruction 1877—Jim Crow Laws established 1882—First Chinese Exclusionary Act passed 1887—American Protective Association founded to stop immigration 1887—The Dawes Act eliminated tribal ownership of Indian lands 1894—Immigration Restriction League founded; proposed literacy tests and special standards for immigrants 1896—Plessy v. Ferguson decided by the Supreme Court; established separate but equal; affirmed the constitutionality of the Jim Crow laws 1899—Cumming v. County Board of Education established separate but unequal status; progeny of Plessy; upheld constitutionality of Jim Crow laws 1911—Chinese Exclusionary Act expanded to include other East Asians and Japanese 1924—National Origins Act passed by Congress Banned all East Asians Strictly limited immigration from Southern and Eastern Europe 1924—Ku Klux Klan marched down Pennsylvania Avenue in D.C.; the KKK had 4 million members 1942—Korematsu Decision determined that denying the civil rights of a certain group of citizens in times of war is constitutional 1943—The “Zoot Suit Riots” in LA; 200 Navy personnel rioted for 4 days over the July 4th Holiday in East L.A.; many Hispanics killed; no arrests; newspapers antiHispanic articles exacerbated the situation 1953—Emmett Till murdered 1962—South Carolina begins to fly Confederate Flag over capitol dome 1998—James Byrd Jr. dragged to death in Jasper TX 1998—Matthew Shephard murdered because he was gay SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 77 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved It seems to be both a biological as well as social trait that humans place everything in our environment into categories that help us determine what is safe and not safe. Anything that is different is immediately suspect and until we have analyzed the difference and determined whether that difference is or is not harmful we are apt to separate ourselves from that real or perceived danger. Seminal Social-Psychologist Gordon W. Allport wrote: No one quite knows why related ideas in our minds tend to cohere and form categories. Since the time of Aristotle, various “laws of association” have been proposed to account for this important property of the mind. The clusters formed do not need to correspond to outer reality as found in nature. For example, there are no such things as elves but I have a firm category in my mind concerning them. Similarly, I have firm categories concerning groups of mankind although there is no guarantee that my categories correspond to fact. To be rational, a category must be built primarily around the essential attributes of all objects that can be correctly included within the category. Thus all houses are structures marked by some degree of habitability (past or present). Each house will also have some nonessential attributes. Some are large, some small, some wooden, brick, cheap or expensive, old or new, painted white or gray. These are not the essential or defining attributes of a house. 223 In other words, we create mental categories based on our current knowledge of our social and physical world. We may know full well that there is no such thing as a werewolf, but when we hear a wolf howl while we are camping our minds conjure up certain visions of what may be lurking just beyond our campfire. Thus, we also use these categorical ideas to develop concepts of the essential characteristics of groups of people who differ in some way from ourselves; and yet, determining the essential qualities of any group is highly problematic: “[p]robably in no case can it ever be said that a group difference marks off every single member of a group from every single nonmember. . . . There is probably not a single case where every member of a group has all the characteristics ascribed to his group nor is there a single characteristic that is typical of every single member of one group and of no other group.” 224 What are the essential characteristics of women? Gays lesbians and bisexuals? Blacks? Hispanics? Asians? American Indians? The disabled? The elderly? Jews, Muslims, Hindus? Or of any minority? What can be said that always applies to each and every member of the group without exception? According to Allport, (based on the J-curve theory of distribution), there are some (not necessarily essential) group traits that are exclusive to a particular group but are rare within that group. In statistical parlance, these are called rare-zero differentials. Unfortunately, we tend to generalize these rare-zero differentials and assume that they are widespread essential group characteristics. 225 All women are __________. All men are ___________. All Muslims are __________. All Jews are ___________. All blacks are ___________. What words did you use to fill in the blanks? Were those words categorical rare-zero stereotypes based on your perception of reality? Are you sure? Why? “The problem of the 20th century is the problem of the color line” 226 wrote W.E.B. DuBois in 1903. DuBois was writing about race relations in the United States and in the world system. Racism is woven into the fabric of American society. A race is a population that differs from others in the frequency of certain hereditary traits, which is also the definition of a species. All human beings are members of the same species, we all share the same DNA, and we share many physiological characteristics that cross the boundaries of skin color, hair texture, eye shape, and all of the other physical characteristics that we believe to define race. Biologically, there is no such things as race when it comes to human beings with the exception that we all members of the same species: Homo Sapiens Sapiens. The superficial physical differences among all human beings are based on a difference of 1/10th of 1% of our DNA which is a difference of .001! Race, as we use the term on a day-to-day basis is a social construct; it is categories of people who are set apart from others because of socially defined physical characteristics. For example, in the U.S., people of Chinese and Southern European heritage have been categorized as both black and white dependent upon the time period. Since earliest times, for hundreds of thousands of years, human beings have been moving across the face of the planet. From 30,000 years ago until the present, people have been meeting others different in physical appearance from themselves. Oftentimes these travelers have interbred with those whom they have encountered creating a world-wide situation in which there are no pure races among human beings: we are all related, even if distantly, to one another, notwithstanding our superficial physical differences. Sadly, many socially defined racial characteristics have become significant symbols of character and Thomas’s Theorem, which states that things perceived to be real are real in their consequences, explains to us that race, and the way we define it, matters significantly in American society. (Poll taxes and literacy tests were striking examples of defining racial characteristics as being indicative of character, intelligence, and moral rectitude.) When W.E.B. DuBois wrote about “this double consciousness, this seeing one’s self through the eyes of the other world” he was emphasizing the idea that race is defined by others, by the dominant group in any given society. 227 Various Sociological, Psychological, and Social-Psychological studies indicate that, based on first impressions of strangers, we think physically attractive people are smart; fat people are sloppy and not very bright; well-dressed people are smarter richer and more attractive than people who are less well-dressed; nonwhite males are dangerous and sinister; white people are smarter richer more attractive more honest and more trustworthy than ethnic or racial minorities (even in the eyes of racial and ethnic minorities). In other words the way we form our initial opinions of the intrinsic human value—the basic human worth—of a stranger is based largely on those external aspects of the person that society has determined are acceptable or not acceptable. We are a class-driven society, but those American core values of equality and independence for all also blind us to the class structure, SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 78 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved the social structure, the stratification hierarchy, and the prejudice and discrimination that effects so profoundly and with such grave consequences our day-to-day interactions with our fellow human beings. Ethnicity is a status based on cultural heritage and shared feelings of peoplehood so that an ethnic group is a category of people that is set apart from others because of its distinctive social and cultural characteristics, such as ancestry, language, religion, customs, and lifestyle. And, although ethnicity is self-defined, it is more than possible for race and ethnic group membership to be combined in one person. 228 Those who do the defining of race are referred to as the dominant group (the dominant group is always the ultimate ingroup in a society). A dominant group is an ascribed (unearned and socially defined) master status 229 which is defined only in relationship to the minority groups in a society. Rosenblum and Travis have argued that “what one notices in the world depends in large part on the statuses one occupies . . . thus, we are likely to be fairly unaware of the statuses we occupy that privilege us . . . [and] provide advantage, and are acutely aware of those . . . that yield negative judgments and unfair treatment . . . one of the privileges of being white [in America is] being able to be oblivious to those privileges . . .majority status is unmarked or unstigmatized and grants a sense of entitlement . . .the unmarked category . . . tells us what a society takes for granted” such as being white and male in America. 230 A minority group, which is defined by the dominant group, is also an ascribed master status 231 . It is a category of people whose physical appearance or cultural characteristics are defined as being different from the traits of the dominant group, and that result in their being set apart for different and unequal treatment. This definition of a minority group takes into account both race and ethnicity! According to Dworkin and Dworkin from the University of Houston-Central, there are four qualities of minority groups: 1) identifiability 2) differential power 3) differential and pejorative treatment 4) group awareness. 232 Rosenblum and Travis have written that minority status is “highly visible, marked, stigmatized, and unprivileged or differentially (unequally) privileged;” what Erving Goffman called tribal stigma. 233 A minority group is not necessarily a minority because they are a smaller population than the dominant group. In fact, the South African system of apartheid (a system of de jure discrimination) is a major indicator that a minority group is socially and not numerically defined—90% of the population of South Africa is black, but until the very early 1990s they were the minority group, and the 10% of the population who are white were the dominant group. Unfortunately, there has been a long and terrible history of racism in the United States—racism that is woven into the fabric of America. (Racism is the belief that one racial category is inherently inferior to another.) With that racism has come egregious levels of prejudice and discrimination which we learn as part of the socialization process. James Michener wrote a novel entitled Tales of the South Pacific which was made into a musical and later a motion picture. There is a scene in the movie where a character sings a song about prejudice and discrimination which is titled “You’ve Got To Be Carefully Taught.” Part of the lyrics to that song is “You’ve go to be taught, before it’s too late, Before you are six, or seven, or eight, To hate all the people your relatives hate. You’ve got to be carefully taught.” 234 Prejudice is an attitude based on irrational attitudes and preconceived judgments (either favorable or unfavorable) toward a category of people. It is based on stereotypes as Thomas’s Theorem states: that which is perceived to be real is real in its consequences. Discrimination is a behavior. Discrimination includes such behaviors as: direct personal discrimination which includes slurs, social slights, threats, and even murder; ethnophaulisms are derogatory expressions, jokes, folk sayings, or generalized negative remarks such as white men can’t jump, black people have rhythm, the Washington Redskins. There are two types of discrimination: de jure which is legal discrimination or discrimination by law in which minority group members lawfully are denied access to public institutions, jobs, housing, and social rewards; and de facto which is discrimination in fact, even when it is illegal to engage in acts of discrimination. Harrison and Bennett conducted an historical analysis of types of legal discrimination by group: African Americans—slavery and Jim Crow laws; Asians—prevention of immigration, denial of citizenship, concentration camps, and seizing of property; American Indians—conquest, usurpation, seizing of property, Trail of Tears; Mexicans, Hawaiians—conquest, usurpation, and seizing of property. 235 De facto discrimination is practical, factual discrimination. It is a situation in which minority group members are discriminated against as a day-to-day occurrence even when laws exist that prohibit such behavior. Such behaviors as indirect institutional discrimination which is the differential and unequal treatment of a group that is deeply embedded in social, economic, and political institutions; and structural discrimination which is built into the very structure of the society. Structural discrimination is the most insidious form because, although racism is not the intent, it is the result. 236 Even with such horrific legal atrocities as those discussed by Harrison and Bennett, the United States, since the early 1950s and particularly in the mid 1960s has worked very hard at overcoming, if not our racism, at least our discriminatory behavior toward minorities. Once again we turn to Harrison and Bennett: 1952 the McCarran-Walter Act permitted Asians to become US citizens; 1954 the U.S. Supreme Court, in Brown v. Board of Education of Topeka, overturned Plessy and declared that segregation was inherently discriminatory and unconstitutional; the 1964 Civil Rights Act prohibited any race/ethnicitybased discrimination in hiring and employment practices; the 1965 Voting Rights Act prohibited any race/ethnicity-based discrimination in allowing minorities to vote; in 1965 Congress passed the Immigration Act which removed national quota systems permitting an influx of immigrants from Mexico, Latin American, and Asia; and in 1968 the Fair Housing Act was passed prohibiting any race/ethnicity-based discrimination in housing. These signaled a change in the way in which the U.S. saw itself, and although this decision and these acts did not overcome all forms of discrimination, they were, nonetheless, and indication that America would not longer think of itself as a racist society. 237 238 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 79 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Overcoming Discrimination in America—1808-2000 1808—Importation of slaves banned in the U.S. 1863—Emancipation Proclamation signed 1865—13th Amendment ratified; abolished slavery 1868—14th Amendment ratified; established due process and equal protection to all citizens including former slaves 1870—15th Amendment ratified; voting rights for former slaves established 1905—The Niagara Movement the beginnings of the NAACP 1952—McCarran-Walter Act permitted Asians to become US citizens; overturned Asian exclusionary acts 1954—Brown v. Board of Education of Topeka declared that segregation was inherently discriminatory and unconstitutional 1964—Civil Rights Act prohibited any race/ethnicity-based discrimination in hiring and employment practices 1964—24th Amendment ratified; outlawed poll taxes 1965—Voting Rights Act prohibited any race/ethnicity-based discrimination in allowing minorities to vote 1965—Immigration Act removed national quota systems permitting an influx of immigrants from Mexico Latin American and Asia 1968—Fair Housing Act prohibited any race/ethnicity-based discrimination in housing 1980s—Congress issues an apology and grants reparations to those effected by Korematsu 1990s—President Clinton offers apologies and reparations to victims of the Tuskegee experiment 1995—Mississippi ratifies constitutional amendment abolishing slavery 2000—South Carolina removes the Confederate Flag from flying over the capitol dome 2008—Barack Obama elected 44th President of the United States of America Robert Merton developed a Typology of Prejudice and Discrimination (Bigotry) in which he wrote that, when it comes to racism, there are four kinds of people. The all-weather liberal is not prejudiced, does not discriminate, and tends to remain firm in her/his convictions over time. The fair-weather liberal although not prejudiced, does engage in discriminatory behavior. Since prejudice is an attitude and discrimination is a behavior the fair-weather liberal is dangerous because, in order to overcome the cognitive dissonance which exists due to the incompatibility of behavior and attitude, some change must take place, and this change is almost always in the direction of becoming deeply prejudiced, because our behavior changes our attitudes! The fair-weather bigot is prejudiced but does not discriminate, and the all-weather bigot is prejudiced does discriminate and probably joins hate groups. 239 Robert Merton’s Typology of Bigotry (Prejudice and Discrimination) Prejudiced Discriminates Type Yes No Yes No All-Weather Liberal X X Fair-Weather Liberal X X Fair-Weather Bigot X X All-Weather Bigot X X There are a great many theories concerning the causes of racism and attempting to explain prejudice and discrimination. In general they all boil down to a very few concepts: ethnocentrism which is the tendency to evaluate the customs and practices of other groups through the prism of one’s own culture; we tend to like people who are most like us; we judge people based on our own values; and stereotypes which are exaggerated claims of what are believed to be the essential characteristics of a group. 240 Whatever the causes, Thomas’s Theorem—that which is perceived to be real is real in its consequences—is a screaming indictment of letting our belief patterns run away with our critical thinking skills. What stereotypes do you have? What are some of the stereotypes about your own racial/ethnic group? How do you feel about those stereotypes? Why do stereotypes last over time? Why doesn’t reality change our perceptions? America is the most racially and religiously diverse nation in the world, and yet, we tend to build instant stereotypes about new immigrant groups and hold on to those about older groups. Is America a melting pot or a lumpy stew/tossed salad? America is a nation of immigrants. With the exception of Native Americans, we all have immigrant ancestors, or are, ourselves, immigrants. Assimilation is the process by which a racial or ethnic minority loses its distinctive identity and lifeways and conforms to the cultural patterns of the dominant group. Cultural assimilation is assimilation of values, behaviors, beliefs, language, clothing styles, religious practices, and foods, while structural assimilation is about social interaction. Primary structural assimilation occurs when different racial/ethnic groups belong to the same clubs, live in the same neighborhoods, form friendships, and inter-marry. Secondary structural assimilation concerns parity in access to and accumulation of the goods of society (wealth, power, and status) which is measured by SES and political SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 80 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved power—it is becoming middle class or above. The traditional American assimilation pattern is that white ethnics, Asians, Cubans, and non-Mexican Hispanics, by the third generation, (third generation Americans are those people whose grandparents were foreign-born), have assimilated both culturally and structurally. However, Mexicans, Puerto Ricans, and African Americans do not follow this traditional pattern which differs due to propinquity and coercion. 241 There have been, throughout our history, many times when one’s ancestry, country of origin, method of migration, or religion marked one as being so different from “real” Americans that discrimination, both de jure 242 and de facto, 243 was the order of the day. How well people fit into whatever the dominant culture values as normative is often a key to their position in the stratification hierarchy. When immigrant populations are taken into account the dominant culture attempts to force new immigrants to assimilate—become thoroughly Americanized—as quickly as possible. Assimilation is the process by which a racial or ethnic minority loses its distinctive identity and lifeways and conforms to the cultural patterns of the dominant group. It is submerging one’s self into the melting pot of American society. There are two kinds of assimilation cultural and structural. Cultural assimilation concerns values, behaviors, beliefs, language, clothing styles, religious practices, and foods; whereas structural assimilation concerns social interaction in clubs, neighborhoods, friendship, marriage (primary structural assimilation), and parity in access to and accumulation of the goods of society (wealth power and status) measured by SES and political power (secondary structural assimilation). There are certain patterns of primary and secondary structural assimilation (hereinafter referred to by the term assimilation) into American culture that differ based on race and ethnicity but before discussing those patterns an explanation of terminology is necessary. First generation Americans are those people who are foreign-born; second generation Americans are the children of foreign-born parents; and third generation Americans are the grandchildren of the foreign-born. For white ethnics (primarily Southern and Eastern Europeans, although arguably anyone who is not one of the primary racial or ethnic minority groups such as Arabs, Asians, blacks, Hispanics, American Indians could be considered a white ethnic), Asians, Cubans, South American, and other non-Mexican Hispanics, assimilation follows a fairly traditional pattern even though some prejudice and discrimination may continue to exist. First generation white ethnic Americans, although the vast majority learn and speak English, tend to maintain their native language in their own homes, to keep many of their traditional religious and holiday customs, retain native styles of dress and food preferences, marry among themselves (endogamous marriage), and live near others from their homeland. Second generation white ethnic Americans generally lose much of the language of their parents, drift away from traditional religious and holiday customs, let go of native styles of dress and food preferences in favor of more Americanstyle clothing and food, marry outside their parents’ ethnic group, and move into neighborhoods that are ethnically mixed. By the third generation, most white ethnics have become thoroughly Americanized and have failed to learn all but a very few words of their grandparents language, found meaningless many of the traditional religious and holiday customs, and have adopted American customs (turkey instead of lasagna for Christmas dinner) instead, wear American-style clothing exclusively, eat fast food, marry outside their ethnic group (in fact third generation white ethnic Americans usually do not even consider the ethnic background of those they marry) and live in such ethnically-mixed communities that, except for the generalized whiteness, there is no consideration of the ethnic backgrounds of their neighbors. Moreover, by the third generation, most white ethnics enjoy relatively high levels of structural assimilation. 244 Some of this ease of both cultural and structural assimilation is based on the migration patterns of white ethnics. Although many white ethnics have come to America because they perceive it to be a land of economic and political freedom and opportunity, many have been driven from their homelands by border wars, internal ethnic conflict, economic uncertainty or collapse lack of educational opportunities, less political freedom, and myriad other reasons. The primary push factors—those conditions which impel people to emigrate from their native lands and immigrate to a new and unknown country—are political and economic, and, as one might guess, the primary pull factors—those real or perceived conditions in the new country which beckon to those on foreign shores moving people to emigrate from the countries of their birth—are also political and economic. Regardless of the push or pull factors, white ethnics are voluntary migrants to America choosing to migrate, sometimes at great personal risk, because they choose to migrate; a migration pattern that Sociologists call voluntary migration. Although many white ethnic groups—Jews, Irish, and Italians 245 particularly—have experienced greater or lesser degrees of discrimination, complete assimilation by the third generation is the rule. However, that assimilation was often accomplished with the help of others. While white ethnics, Cubans, Asians, non-Mexican Hispanics, and Arabs follow the traditional assimilation pattern, three significantly large minorities do not: Mexicans (about 50%), Puerto Ricans, and African Americans. The assimilation patterns for these groups differ due to propinquity, method of immigration, and let us not mince words, racism. Approximately 50% of all Mexican immigrants to the United States do not follow the traditional assimilation pattern. This is partly due to the propinquity of the mother country, the nearly continuous new migration stream, a relatively high rate of return migration, racism, and in some cases, involuntary immigration in that parts of Mexico have been annexed by the United States so that some people’s native land quite literally changed overnight they went to bed Mexican and woke up American. 246 247 Puerto Ricans, following the treaty that concluded the Spanish American War, became citizens of the Untied States albeit citizens without suffrage. Therefore, Puerto Ricans who are already citizens have little incentive to assimilate and, like their Mexican counterparts, are physically close to their homeland, maintain a nearly continuous migration stream onto the mainland, and have a relatively high rate of return migration. Puerto Rico is a desperately poor country populated primarily by Spanishspeaking Hispanic-surnamed descendants of African slaves. Thus, entrenched intergenerational poverty coupled with language difficulties and racism have prevented assimilation. Most Puerto Ricans who live on the mainland live in poor inner city SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 81 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved neighborhoods in New York and Chicago. Neighborhoods that are not ethnic enclaves but are rather huge concentrations of the poor poorly educated and black underclass. 248 African Americans differ dramatically from all other migrants. Many, probably most, African Americans have been Americans far longer than most whites. Many African Americans can trace their ancestry back more than seven generations. Those ancestors however were involuntary immigrants who were stolen from their homes, thrown into the bellies of slave ships, and brought to these shores as pieces of property—chattel—to work for the rest of their lives and for the rest of the lives of all their descendants in involuntary servitude as the slaves of white masters. No other people have involuntarily migrated to America. No other people have been treated as property. No other people have suffered 300 years of slavery. No other people have been so vilely used, abused, mistreated, maltreated, and battered physically, emotionally, intellectually, and spiritually. It was not until the late 1860s that blacks were granted Constitutional rights in the United States and it was not until 1953, and then again in the middle 1960s, that real civil rights were finally established for African Americans. Until that time African Americans were second-class people who were often denied their political citizenship by being denied suffrage. Therefore, the opportunity for traditional assimilation for African Americans has not existed until very recently. Given the traditional assimilation pattern, African Americans for all practical purposes, are only second generation Americans regardless of how far back they can trace their actual ancestry in America. 249 Sources of Immigration by Time Period and Country of Origin, in Percent of Total 1800-1860 1860-1900 1920-1960 Source % Source % Source % Germany 28 Latin America 35 Asia 27 England/Scotland 18 Germany 15 Caribbean 16 Ireland 15 Italy 9 Western and Southern Europe 16 Scandinavia 11 England/Scotland 8 Mexico 14 Central Europe 10 Western and Southern Europe 15 Other Latin America 10 Italy 8 Asia 4 England/Scotland 5 Eastern Europe 6 Others 3 Central and Eastern Europe 5 Northwestern Europe 4 Canada 5 The above chart shows the dramatic differences in the sources of immigration (and the sources of the wonderful diversity of the US) over the one hundred year period from 1860 to 1960. The most recent immigration data shows that more and more people from Africa, Asia, the Caribbean, Latin America, and the Pacific islands and fewer and fewer people from Europe are coming to these shores to take part in the American dream. However, as with many aspects of society, there are consequences of racism. One consequence is expulsion which is the removal of a minority group from inside national boundaries to outside national boundaries. Some examples of expulsion are the “Trail of Tears,” the pogroms carried out against the Jews by Russian, Ukrainian, and Polish Cossacks, and the “alien” relocation of more than 120,000 Japanese-Americans during WW II. Genocide, however, is the most egregious and monstrous example of racism. According to “The United Nations 1948 Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide, Genocide [is defined] as: Any of the following acts committed with intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnical, racial, or religious group, as such: A. Killing members of the group; B. Causing serious bodily harm or mental harm to members of the group; C. Deliberately inflicting on the group the conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction, in whole or in part; D. Imposing measures intended to prevent births within the group; E. Forcibly transferring children of the group to another group” 250 Social critic, author, philosopher, and Nobel Peace Prize winner Elie Wiesel, has argued that the 20th century is the most genocidal century in the history of humankind, with 174 million non-combatants dead. Perhaps the genocide of the 20th century really had its beginnings in the 19th century when King Leopold II of Belgium personally owned all of Central Africa—the Congo! From 1880 until 1920, more than 20 million Congolese natives had been murdered by the Belgian soldiers loyal to Leopold. It is unknown how many millions were maimed in a deliberate terror campaign that left entire villages—every man, woman, and child—without hands, or arms, or legs. All this wanton destruction of human life and human productivity occurred because Leopold believed the native slave labor was not sufficiently productive and was not making him rich enough. In 40 years, half of the population of the Congo was murdered! 251 Many estimates give the number of 20th century victims of genocidal violence at 174 million dead. 252 This would be as if the entire population of the 15 most populous states in the US were to be killed. So that California, Texas, New York, Florida, Illinois, Pennsylvania, Ohio, Michigan, Georgia, New Jersey, Virginia, Massachusetts, Maryland, and Minnesota would cease to exist. “The 174 million murdered by government [between] 1900 and 1990 would, [if laid head to toe] circle the earth four times.” 253 In 1915, under the orders of Mehmed Talaat the Turkish Minister of the Interior, the Muslim Turkish army crossed the borders it shares with Christian Armenia. Within a year, 1.5 million Armenians who had been forced out of their homes were SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 82 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved dead, many of starvation. While the Armenian refugees were forced to flee in vast numbers, the Turkish government sanctioned hanging in order to engender terror. The Turkish government also stole or destroyed crops and food stuffs so that starvation became the primary way of death. 254 In the Soviet Union Gulags, between 1917and 1977, 62 million people are thought to have been murdered. The Gulags were prison camps for political dissidents in the Soviet Union. Under Stalin’s rule, the Gulags were filled to capacity and new ones had to be built continuously to accommodate the vast numbers of people who were purged from the body politic. The vast majority of those sent to the Gulags were political prisoners. The barracks were large but poorly made—even though winters in Siberia are brutally cold, many buildings had no sides. Prisoners were used as slave labor which included digging post holes in almost-frozen ground in early winter, and building new rail lines for more prisoners. Prisoners often built their own barracks, often being forced to use extremely shoddy material. If the bad food or starvation diet, lack of medical care, dangerous work, and brutal beatings didn’t kill the prisoners, sometimes the weather did: many prisoners froze to death. The only headstones for the graveyards where most prisoners ended up were rough wooden posts made by the friends of those who had died. In 1923, a large white mob invaded and burned to the ground the large African American suburb in Tulsa, Oklahoma. No white perpetrator was arrested, although millions of dollars in property was destroyed and an unknown number of lives were lost. The local newspapers blamed the blacks for provoking the violence. In fact, many blacks were arrested or held during the conflagration. The smoke rising into the air from the fires covered a huge geographical area: in one photograph from the time, the caption reads “Little Africa burns.” African Americans were rounded up and arrested or held while their neighborhoods burned. Even the elderly were not spared, one photo in a Tulsa newspaper of the time shows an elderly man standing in the midst of a pile of burnt rubble in what used to be his house. Where homes once stood, there is only devastation. African Americans who gathered to try to stop the fires were arrested and marched down the streets. Many of the photographs bear an eerie resemblance to scenes of bombed towns and villages in World Wars I and II. Even God wasn’t immune from the violence and destruction; one photograph shows a large African American church burning. The mob carried, and used, weapons in order to make sure that no one would interfere and forcibly removed African Americans from their homes. In January 1923, a white mob in east-central Florida, enraged by unfounded rumors of the attack on a white woman by a black man, assaulted the small, all-African American community of Rosewood, killed 8, and, as in Tulsa, burned the entire town to the ground. The night before the raid on Roseville a Ku Klux Klan rally was held just outside of the nearby white town. The neighborhoods of Rosewood lay in smoldering ruins and the white mob spared nothing, not even the shacks of poor sharecroppers. When we think of genocide in the 20th century, the Holocaust is our model of its evil. In the 12 years of Nazi rule from 1933-1945, nearly 20 million non-combatants were killed—14 million in the camps, where six to seven million Jews were murdered, and six to seven million others including Muslims, Latvians, Estonians, Gypsies, Homosexuals, Communists, and Poles were also among the slaughtered. The gate to Auschwitz, one of the most heinous of all the death camps, had a sign that “greeted” new arrivals—the sign read, Arbeit Macht Frei, “Work will make you free!” As many as 100,000 prisoners a day met their deaths in the showers that were filled with Zyklon B, a deadly gas. The ovens were used to burn the remains. After D-Day however, the ovens were sometimes used to burn people alive. Many of the ovens used to cremate both the living and the dead were manufactured by firms who made ovens for commercial bakeries. The Warsaw Ghetto, home to Polish Jews for centuries, was a battle ground where Jews tried to hide, to protect each other, and to resist Nazi domination. Even though not all the Jews had been removed, the ghetto was eventually burned to the ground. One night in November 1938, military men, SS officers, and mobs of thugs attacked the Jewish sections of many Eastern European cities. For hours they walked through the streets breaking all the glass in every building they passed. Jews all over the world remember that night as Kristallnacht—the Night of Broken Glass—and on the anniversary of that event, Jews gather together to pledge their eternal vigilance and resistance to such terror ever again occurring. On Kristallnacht, a synagogue burned to the ground, while firefighters and neighbors stood by and watched. German-Jewish children were singled out for humiliation in their schools. Children were also victims of the Nazi “medical experiments” at Auschwitz and other death camps. One photograph shows children who have been burned deliberately. The socalled medical experiments of the Nazis, such as the amputations and mutilations shown in one photo, were thinly veiled torture conducted without anesthetic. The Nazis didn’t confine their murders only to those they had imprisoned in the camps. One photo shows Russian civilians who were forced to dig the trench into which their bodies fell when shot by German soldiers. There were thousands of bodies found in mass graves all over Europe after the war, but one of the sites of such atrocities was Babi Yar in the Soviet Union where 30,000 non-combatants were slain in two terrible days, September 28-29, 1941. Many bodies of the dead at places like Dachau death camp were thrown into a heap like badly stacked cord wood. Hundreds of starving prisoners were found by the Allied forces at the liberation of the concentration and death camps. So that they could maintain order and efficiency, the Nazis tattooed on the arm everyone in the camps. These tattoo numbers were entered into the extensive files that the Nazis kept. Holocaust victims were often forced to dig their own graves. Sometimes, however, there was no one left alive to bury the dead who were thrown by their murderers into the pits that the victims themselves had dug. The photo shows bodies thrown into an open pit at Auschwitz shortly before the allied troops arrived. Although there is still a great deal of controversy surrounding the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki, what remains an incontrovertible truth is that the United States of America is the only nation on the face SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 83 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved of the earth to ever use nuclear weapons against human beings. The Enola Gay, named after the mother of the pilot, dropped the first of only two nuclear weapons ever used against human beings. It was the first time in human history that a weapon of mass destruction was used. The United States government argued that it was necessary to use such a weapon in order to end WW II. Many historians agree with that assessment. However, many, including Albert Einstein whose work led to the creation of the ABomb, and J. Robert Oppenheimer, who was responsible for building the A-Bomb, did not agree and spent the remainder of their lives after Hiroshima trying to halt nuclear proliferation. On August 6, 1945, the B-29 Enola Gay, dropped an A-Bomb on Hiroshima, Japan. Three days later, on August 9, 1945, Commander Bock, in his B-29 nicknamed “Bock’s Car” dropped the second A-Bomb on Nagasaki, Japan. The living fell dead in their tracks. Four square miles of the city of Hiroshima were virtually obliterated in a matter of minutes. The eerie shell of one large, domed structure was the only thing to remain standing after the bomb fell on Hiroshima. The center of Hiroshima, which was the target, was populated by non-combatant civilians. Those who survived the blast were horribly burned and maimed. Makeshift hospitals were set up in the outskirts of the city in order to care for the survivors, many of whom died from their burns or from radiation sickness within days or weeks of the bombing. There was no reconstructive surgery and the burn victims were often hideously scarred for life. The medical, emergency, and educational infrastructure was destroyed in the bombing. One photo from after the bombing shows a badly scarred and deformed child getting lessons in the ruins of a school. Cambodia is still known as the killing fields, which is a reference to the murder of 2 million Cambodians (25% of the population) by the Communist insurgent paramilitary group known as the Khmer Rouge, which was led by Pol Pot, from 19751979. Mass graves scarred the earth over all of Cambodia. The massacred men, women and children were tossed in pits that were only loosely covered with soil. Within months, erosion due to monsoonal rains and winds caused the bones of the dead to rise to the surface littering the ground with the skeletal remains of the victims. The bones were gathered up and stored in sheds and warehouses. Children often gather the bones that litter the earth, the bones of their ancestors—sometimes the bones of their parents, grandparents or siblings. 255 Throughout its more than 400 year history, South Africa has been a nation separated by color. The dominant white group, descended from Dutch and later British settlers, comprised only 10 % of the population but controlled the economy, the government, the military and police, the educational system, and all internal and external commerce. Although it had existed in fact for more than two hundred years, the rigid, caste-like system of racial segregation known as Apartheid was begun officially in the late 19th century. It gained strength and popular support in the 1920s and 1930s when internal passports were required of all non-whites who were forced to live in “black” or “colored” townships such as Soweto which were called ironically, “homelands,” but were, in fact, little more than shanty towns populated by poor blacks. An unknown number of black South Africans were murdered by their government between 1930 and the early 1990s. Garbage dumps are seldom, if ever, built in affluent communities. Environmental racism exists all over the world. The waste of the world, toxic and non-toxic, is dumped near the neighborhoods of the poor. Soweto was no exception, it dumped its own refuse and the refuse of all-white Johannesburg in its own back yard. Metal and wood scraps are usually scrounged to build houses. A typical Soweto house was a makeshift shanty. Some “affluent” blacks, physicians, lawyers, educators, and merchants who managed, against all odds, to attend universities in Europe, lived in brick houses. However, affluence is relative and the bricks and mortar for their houses was usually scrounged also. Open cooking fires often led to large portions of Soweto erupting in flames. Because there was no fire department, bucket brigades were used to try to contain the conflagration. Sometimes, however, the fires were set deliberately by dissidents or by white soldiers acting on official orders. The vast majority of houses in Soweto had no electricity, running water, plumbing, natural gas, telephones or any of the utilities that white South Africans not only took for granted but felt entitled to—much as we do in America. However, children, even in places liked Soweto, exhibit an enormous exuberance and joy of living even though the perimeter of Soweto and all the other homelands was fenced and gated. Traditional celebrations, with people dressed in traditional, ethnic/tribal clothing, are a method of identity maintenance and social cohesion in the midst of anomie—conditions of social chaos. Maintaining traditions is also a social critique that indicates resistance toward oppression. Maintenance of peoplehood is helpful in overcoming depression and alienation. In a military coup in 1979, dictator Idi Amin became the ruler of the central African nation of Uganda. Rich in minerals, timber, oil, and other natural resources, Uganda had been systematically exploited by foreign governments and multi-national corporations for most of the 20th century. Because many Ugandans protested against the coup and the dictatorship of Amin, soldiers loyal to Amin, at Amin’s behest, began a systematic slaughter of dissidents resulting in 300,000 deaths. There are few internet-based photographs available of the horrors that took place in Uganda under the vicious, dictatorial rule of Idi Amin, which lasted until he was forcibly removed from power in 1987. As in Cambodia, piles of human skulls and bones are the only physical indications of the slaughter. The sheer ubiquity of the bones of the dead is shockingly evident in this photo of the toddler and the skull. 256 In a terrible ethnic war in the central African nation of Rwanda (1994-1996), more than 600,000 were killed in only the first three months; many hacked to death by machetes. Besides those slaughtered, nearly a million people were forced from their homes and into enormous, unsanitary refugee camps across the border. These camps had no running water, no toilets, no cooking facilities, and little to no food. Many people starved to death, many others succumbed during a particularly virulent outbreak of cholera, an already virulent disease in which the victim vomits and defecates blood for several days until they die of dehydration SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 84 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved and shock. Sometimes cholera evidences symptoms similar to hemorrhagic fevers in which the victims bleed from every orifice in the body. Cholera epidemics have killed untold millions during the history of the world. Fleeing refugees pass bodies of their fellow citizens along the roadside. During times of great fear, people often seek solace, sanctuary, and community in houses of worship, but evil respects no boundaries—more than one massacre took place in Christian churches during worship services. Children orphaned because of the mass murder often do not survive. The majority of parentless children starved to death. 257 “Ethnic Cleansing” can mean nothing less than genocide. From 1997 to 1998, the Christians of Bosnia and Kosovo engaged in a struggle to annihilate the Muslim population of this remnant of the former country of Yugoslavia. United Nations and American military forces are still in the Balkans attempting to prevent any further bloodshed. Half a million people were killed, tens of thousands of women were raped, and the leader of the Serbian government who authorized the slaughter is awaiting an oft-postponed trial in The Hague for crimes against humanity. Meanwhile, other Serbian leaders are still at large. Refugees have been reduced to an uncertain future. Refugees often find themselves living in conditions that would have seemed normal to a 13th or 14th century peasant. Where would you go if forced from your home with only what you could carry? What would you take with you? How would you live? How would you feed and shelter your family? Refugees are not welcome by other nations— they suck up resources while putting nothing back into the economy. In the 20th century, the United Nations has often had to persuade governments to accept refugees and has had to control the refugee camps. Non-governmental organizations (called NGOs) like the Red Cross and Red Crescent societies and Doctors without Borders supply needed aid to both refugees and host nations in times of crisis. It is easier in some ways for modern day peasants to survive as refugees, because they are more accustomed to certain levels of privation than technologically sophisticated, highly educated, urbanites. Refugees often walk for tens if not hundreds of miles to reach safety, crowding roads with masses of fleeing humanity. 258 The more than 10 million Kurds in the Middle East, are the largest ethnic group in the world without a country to call their own. Many Kurds resided for many years in Northern Iraq. During and shortly after the first Gulf War, Saddam Hussein turned his biological weapons on Kurdish villages, so that, between 1987 and 1999 he had succeeded in killing half a million and sending 1 million into exile. What will become of the Kurds in the aftermath of the 2003 war against Iraq remains to be seen. Where do one million homeless, unwanted, forcibly exiled people go? They have only as much food, fuel, medicine, shelter, and clothing as they can carry. Photos show Iraqi Kurds trying to cross the border into Iran. The young, the old, the healthy, the sick, the rich, the poor—everyone must flee, on foot, from the threat of torture and death. Some will die along the way, some will starve, but some will survive. Is this a recipe for rage? Will these refugees one day come back as guerilla insurgents or as an army of revolution, doing to their persecutors what had been done to them? Does mass violence create more mass violence? It is always the most vulnerable members of any society that suffer the most during times of social upheaval. Children, the elderly, and the sick are the least likely to survive as refugees. The dead must be buried along the way, but how do you find the grave later? Where do bury a child who dies while you are escaping from the monsters who want to kill all of you? 259 From 1500 to 1850, a period of 350 years, between 10 and 15 million Africans were landed in chains in the New World, and 4 to 6 million more are thought to have died during their capture or the Atlantic crossing—a total of between 14 and 21 million people. Some scholars think the Slave Trade may have cost as many as 200 million lives and there are many scholars today in both the United States, South America, the Caribbean, and East Africa who are attempting to unearth centuries old data concerning the slave trade. Whatever they find, it is all too clear that the consequences of racism is death! Name Genocidal Monsters and Their Crimes 260 Country Where Genocide Occurred Dates Numbered Murdered King Leopold II of Belgium Congo 1880-1920 20 Million Mehmed Talaat Armenia 1915 1.5 Million Adolph Hitler Europe 1933-1945 20 Million Mao Tse Tung China and Mongolia 1947-1973 35 Million Josef Stalin USSR (Russia) 1927-1977 62 Million Pol Pot Cambodia 1975-1979 2 Million Idi Amin Uganda 1979-1987 300,000 Slobodan Milosevic Serbia/Kosovo/Bosnia 1997-1998 500,00 Saddam Hussein Iraq 1987-1999 1.5 Million However, acts of monstrous evil are sometimes offset by a few of the heroic human beings who resisted and stood up to evil in their own lands in their own times—people who had the courage to speak truth to power! Mahatma Gandhi’s non-violent civil disobedience against the British Raj in India fueled the fires of human rights campaigns across the world. Fifty years after his assassination, Gandhi is still revered for his intellectual strength, moral courage, and indomitable will. From Oskar Schindler’s heroic attempt to save Jews from the death camps, Steven Spielberg made the award winning film, Schindler’s List. When the Nazis decreed that all Swedish Jews were to wear yellow stars on their clothes, King Gustav V of Sweden, the next day, appeared in full dress regalia, mounted on a horse and riding through the streets of the capital with a yellow star on his uniform. Cesar Chavez founded the United Farm Workers Union in order to address the egregious exploitation of migrant laborers. Bishop Desmond Tutu, a Nobel Peace Prize Laureate, spent much of his life in segregated South Africa calling for the dismantling of the Apartheid system. Nelson Mandela, the South African anti-Apartheid activist became the first black to be freely elected to the Presidency in the country where he had spent most of his adult life as a political prisoner on Robbyn Island. The courageous Rosa SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 85 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Parks was not solely responsible for the Civil Rights Movement, but she was the catalyst for the events that followed her 1953 refusal to “move to the back of the bus.” Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr., one of the best known leaders of the American Civil Rights Movement because of his non-violent civil disobedience, gave a famous speech in Washington, D.C. in which he said “I have a dream . . . that someday, my little children will be judged not by the color of their skin, but the content of their character.” Perhaps the courage of these people and others like them will give us all the bravery needed to stop such horrors from happening again in this, our world. 261 By 2050, the United States will be a Minority-Majority country—California is already a minority-majority state, and Houston is a minority-majority city which means that there are numerically more minority group members than dominant group members. Since Hispanics are the fastest growing minority group in the U.S., who will have the POWER (political, social, economic) when there are numerically more minorities than whites? Why? What is the basis of POWER? Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIC—Stratification by Race and Ethnicity “The problem of the 20th century is the problem of the color line”…91 “You’ve Got To Be Carefully Taught.”…92 1964 Civil Rights Act…92 1965 Voting Rights Act…92 alien” relocation…95 apartheid…92 ascribed (unearned and socially defined) master status…91 ascribed master status…91 Assimilation…93 Brown v. Board of Education of Topeka…92 categorical ideas…91 cognitive dissonance…93 concentration camps…92 consequences of racism…95 Cultural assimilation…93 de facto…92 De facto discrimination…92 de jure…92 de jure discrimination…92 direct personal discrimination…92 discrimination…92 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 86 Discrimination is a behavior…92 dominant group…91 Dred Scott Decision…90 Dworkin and Dworkin…92 Erving Goffman…92 essential characteristics of groups…91 Ethnicity…91 ethnicity is selfdefined…91 ethnocentrism…93 ethnophaulisms…92 expulsion…95 Fair Housing Act…92 First generation Americans…94 four qualities of minority groups: 1) identifiability 2) differential power 3) differential and pejorative treatment 4) group awareness…92 Genocidal Monsters and Their Crimes…98 Genocide…95 Gordon W. Allport…90 Hispanics…99 immigrants…93 Immigration Act…92 indirect institutional discrimination…92 Jim Crow laws…92 Korematsu Decision…90 laws of association…90 literacy tests…91 majority status is unmarked or unstigmatized…91 McCarran-Walter Act…92 mental categories…91 minority group…91 minority status…92 Minority-Majority…99 patterns of primary and secondary structural assimilation…90–100 Plessy v. Ferguson…90 pogroms…95 Poll taxes…91 POWER…99 prejudice…92 Prejudice is an attitude…92 Primary structural assimilation…93 Race…91 race is defined by others…91 Racism…91, 92 Robert Merton…93 Robert Merton’s Typology of Bigotry (Prejudice and Discrimination)…93 Rosenblum and Travis…91, 92 second generation Americans…94 Secondary structural assimilation…93 social construct…91 socially and not numerically defined…92 species…91 stigmatized…92 structural discrimination…92 superficial physical differences…91 that which is perceived to be real is real in its consequences…92 third generation Americans…94 Thomas’s Theorem…92 Thomas’s Theorem, which states that things perceived to be real are real in their consequences…91 Thomas’s Theorem— that which is perceived to be real is real in its consequences…93 traditional American assimilation pattern…93 Trail of Tears…92, 95 tribal stigma…92 two types of discrimination…92 Typology of Prejudice and Discrimination (Bigotry)…93 ultimate in-group…91 W.E.B. DuBois…91 white ethnics…94 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Module IIID—Stratification by Sex and Gender Sex is based on biological differences and physical differences between males and females, while gender is the social expectations associated with one’s sex. Although men and women seem to be physically more alike than different most of our medical and biological data has come from the studies conducted on the male of the species, and medical scientists and biologists have recently learned that there is a significant difference between the brains of males and females—females show greater intelligence, greater capacity to form and maintain enduring relationships, greater ability to create ongoing cooperation and consensus among groups than males. It has only been in the last 25 years or so that the medical profession and other researchers have begun to examine females for models of female health and disease. Sexism, the ideology that one sex is inherently inferior to the other, supports the differential and unequal treatment of individuals (primarily women) based on ascribed characteristics (such as being female), is, in part, responsible for the lack of data on women’s bodies and women’s health issues. 262 Sexism is as old as humankind. As far as we know, there has never been a society in which women have had the political and economic power over their society. It really is a man’s world, because men are the dominant group across the globe. Modern feminism, which is an attempt to overcome the worst aspects of male domination, has a hundred year history in the United States beginning with such women as Elizabeth Cady Stanton, and Susan B. Anthony. In 1898, Charlotte Perkins Gilman (1860-1935) wrote Women and Economics in which she reasoned that women are the only creatures who are totally economically dependent upon the male of the species, and that so long as this condition continued to exist, our American society would stagnate. Gilman also wrote the famous short story “The Yellow Wallpaper” about a woman treated like an object who becomes an object. “She Walketh Veiled and Sleeping,” her best-loved poem, is an indictment of the condition of woman who have been kept emotionally, intellectually, and economically “asleep” by the male-dominated patriarchy. “She walketh veiled and sleeping / For she knoweth not her power; / She obeyeth but the pleading / Of her heart, and the high leading / of her soul, unto this hour. / Slow advancing, halting, creeping / Comes the Woman to the hour!— / She walketh veiled and sleeping, / For she knoweth not her power.” 263 Feminism, which is an ideology aimed at eliminating patriarchy in support of equality between the sexes has been highly controversial in recent years. It has been linked to the destruction of the family, and there are some conservative social critics who believe that traditional roles for women are necessary in order to maintain social stability. 264 Traditional mainstream feminism, however, is concerned with equality in all aspects of life such as equal pay for equal work; affordable, safe, competent day care; elimination of sexual harassment; tougher rape laws; tougher child abuse laws; tougher domestic violence laws; medical coverage for families; the family leave act; abortion rights; single parent adoption; and increased funding for shelters, among other things. However, when most people think of feminism today, they tend to think of the kind of radical lesbian feminism propounded by activist-writers such as Mary Daly who teaches Feminist Ethics at conservative, Roman Catholic Boston College. Daly’s most well known book is Gyn/Ecology: The Metaethics of Radical Feminism. In this 1978 volume, Daly discusses in detail the sexism that has caused women to be second-class citizens or even non-citizens in many parts of the world today (women in Kuwait, ten years after the Gulf War, are still not allowed to vote). The Table of Contents of this book is a striking example of historical sexism around the world. Topics such as Indian sutee or the immolation of widows on the funeral pyres of their dead husbands; Chinese footbinding which actually broke the bones and rotted the flesh of little girls for hundreds of years; and the European witch burnings of the 15th through 17th centuries which resulted in the deaths of over 9 million people, mostly women, are all egregious examples of the consequences of patriarchal sexism. Radical feminists believe that traditional gender roles do not address the needs of society. Gender refers to a cultural understanding of what constitutes masculinity and femininity in any society. Gender roles are the social and cultural expectations that are associated with a person’s sex and are learned during the socialization process. Gender is social differentiation based on sex. Masculinity, as a gender differentiation, refers to attributes traditionally considered appropriate for males such as aggression, athleticism, high levels of physical activity, logical thinking, dominance in interpersonal relationships; whereas femininity as a gender differentiation, refers to attributes traditionally associated with behavior appropriate for females such as passivity, docility, fragility, emotionality, and subordination in interpersonal relationships. although many consider gender to be biological, it is not. gender traits are socially determined, they are not innate. Margaret Mead’s classic studies of sexual practices and gender roles among various ethnic groups in New Guinea demonstrated that among the Arapesh both sexes display what Americans would think of as feminine characteristics; among the Mundugumor both sexes display what Americans would think of as masculine characteristics, and among the Tchambuli Mead documented women engaging in gender roles that most Americans would consider masculine, while men engaged in gender roles that most Americans would consider feminine. As with racial and ethnic stereotypes there are also gender stereotypes: men are instrumental or goal oriented while women are expressive or emotional. 265 Consider the following story. One night a man and his young son are driving in the car in a terrible rain storm. It is extremely dark, the father cannot see well enough to drive the car because the rainstorm is so severe. Suddenly, the car stalls on a railroad track just as a freight train is coming. The freight train hits the car and instantly kills the father. The little boy is thrown from the car. The train engineer radios for Life-Flight who transports the child to the nearest trauma center. At the hospital, the little boy is rushed immediately into emergency surgery. The surgeon enters the operating room, looks at the child and says, “I can’t possibly operate on that child, that child is my son.” What, if anything, is wrong with this story? Why? What was your first reaction? Why? SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 87 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Until they are about 4 or 5, small children believe that they can be a boy one day and a girl the next day. By the time they are 5 or 6, however, children understand and accept their gender identity which means acknowledging one’s sex and internalizing the norms, values, and behaviors of the accompanying gender expectations. Cooley’s Looking-Glass Self theory explains to us that our recognition of societally acceptable gender role behavior is an important aspect of socialization. In Western industrial societies, both males and females tend not to exhibit traditional gender role behavior but rather express androgynous characteristics—androgyny is a blending of both masculine and feminine attributes based on emotions and behaviors. 266 Sexual orientation is one’s choice of sex partners and refers to who one desires or is attracted to as a sex partner. Heterosexuality, an ascribed status, is attraction to partners of the opposite sex and is encouraged by most, but not all, societies in order to insure procreation. 267 Homosexuality, an ascribed status, is attraction to partners of the same sex., the word “gay” traditionally refers to homosexual males, and the term “lesbian” traditionally refers to homosexual females. For our purposes, when referring to both sexes we will use the term homosexual, when referring to homosexual males we will use the term gay, and when referring to homosexual females we will use the term lesbian. Although there are many socio-religious, and sociocultural ideas and ideologies concerning homosexuality, consider the following information: about 10% of the population OF THE WORLD is gay; children raised by gay or lesbian parents are no more or less likely than children raised by straight parents to become gay or lesbian; all of our studies show that children raised by gay or lesbian parents are as psychologically normal as children raised by straight parents; studies indicate that there is NO CHOICE—some people are born homosexual just as others are born heterosexual; animals, as well as humans, engage in homosexual activity; homosexuals are less likely than the straight population to be child molesters (over 98% of all child molesters are straight because child sexual molestation is about age fetishes and uncontrolled age-inappropriate sexual desires; gay teenagers are 5 times more likely to commit suicide than straight teenagers. 268 Could you change your sexual orientation? If you are heterosexual, how did you “get that way”? What caused you to become straight? Some of our religious and cultural attitudes are so homophobic—homophobia is hatred and discrimination directed against homosexuals, based on an exaggerated fear of homosexuality 269 —that they cause gay bashing and murders such as the 1998 murder of gay college student Matthew Shephard who was virtually crucified on a barbed-wire fence. The Reverend Pat Robertson of the Christian Coalition has urged people to call on their Congress members to vote against the Hate Crimes Bill. Jerry Falwell of the Moral Majority, the Christian Coalition, and the Southern Baptist Convention have all instituted a boycott of Disney because Disney provides healthcare, insurance, and retirement benefits to domestic partners. Although America is not as seriously sexist as many countries in the world, there are still certain expectations concerning sex-appropriate behavior. The Functionalists argue that gender roles are based on tradition and that the divisions of labor between male and female marriage partners are necessary because dividing household tasks into women’s work and men’s work is functional for society. The Conflict Perspective argues that traditional gender roles prevent women from competing economically with men because men attempt to maintain their sociocultural and socioeconomic power. According to the Symbolic Interactionist perspective, gender roles begin in the family setting where children, through the socialization process, learn what roles are appropriate for girls and boys. 270 Arlie Hochschild and Anne Machung, in their 1989 book The Second Shift wrote “women [working outside the home] averaged three hours a day on housework while men averaged 17 minutes; women spent fifty minutes a day of time exclusively with their children; men spent twelve minutes. On the other side of the coin, fathers who work outside the home watched television an hour longer than their wives, and slept a half hour longer each night.” 271 In other words, and this has not changed since the book was written! World War II began, for the United States, on December 7, 1941, which was a Sunday. By 8:00am the next day, tens of thousands of American men and boys were lined up at their draft boards to enlist and fight the enemy. As the number of men entering the military grew, the number of industrial and factory workers was rapidly depleted. At a time when very high levels of industrial production were required, there was a dearth of men to fill those crucial jobs. The answer to the dwindling industrial workforce was to hire women to do men’s jobs. Tens of thousands of women heeded America’s call, took off their skirts and aprons, put on blue jeans and work shirts and went to work building ships, planes, jeeps, tanks, weapons, and a variety of other industrial products needed by the war effort and by the civilian population. The name given these women was “Rosie the Riveter.” Rosie the Riveter became the symbol of women working in jobs that had traditionally gone to men, but in 1945, when the war ended, the Rosies laid down their rivet guns and welding torches, replaced their blue jeans with skirts and aprons and went home to welcome their men and have babies. By the mid-1960s, these women were beginning to get restless. The most recent modern women’s movement which largely coincided with the Civil Rights Movement of the 1960s had begun and women began to enroll in college, and to enter the workplace in unprecedented numbers. Although these women led the way for all the rest of us, their struggle is not complete. Earnings for the same work or level of work still differ for men and women. 272 Minorities, which for the purpose of this discussion, includes white women and all people of color, earn significantly less for the same work than white men. White women earn about 76 cents for every dollar earned by a white man. Hispanic women, who are the lowest paid of any minority group, earn about 57 cents for every dollar earned by a white man. When adjusting for educational attainment and professional job categories the percentage of difference between the earnings of minorities and white men shrinks but the differences still remain. According to Rosabeth Moss Kanter, separate career ladders for minorities and men create glass walls; while the glass ceiling is created largely due to homosocial reproduction. Minorities (white women and people of color) are severely underrepresented in upper-level corporate positions and the glass-ceiling blocks minorities from being able to climb the corporate ladder to the top—you can see through it, but you can’t get through it. Rosabeth SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 88 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Moss Kanter in her classic study of women’s work and men’s work in one large multinational corporation, Men and Women of the Corporation coined the term homosocial reproduction which means that, since most management level personnel are white and male and since most people want to be around people who are similar to themselves, white males are hired and promoted in greater numbers than white women or people of color. Some of the consequences of sexism, therefore, are economic. 273 But Mary Daly writes of one of the most egregious consequences of sexism. Between two and five million girls in parts of Africa and Southeast Asia are subjected annually to a pre-pubescent rite of passage called female circumcision or, more properly called by the World Health Organization female genital mutilation or FGM. There are various forms of this “procedure” as Daly writes. 1)Sunna Circumcision: removal of the prepuce and /or tip of the clitoris. 2)Excision or Clitoridectomy: excision of the entire clitoris with the labia minora and some or most of the external genitalia. 3)Excision and Infibulation: This means excision of the entire clitoris, labia minora and parts of the labia majora. The two sides of the vulva are then fastened together in some way either by thorns . . . [sic] or sewing with catgut, Alternatively the vulva are scraped raw and the child’s limbs are tied together for several weeks until the wound heals (or she dies). The purpose is to close the vaginal orifice. Only a small opening is left (usually by inserting a slither [sic] of wood) so the urine or later menstrual blood can be passed. It should not be imagined that the horror of the life of an infibulated child/woman ends with this operation. Her legs are tied together, immobilizing her for weeks, during which time excrement remains within the bandage. Sometimes accidents occur during the operation: the bladder may be pierced or the rectum cut open. Sometimes in a spasm of agony the child bites off her tongue. [This “operation” usually occurs in the child’s home, without anesthetic or sterile instruments—sometimes kitchen knives or pieces of broken glass are used are used by the child’s female relatives who perform this torture.] Infections are, needless to say, common. . . .What is certain is that the infibulated girl is mutilated and that she can look forward to a life of repeated encounters with “the little knife”—the instrument of her perpetual torture. For women who are infibulated have to be cut open—either by the husband or by another woman—to permit intercourse. They have to be cut open further for delivery of a child. Often they are sewn up again after delivery, depending upon the decision of the husband. The cutting (defibulation) and re-sewing goes on throughout a woman’s living death of reproductive “life.” Immediate medical results of excision and infibulation include ‘hemorrhage, infections, shock, retention of urine, damage to adjacent tissues, dermoid cysts, abscesses, keloid scarring, coital difficulties [!!!], and infertility cause by chronic pelvic infections.” 274 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 89 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Percent of all Workers Paid Hourly Rates—By Selected Characteristics-1997 Characteristics of Workers At or Below the $5.15 Minimum Wage Total Workers 25+ Male 25 + Female 25+ Total 5.4 3.5 7.4 At 1.8 0.9 2.6 Below 3.7 2.6 4.8 275 Median Hourly Per Cent of Extrapolated Extrapolated Earnings in Minimum Median Annual Dollars Wage Earned Weekly Pre-Tax Pre-Tax Earnings Earnings (40 hour week) (50 weeks) 9.91 11.16 8.83 1.92 2.17 1.71 $396.80 $446.40 $353.20 $19,840 $22,320 $17,660 8.3 2.8 5.5 8.97 1.74 $358.80 $17,940 White 11.7 4.4 7.2 8.06 1.57 $322.40 $16,120 Black 11.2 4.4 6.8 7.61 1.48 $304.40 $15,220 Hispanic 4.7 1.6 3.1 9.82 1.91 $392.80 $19,640 Full Time 21.2 7.3 13.9 6.24 1.21 $187.20 $9,360 Part Time (30 hr/wk) 9.2 3.2 6.1 8.6 1.67 $344.00 $17,200 Private Sector Industries 3.9 1.3 2.5 10.15 1.98 $406.00 $20,300 Goods Producing 10.9 3.7 7.2 7.92 1.54 $316.80 $15,840 Service Producing 5.2 1.5 3.7 10.88 2.11 $435.20 $21,760 Public Sector This table shows that women (as well as racial/ethnic minorities) are more likely to be underpaid than men in general, and white men in particular. Most significantly, women are a full 2.4% more likely to earn less than minimum wage and 1.7% more likely to earn minimum wage than men. Women earn 1.4% less, as a percent of minimum wage earned, than men. Therefore, even among the lowest-level wage earners, sex discrimination in wages exists. The current minimum wage is $5.15 per hour. In constant 1996 dollars, this is worth $5.03 of purchasing power. The 1955 minimum wage of $0.75 per hour, in constant 1996 dollars was worth $4.39 of purchasing power. The current poverty rate, as calculated by the U.S. Government is about $17, 000 for a family of four. 1997 Employment Status of Civilian Non-Institutionalized Population by Race/Ethnicity and Sex 276 Employed Workers Unemployed Workers Total Percent of Total Employment to Unemployed Workers by Workers Not in Population Population Ratio Percent of Labor Force Labor Force by Percent of Population 75 71.3 4.9 25 Male 59.8 56.8 5 40.2 Female 67.5 64.6 4.2 32.5 White 64.7 58.2 10 35.3 Black 67.9 62.6 7.7 32.1 Hispanic This table shows that women (and racial/ethnic minorities) are more likely to be unemployed or not in the labor force. 75% of the male population participates in the labor force compared to 60% for women. Women, overall, are slightly more likely to be unemployed than men, but African Americans are more than two times more likely to be unemployed than whites, and Hispanics are about 1.5 times more likely to be unemployed than whites. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 90 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Wages Earned in Occupational Categories By Sex—1996 277 Weekly Earnings Occupational Category Male Female Difference $852 $616 $0.72 Management & Professionals $567 $394 $0.69 Technical, Sales, Administrative Support $357 $273 $0.76 Services $560 $373 $0.67 Precision Production $422 $307 $0.73 Operators, Fabricators, Laborers $300 $255 $0.85 Farming, Forestry, Fishing This table shows that equal pay for equal worth is still only a dream if not a myth. Women in all occupational categories are paid less than men for the same work. This effects not only women but married-couple families, children, and single-woman headed households. The inability of women to earn equal pay for equal work is a significant economic barrier to single women with children to pull themselves out of poverty simply by getting a job. At the lowest levels of wages, there is greater parity, but even in the lowest paying employment category, women earn 15% less than men for the same work! From 1997 Economic Census, U.S. Census Bureau Comparison of Women-Owned Firms to All U.S. Firms In Constant Terms: 1992 and 1997 278 All Firms Firms with Paid Employees Women-Owned Firms 1997 1992 Percent Change Number of Sales and Number of Firms Receipts Firms Sales and Receipts (in 1,000s) (in $1,000,000s) (in 1,000s) (in $1,000,000s) 7,452 1,642,556 1,684 1,486,133 6,403 1,236,605 1,233 1,135,830 16 33 37 31 Employees (in 1,000s) 14,591 11,411 46 Annual Payroll (in $millions) 300,831 206,466 46 58,901 54,391 8 1,499,298 1,201,880 25 All U.S. Firms 1997 1992 Percent Change 20,440 19,199 6 8,392,001 6,771,182 24 5,027 4,721 23 7,803,882 6,320,826 23 Percent Difference between Women-Owned Businesses and All Businesses: 1997 and 1992 All Firms Firms with Paid Employees Sales and Number of Receipts Number of Firms Firms Sales and Receipts (in Employees Annual Payroll Women-Owned Firms (in 1,000s) $1,000,000s) (in 1,000s) in ($1,000,000s) (in 1,000s) (in $millions) 36.4579% 19.5729% 33.4991% 19.0435% 24.7721% 20.0648% 1997 1992 33.3507% 18.2628% 26.1173% 17.9696% 20.9796% 17.1786% This table shows that women, as a minority, do better as business owners than all other groups but still lag far behind in terms of economic well-being. Although women owned 36% of all US businesses in 1997, they only earned 19.5% of all sales revenue. Women, overall, show significant gains in business ownership, however, these businesses tend to lie largely in the service sector which tend to be operations such as beauty shops, maid services, cosmetic and home decorating firms, which, in general, earn far less revenue than other business categories. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 91 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Sex Comparison of Median Weekly Full Time Earnings by Sex and Race—1996 279 Race Earnings Difference Compared Difference Compared to White Men to White Women $599 —— —— All $580 —— —— White $412 $0.71 $0.96 Black $356 $0.61 $0.83 Hispanic $444 $0.74 —— Females All $428 $0.74 —— White $362 $0.62 $0.85 Black $316 $0.54 $0.74 Hispanic This table shows the dramatic, dollar-per-dollar difference between the median weekly earnings of men and women. Women earn 71 cents for every dollar earned by males. The differences become even more significant when race/ethnicity is taken into account. White women earn 74 cents for every dollar earned by a white man; black women earn 62 cents for every dollar earned by a white man, and Hispanic women, the most poorly paid population sector, only earn 54 cents for every dollar earned by a white man. The earnings of white and racial/ethnic minority women also show significant differences. Black women earn 85 cents for every dollar earned by a white woman, and Hispanic women earn 74 cents for every dollar earned by a white women. The disparities in women’s earning power makes them more vulnerable to economic downturns, divorce, job loss, and illness. Women, overall, are greatly more likely to be poor than men. Males From U.S. Census Bureau No. 216 Educational Attainment by Race/Ethnicity, and Sex 1960-2000 (College Graduate or Higher) by Percent 280 Year All Races White Black Asian Hispanic Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female 9.7 5.8 10.3 6.0 2.8 3.3 --------1960 13.5 8.1 14.4 8.4 4.2 4.6 ----7.8 4.3 1970 20.1 12.8 21.3 13.3 8.4 8.3 ----9.4 6.0 1980 24.4 18.4 25.3 19.0 11.9 10.8 44.9 35.4 9.8 8.7 1990 27.8 23.6 28.5 23.9 16.3 16.7 47.6 40.7 10.7 10.6 2000 This table shows that white males are more likely to than any other group except Asians to graduate from college. This table also shows the dramatic increase in the number of Americans of all races/ethnicities earning college degrees. In 1960 only 9.7% of all American males and only 5.8% of all American females earned college degrees. By 2000, those numbers had increased to 27.8% for males and 23.6% for females. Similar dramatic increases can be seen in college graduation for male and female racial and ethnic minorities. Even though racial and ethnic minorities and women earn college degrees in lesser percentages than white men, they are earning degrees at higher rates than ever before. Only 2.8% of black males earned degrees in 1960, but by 2000, 16.3% had earned a degree. Black women have always been slightly more likely to earn a degree than black males, but the reverse has traditionally been true for Hispanics. However, since 1970, the percentage of Hispanic women earning degrees is almost equal to the percentage of Hispanic men earning degrees. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 92 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIID—Stratification by Sex and Gender Functionalists…101 102 “She Walketh Veiled and Sleeping,”…100 gay…101 lesbian…101 androgyny…101 gender…100 Looking-Glass ascribed status…101 Gender…100 Self…101 gender identity…101 biological differences mainstream gender roles…101 feminism…100 and physical Margaret Mead…100 differences…100 Gender roles…100 Mary Daly…100 glass walls…101 Charlotte Perkins masculinity…100 Gilman…100 glass-ceiling…101 Minorities…101 Heterosexuality…101 Civil Rights Movement Modern feminism…100 of the 1960s…101 Hispanic women…101 most recent modern Conflict Hochschild and Anne Perspective…101 Machung…101 women’s movement…101 homophobia…101 female genital mutilation…102 homophobic…101 radical lesbian feminism…100 femininity…100 Homosexuality…101 Feminism…100 Rosabeth Moss homosocial Kanter…101 FGM…102 reproduction…101, Rosie the Riveter…101 Sex…100 sex-appropriate behavior…101 Sexism…100 social and cultural expectations that are associated with a person’s sex…100 social expectations…100 symbol of women working in jobs that had traditionally gone to men…101 Symbolic Interactionist perspective…101 The Second Shift…101 Module IIIE—Stratification by Age “Grow Old Along With Me / The Best Is Yet to Be / The Last of Time for Which the First Was Made” Robert Browning Between 1996 and 2015, over 5,000 Americans PER DAY Will Have Turned 50 Years of Age—these are Americans who were born between 1946 and 1965, otherwise called the Baby Boom Generation Old age begins at age 65 years. The young-old are those from 65 to 75 years old; the old-old are between 76 and 84 years old while the oldest-old are 85 years of age or more. The oldest-old are a fast growing segment of the American population. We have more elderly people now, than ever before in our history. In 1900, only 4% of the American population was over 65, in 1990 12% of Americans were over 65 (a number that has increased in the last decade to 15%-18%). Currently .5% of Americans are over 100! Each of these major age groups represents a cohort which is a group of people born close to the same time period who have similar life experiences and similar remembrances For example the Depression Kids who are people who were adolescents or young adults in 1929; Baby Boomers, people born between after World War II (between 1946 and 1965); and Gen X who are the children of the Baby Boomers, each have their own distinct memories of memories of war, musical forms, technological change, medical breakthroughs, epidemics, changing social norms and mores, etc. The shared understanding of a particular sociocultural milieu is called the cohort effect. In thirty years, when the majority of you are middle-aged, and you are hanging out with your friends, you will probably be listening to the same music you listen to now, and you will occasionally reminisce about what life was like when you were young, and the changes you have seen. 281 Although there are many scientists who today are working to overcome the most deleterious effects of aging, and some who are even attempting to stop aging and expand the life span, for most of us now, aging is an entirely normal process. As we age, our bodies begin to change and many of us believe, incorrectly, that aging is closely related to virtually complete physical and mental deterioration. Our cells and organs do indeed change over time, but a healthy life style and engaging in interesting and challenging activities as well as interacting with other people helps the elderly to remain physically and mentally healthy into very old age. Some things that do occur however are that skin texture and resiliency changes, hair turns gray or falls out, spinal disks compress; joints stiffen; and many women suffer from osteoporosis. Generally speaking however, these changes do not necessarily mean that the older person is falling apart or that they are losing their ability to care for themselves. Many healthy elderly people are quite capable of living very active lives, in their own homes, into very old age. 282 We tend to believe, again wrongly, that as people age they experience changes in personality. In actuality, unless there is illness or brain damage such as dementia or Alzheimer’s disease, changes in personality, perceptions, and attitudes do not occur. Cranky, ill-tempered, unpleasant older people, in general, were cranky, ill-tempered, unpleasant young people, just as pleasant, enjoyable, fun old people were pleasant, enjoyable, fun young people. The differences that we think we see often are related to the conditions in which the elderly live. Elderly people who are alone, or who are in nursing homes (a form of total institution) often suffer from severe levels of clinical depression. 283 The old people depicted on the television show The Simpsons who sit in wheelchairs and stare out the window all day are clearly chronically depressed. Elderly people who have nothing to do, who feel purposeless and useless, tend toward severe depression. Alcoholism and suicide are at nearly epidemic proportions. However, according to Havighurst different personality types adjust differently to aging; while Russell argues that aging is a normal process and healthy older people can do most of the same things as younger people. 284 Social roles do change over time as do the norms and folkways concerning “proper” behavior for the elderly, such as appropriate clothing styles, activity levels, and sexual activity. Healthy oldsters however, should be allowed and encouraged to SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 93 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved engage in physical activity including sex. Most elderly people enjoy normal relationships with spouses and families, and when their own families are not present they tend to form family-like relationships with others. Contrary to popular wisdom, most elderly people care for themselves, with spouses caring for each other in times of illness or distress, rather than relying on adult children to become caregivers. 285 There is indeed inequality that is based on age, although gender and race or ethnicity are more significant indicators of stratification than age alone. Throughout the years there have been laws that prevented the elderly from working past the age of 65. However, the Age-Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 made such policies and laws illegal. The AARP (American Association of Retired Persons) is the largest lobbying group in the United States. (A lobbying group petitions Congress to pass laws favorable to the specific agenda of the group.) The AARP’s membership is composed of people over the age of 49 who, along with their younger spouses, pay ten dollars each year and in turn receive discounts on car rentals, vacations, hotels and motels, resorts, cruises, and insurance, among other things. Most members of the AARP are employed, and are not officially elderly. Along with Maggie Kuhn of the Grey Panthers—an organization whose goal is to eliminate all aspects of ageism, which is the belief or ideology that people in a particular age category are inferior to people in other age categories—the AARP was responsible for the passage of many laws favorable to the elderly. 286 Regardless of any specific theoretical paradigm, it is clear that the elderly have heard the voices from the past, and in the grandest legacy of the American republic, have assembled in multivariate ways to petition the government, initiating “a new era in the politics of aging.” 287 It is also clear that the elderly gain significant benefits by engaging in various forms of social interaction. 288 . Pamela Hubbard, et al. (1992), in a study of political activism among a relatively small sample of institutionalized (i.e. nursing home residents) seniors found that participation in an active and effective political action group helped seniors “fulfill their needs to be responsible and contributing community members, gain a sense of empowerment, and enhance their control over their environment. Residents are able to shed nursing home stereotypes . . . [and] enjoy the social benefits of participating . . . [in a group in which] the residents are not as sheltered as other institutionalized elderly.” 289 However, political activism among the elderly, regardless of the social benefits that accrue to members, is seldom seen as benign, and, as with most lobbying groups, the elderly must justify their positions vis á vis the positions of other lobbying organizations and the preeminent social, economic, and political interests of the polity as an aggregate. The largest, most financially secure, and arguably most politically powerful elderly advocacy group, AARP, has been criticized for its undemocratic methodology because “most members join for [the social and financial] benefits, [and] in doing so they automatically become part of a political army, fighting battles which they may or may not believe in.” 290 According to the AARP (quoting Bureau of the Census statistics), there were, as of 1993, 32.8 million elderly representing 12.7% of the entire population of the United Sates and that number is expanding: the number of elderly has increased by 5% since 1990 compared to a 3% increase in the size of the population under 65, and by 2030 the number of those over 65 is projected by the Census Bureau to be 70.2 million or 20% of the entire population (A Profile 1-2 [1994]), moreover, “the fastest growing segment of this older population is the age group 85 years and older; this segment is projected to double to 4.2 million persons by the year 2000” (INFO-PAK n. page. [1995]). Robert N. Binstock’s (1995) figure of 33 million members of the AARP (Binstock 71 [1995]) leads one to conclude that all people who are over 65 are members and indeed, the AARP (1995) lists its membership at Amore than 33 million . . . [making it] the largest non-profit organization serving the needs of older persons in the United States” (AAARP News” 1 [1995]), however, membership in AARP is not restricted to those who are considered elderly but is open to “anyone age 50 or older, both working and retired,” and, in fact, “over one-third of the Association’s membership is in the work force” (AAARP News” 1 [1995]) which accounts for the seemingly disparately large numbers of participants. 291 292 The sheer size of the AARP makes it appear formidable, therefore, in order to “respond to charges being levied by some advocates of generational equity that [old age interest groups] are concerned with the special interests of the elderly population to the exclusion of the legitimate interests of any others.” Eric R. Kingson (1988) suggests that “the resources . . . at the disposal of elderly interest groups are more important to the success of their lobbying and other efforts than the perception that they are not selfish. After all, why should elder interest groups, or any other interest groups for that matter, be expected to be unselfish?” Furthermore, the elderly have enormous political clout at the polls—they vote in vast numbers. “The AARP’s, members, who are mainly middle class, can be counted on to turn out at election time. In 1980, 71% of Americans aged 55-64 went to the polls, compared with 36% of those aged 18-20.” 293 294 Walter A. Rosenbaum (1993) and James W. Button contest Kingson’s (1988) view that there is “a deterioration in the public image upon which the political privilege of the aging is grounded [and which] is a bellwether of generational tension” and argue that most studies of political preferences among the elderly generally highlight only those issues and policies that directly impact the elderly rather than issues and policies that effect all Americans. Indeed, they found that “studies of candidate and party preference among the aging, like policy studies, seldom reveal significant associations between age and voting choice that cannot be explained by other socioeconomic factors.” 295 Furthermore, it is clear that the vast majority of all money given to political parties is given to the party in power 296 297 so that access gained through financial means is largely based on pocketbook issues that effect most citizens. Moreover, Laurie A. Rhodebeck (1993) maintains that while “older Americans share common agerelated concerns . . . they are hardly subject to the solidifying experiences typical of [other minorities].” She further argues that: several conditions seem likely to enhance cohesion among older people. The development of retirement communities may encourage interactions that foster an awareness of common political interests. The availability of senior citizen perquisites may promote a sense of group entitlement that extends to the policy arena. Finally, SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 94 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved recent deficit reduction measures that have threatened the viability of public assistance for the elderly may serve as effective mobilizers of group interests and powerful inducements to the maintenance of group unity. 298 With the sea change in the American political scene from a largely liberal Democratic majority in the Congress to a predominately conservative Republican majority, lobbying and other special interest groups will find it necessary to modify their approaches. Indeed, as the political climate is transformed so must special interest and lobbying groups adjust their tactics if they are to be successful petitioners. Binstock (1995) offers a brief analysis of the changes that must take place if old-age activist groups are to maintain their ability to influence public policies: Starting in the late 1970s and continuing into the mid-1990s, new stereotypes emerged in popular culture depicting older people as prosperous, hedonistic, selfish, and politically powerful, greedy geezers. . . . In this era the activities of old-age interest groups were aimed at protecting existing programs and their specific features. These defensive efforts were somewhat successful in the broad sense that cutbacks in old-age programs during this period were generally less than in other social programs. 299 Moreover, Binstock (1995) argues that, as the Congress, if not the country as a whole, becomes more partisan and more ideologically conservative “this new era in the policies of aging [will pose] difficult challenges for old-age interest groups.” 300 Considering that largest of the age-related special interest groups Binstock (1995) says: The most difficult and politically important choices will be those made by AARP . . . [which] is by far the most important [of all old-age advocacy groups] because of its huge membership . . . [of] 33 million members. (Binstock 71 [1995]) The enormous financial and personnel resources which AARP can muster is a classic example of RM that is evident in Binstock’s (1995) figures: “in 1994 AARP’s total revenue was $469 million . . . [and they had] 1,700 employees” not including a host of unpaid local community volunteers. 301 Nonetheless, Binstock (1995) finds that the AARP and other old-age organizations will be forced to make changes if they are to survive as viable and vigorous political forces. Indeed, as the political mood changes the social dynamic and the cultural milieu: Proposals for major changes in programs on aging are being generated by conservative political principles and to balance the federal budget, without much attention to the implications for older people themselves . . . Consequently the old-age lobby is unlikely to have much impact unless its efforts are coincidentally fortified by more powerful political forces. 302 Robert N. Butler [1994], in 1993, also argued that the persuasive power of the AARP has declined: Our form of special interest politics and government is reflected in organizations of older persons. These organizations are considered influential . . . the American media treat the AARP as if it were a very powerful special interest group. However, this is exaggerated. It has been weakened in recent years because of the Medicare Catastrophic Act and its repeal. In any case, compared to powerful interest groups within Washington, the AARP is not as strong an influence. 303 But Kingson (1988) argues that: By broadening their agenda, aging advocacy organizations may increase their legitimacy and reduce the likelihood that the advocates of various groups (the old, the disabled, the young) will expend resources engaging in divisive competition. And coalitions may provide an important means of expanding needed programs and services to all groups while simultaneously protecting existing services and programs against erosion. 304 Whether such coalition building will occur and be politically successful is purely speculative but further study on coalition politics would be worth pursuing. Although the causal factors involved in political participation and activism among the general populace are problematic due to the various theoretical paradigms employed to explain such behavior, little specific research has been conducted on the involvement of the elderly. Furthermore, as the “Baby Boomer” generation reaches retirement age such research might prove to be an important addition to the literature. As this more affluent and activist cohort ages, and discovers that, as Alan Neustadtl (1990) argues, “money purchases access at declining rates” will they engage in higher levels of political and social activism as they find that “highly visible (and often emotionally charged) issues require a greater adherence [by elected officials and decision makers] to party and constituent desires”? 305 Arguments used to exist over proper implementation of social welfare programs for the elderly, not over the existence of such programs but as the political situation reverses liberal legislation will the AARP join with other lobbying groups for the disadvantaged to preserve the status quo? The entire field of gerontology is ripe for study and theory development and so is the field of political activism among the elderly; the changes that will ensue as one cohort of the newly elderly slowly replaces the previous generation of elderly will be a fecund ground for social science research. 306 Societal attitudes toward aging are generally highly stereotyped so that Jennifer McLerran, in apparent agreement with Kirkland, warns that, although those attitudes have been largely negative stereotypes, there is an equal danger in the trend toward positive stereotyping which may serve “as evidence of a form of ageism which threatens to propagate public policies and institutional practices which ignore the specific needs of the elderly” (McLerran 82). 307 John Bell argues that societal attitudes and stereotypes of old age are rampant on television and although most programming does not “encourage rational discourse on such important issues as health care for the elderly, they do participate in our society’s overall discourse on aging by providing compelling, often unexaminedly accepted images of aging and the elderly, thereby fueling stereotypes about elderly persons and their lives” (Bell 92). Bell further states that many portrayals of the elderly on television are sexist and, as McLerran has cautioned, other images of the aged are in the categories of either highly negative or highly positive stereotypes which furnish to SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 95 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved the viewers significantly unrealistic perspectives of older Americans (Bell 93). However, Bell does say that, due to a handful of programs featuring elderly individuals in leading roles, “[t]he picture of the elderly on television . . . appears to be far more positive than it was [in 1981] . . . the elderly are still an incomplete presence, and significant problems of role presentation, especially in terms of gender, persist” (Bell 93), furthermore, society would be better served if all members of society, including the elderly, were depicted in realistic terms on television (Bell 98). 308 Societal attitudes toward the elderly are often displayed as ageism, the term coined in the late 1960’s by Robert Butler (Kirkland 28) which is inherent in all stereotypes of the elderly and, as Patricia Moore found in her highly publicized and nowfamous experiment, is ubiquitous in American society and includes: rudeness, assault, invisibility, patronizing behaviors, false assumptions about physical and/or social competence, victimization, and verbal abuse (Ryan 34-35). Among other ageist stereotypes are the myths of the asexual and uninterested elder (Mayo Clinic 45) which are addressed by Richard Cross who states the following facts: “all older people are sexual (Cross 101) . . . many older people have a need for a good sexual relationship (Cross 101) . . . sexual physiology changes with age (Cross 102) . . . social attitudes [toward sexuality between older adults] are often frustrating (Cross 102) . . . [sexuality must be] used or lost (Cross 103). . older folks do it better” (Cross 103). Ageism, as with any negative attitudes toward any members of a minority group is detrimental to society creating obstacles to the development of competent public policy and general human understanding. 309 There are various Sociological explanations of the aging process which are based on the three major Sociological paradigms. Within the rubric of the Functionalist paradigm is social disengagement theory which argues that as people age, they gradually withdraw from social participation and simultaneously are relieved of social responsibilities (Cumming and Henry). This theory has very little support and according to Nelson and Dannefur, the healthy, non-poor elderly are highly active. Subculture theory, which comes from the Symbolic Interactionist paradigm, states that older persons form subcultures in order to interact with others with similar backgrounds, experiences, attitudes, values, beliefs, and lifestyles (Rose), but this theory, also, ahs very little support because the elderly have been shown to highly heterogeneous. The most highly supported Symbolic Interactionist theory is called Activity Theory which has shown that the extent to which an individual remains engaged in meaningful social activity determines the quality of life because desired activity with realistic goals help to determine life satisfaction. Various theories from the Conflict perspective have some support for the idea that the elderly compete with younger members of society for the same resources and social rewards and suffer a variety of disadvantages because of their relative lack of power, however, as stated above, race and ethnicity are more important variables than age in stratification. Furthermore, the elderly today are more and more likely to be comfortable, healthy, vigorous, and engage. 310 Stratification among the elderly is more a matter of gender and race than age. According to the 1990 census 31% of the elderly live comfortable, active lives in their own homes (Treas and Torrecilha); 311 only 13% are in poverty with an average 1989 income of less than $7,495; and an average social security income of only $488/month. Minority elderly are more likely to be poor than white elderly and white women live longer than any other group. Five percent of the elderly are institutionalized, 16% have limited mobility; 25% are rural and thus more likely to be poor; fully 60% are married and living with a spouse; 20% live with adult children. The vast majority of the elderly are in good health and 50% of those between 75 and 84 are free from serious medical problems. According to Rogers, healthy lifestyles among the elderly increase their longevity. Feminist writer and activist Betty Friedan wrote a book titled The Fountain of Age in which she maintained that aging brings with it wisdom and understanding, and that aging is a time for joy and activity, not deterioration and death. But, of course, death is a part of life, particularly for the elderly. 312 Due to the traditional sex-typed roles practiced by women and men who are currently among the old-old (85+), gender differences in role continuity tend to exist with women much more likely than men to maintain close family connections (Barer 74). Women also tend to socialize with peers and be more actively engaged in close interpersonal relationships than men (Barer 74). However, white women outlive white men into old-old age so that Amore men than women, aged eighty-five and over are still married, 48.7 percent of white men in comparison to only 10.3 percent of white women. . . . As a consequence, more women live alone in late-late life, two-thirds compared to one-third of men.” 313 To compound the difficulties inherent in widowhood and living alone, the socioeconomic status of women is “relatively poor. . . . Twenty-three percent of women aged eighty-five and over live in poverty, compared to 16 percent of men” (Barer 74). Furthermore, women tend to have “greater physical disability because of chronic health conditions [which makes women] less able to independently manage their activities of daily living” (Barer 78). Men, however, due to traditional sex-typed roles, although physically better off than women, are more likely to experience problems with domestic chores and tend to face a greater likelihood of social isolation (Barer 79). Clearly, both sexes in old-old age may be faced with serious problems which have sociopolitical and socioeconomic ramifications for young and old alike (Tauber 65-67), but, as Cynthia M. Tauber argues, “all of American society face[s] the challenge of anticipating and preparing for the changing needs and desires of a diverse, aging U. S.” (Tauber 67). 314 Even though the gender related age gap will continue to exist among the elderly and particularly the old-old, that gap may be closing as Americans become more aware of health issues and practice preventive maintenance (Kirkland 22; Tauber 65). According to Richard I. Kirkland, the “advances that will make us live longer and healthier . . . range from the marvelous to the mundane” (Kirkland 23) and include: “[m]ore targeted medical weaponry” (Kirkland 23); cures for Alzheimer’s disease and other dementias (Kirkland 24); more powerful antibiotics and immune system strengtheners (Kirkland 24-25); hormone replacement and enhancement (Kirkland 25); healthier life-styles (Kirkland 25); and genetic engineering to retard the aging process at the molecular level (Kirkland 25-26). However, echoing Tauber, because “[t]he culture still too often patronizes and stigmatizes its SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 96 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved elderly citizens” (Kirkland 28), there are serious socioeconomic and sociopolitical problems that must be addressed as the population of the United States ages (Kirkland 28). 315 Thanatologist Elizabeth Kübler-Ross, who was a physician who took on only patients were all terminally developed a stage theory of dying. Dying, assuming one lives long enough to complete it, is for the terminally ill, a process. According to Kübler-Ross the stages of dying are: denial, anger, bargaining, depression, and acceptance. As the Baby Boomers age, euthanasia, which is helping the terminally ill to die free of pain and with as much dignity as possible, may become a major social issue. There are two forms of euthanasia—passive euthanasia which is allowing someone to die and active euthanasia which is helping someone to die 316 . On June 26, 1997, the United States Supreme Court issued a ruling that said that there is no constitutional right to die, and states may make their own laws covering euthanasia and physician-assisted suicide. How will we deal with this? What are your feelings about this issue? As with all other forms of stratification there are serious consequences of ageism which includes elder abuse which is the mistreatment of older persons and takes several forms: physical abuse is hitting, pushing, shoving, starvation, and rape; psychological abuse includes threats, intimidation, verbal assaults; and exploitation which is the misuse or theft of financial assets. 317 How do you want to be treated when you are old? How can you change the way elders are cared for today? SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 97 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Some Basic Data Concerning the American Elderly-1995 318 Characteristic 82 People who live to age 65 in 1995 can expect to live another 17 years Life Expectancy at 65 Median Income 1992 Men $14,548 Women $8,189 This data shows that men, as always, are the benchmark for income in the US White Men $15,276 with elderly white men accounting for the highest levels of income for all elderly in 1992. Black Women $6,220 Hispanic Women $5,968 Poverty 1989 7% White Men 13% White Women 24% Black Men 36% The poverty statistics for the elderly also show that race and ethnicity are more Black Women 24% significant indicators of stratification among the elderly than age alone. American Indian Men 32% Those most likely to be poor as elderly Americans, were those most likely to be American Indian Women 20% poor as younger Americans: women in general and minority women specifically. Hispanic Men 27% Hispanic Women 11% Asian Men 13% Asian Women Dependency Living Alone 32% Women Age 65-74 13% Because women generally outlive men, elderly women are much more likely Men Age 65-74 57% to live alone than elderly men. Women Age 85+ 29% Men Age 85+ Non-Institutionalized but Needing Care 9% Although most elderly are able to care for themselves, some need help with activities Age 65-69 11% of daily living such as bathing, dressing, preparing food, and shopping. Age 70-74 (When the non-elderly upper middle class has such help the helpers are called 20% Age 75 to 79 "personal assistants.") Most elderly are not only able to care for themselves but 31% are also free from any serious medical problems at all ages. Age 80 to 85 50% Age 85+ Living in Nursing Home 1% Our stereotype is that most elderly are in nursing homes, however, that is not the Age 65 to 74 25% case for any elderly age group. Age 85+ Leading Causes of Death for the Elderly 33% Heart Disease The leading causes of death for the elderly (with the exception of stroke and accident) 33% are the same as for other adult age groups. Cancer 33% Stroke SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 98 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Year Life Expectancy in Years by Race And Sex 1940-1999 with Projections for 2005 and 2010 319 All White Years of Difference Black Years of Years of White Male to Difference Difference Male Female Male Female Male Female White Female Black Male to Black Female to White Female White Female 60.8 65.2 62.1 66.6 4.5 ——— ——— ——— ——— 1940 65.6 71.1 66.5 72.2 5.7 ——— ——— ——— ——— 1950 67.1 74.7 68.0 75.6 7.6 60.0 68.3 15.6 7.3 1960 67.1 74.7 68.0 75.6 7.6 64.1 60.0 11.5 15.6 1970 70.0 77.4 70.7 78.1 7.4 68.1 63.8 10.0 14.3 1980 71.8 78.8 72.7 79.4 6.7 64.5 73.6 14.9 5.8 1990 72.4 79.0 73.3 79.6 6.3 64.9 73.9 14.7 5.7 1994 74.1 79.7 74.7 80.2 5.5 68.7 75.4 11.5 4.8 1999 Projections 74.9 80.7 75.4 81.1 5.7 69.9 76.8 11.2 4.3 2005 75.6 81.4 76.1 81.8 5.7 70.9 77.8 10.9 4.0 2010 This table shows that the length of time one can be expected to live is based on race and, by extrapolation, social class (poverty). One's life chances, including access to wealth, power, and status, are not solely based on the quality of life, but on the length of life. Poor people and minorities have shorter actual life spans as well as shorter expected life spans than people in the dominant group. White women live longer than any other group in American society, 5.5 years longer than white men in 1999, and a shocking 11.5 years longer than black men who have the shortest life spans of any group. This table is also an indicator that social class is as much of a measure of inequality among the elderly than age alone. Number of Men per 100 Women by Age for Those 65 Years of Age and Older 1990 and 2000 320 Age 1990 2000 Percent Difference 67 70 0.96 78 82 0.95 65 to 74 years 60 65 0.92 75 to 84 years 39 41 0.95 85 years and over This table shows that women live longer than men; it shows the ratio of men to women in the age groups of 65 to 74, 75 to 84, and over 85. In each age group there are more women than men (which makes unmarried, straight, elderly men a valuable commodity). In the year 2000, there were only 70 men for every 100 women aged 65 and over. The most elderly, 85 years and over, show a dramatic difference in the ratio of men to women--in 2000, there were only 41 men for every 100 women. Again, this is indicative of the considerably longer life spans of women to men. There are some researchers in the biological and medical sciences who believe that females are simply physiologically and psychologically stronger than males. 65 years and over Population 65 Years and Over by Age-2000 Age Number Percent of Total Population Percent Increase/Decrease Since 1990 34,991,753 12.40 12.00 65+ 18,106,558 6.50 1.60 65-74 10,055,108 4.40 22.90 75-84 2,829,728 1.40 37.90 85-94 250,437 0.10 34.70 95+ This table shows that better health care, more access to health care, better food, and more wealth (based on Social Security and pensions) allows people to live longer. There are more elderly (people over 65) that at any time in the history of the US and those numbers will increase as the baby boom generation begins reaching the age of 65 in 2011. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 99 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IIIE—Stratification by Age AARP…106, 107 active euthanasia…109 Activity Theory…109 ageism…106, 108 Ageism…108 ageist stereotypes…108 aging…106 Alcoholism…106 Baby Boomers…106 Betty Friedan…109 changes in personality…106 clinical depression…106 cohort…106 cohort effect…106 Conflict perspective…109 consequences of ageism…109 Depression Kids…106 elderly compete with younger members of society…109 Elizabeth KüblerRoss…109 euthanasia…109 family-like relationships…106 folkways…106 Functionalist paradigm…108 Gen X…106 gender differences in role continuity…109 Grey Panthers…106 indicators of stratification…106 lobbying group…106 Maggie Kuhn…106 myths of the asexual and uninterested elder…108 norms…106 Old age…106 oldest-old…106 old-old…106 passive euthanasia…109 political activism…107 portrayals of the elderly on television…108 sexual activity…106 social disengagement theory…108 Social roles…106 Societal attitudes toward aging…108 socioeconomic status of women…109 Sociological explanations of the aging process…108 spouses caring for e other…106 stages of dying…10 stratification…109 Stratification…109 Subculture theory… suicide…106 Symbolic Interactio paradigm…109 Symbolic Interactio theory…109 The Fountain of Ag total institution…1 young-old…106 Module III-F—Stratification: Inequality by Disability This introduction is an unpublished paper by a student at the University of Houston-Clear Lake who was in Ruth Dunn’s Minorities in America class in the fall of 2007. Ruth Dunn has the student’s permission to use the paper, but not the student’s name. Ruth Dunn has made some changes to the style, but not to the substance other than to remove some charts and graphs that are unnecessary for this discussion. There are many different types of disabilities and disabled persons in the United States as well as throughout the world. While no one definition can adequately describe all disabilities, the universally-accepted definition describes a disability as “any physical or mental impairment that substantially limits a major life activity.” (U.S. Department of Justice, ADA, 2007.) Determining whether a condition is recognized as a disability is decided on a case-by-case basis. (U.S. Department of Justice, ADA, 2007.) The term disability includes cognitive, developmental, intellectual, physical, and learning impairments. Some disabilities are congenital (present at birth), or the result of an accident or illness, or age-related. A person may be mildly or severely affected by their disability. Some examples of disabilities include attention deficit disorder, Down's syndrome, mental retardation, autism, deafness, blindness, dyslexia, paralysis, difficulty with memory, and brain injuries caused by trauma. The term disability does not mean unable and it is not a sickness. (US National Library of Medicine, 2007.) Although many disabilities limit a person’s mobility and functionality, thousands of disabled individuals in the United States lead relatively normal lives which include working, playing, and socializing in a world designed for non-disabled persons. Many individuals in the public spotlight are, or were, disabled, including Helen Keller, President Franklin D. Roosevelt, Senator Bob Dole, and entertainers Ray Charles and Stevie Wonder. The purpose of this research paper is to focus on employment of disabled persons in the United States, what the government has done over the past thirty years to assist and protect disabled individuals in the workplace, and what difference (if any) these changes have made for disabled persons. Employment provides individuals with social integration as well as many different, positive feelings about themselves. Pride, independence, security, self confidence, and self worth are just a few examples of what having a job can mean and how it can affect one’s perception of self. For a person with a disability however, securing and retaining employment has not always been an easy endeavor. Statistics reported in the 2006 Disability Status Report published by Cornell University in Ithaca, New York revealed that in the United States, approximately 37.7 percent of working-age people had a disability. In Texas, this percentage was 12.7. The percentage of people with a disability who did not have jobs, but were actively looking for one was 8.7 percent. The poverty rate was listed at 25.3 percent for working-aged disabled individuals. (Rehabilitation Research and Training Center on Disability Demographics and Statistics, 2006 Disability Status Report. Ithaca, NY; Cornell University.) This study also revealed that the employment percentage of working-age individuals who are disabled but not institutionalized is only 19.3. The research found that the median annual household income for disabled persons was $36,300 compared to $60,000 for persons who were not disabled. In addition, in 2002, five hundred random interviews conducted with businesses across America revealed that most companies do not employ anyone with a disability. Specifically, only 26 percent of US business in 2002 had one employee with a disability. Twenty percent of employers interviewed admitted their own discrimination as the main reason for not hiring disabled individuals. Employers also stated they did not know how to find people with disabilities to hire; they did not know how to interview them; and they did not know how to address needed accommodations and assistive technology (i.e. TTY phone system; voice-activated computers and telephones). Other reasons were the assumptions that a disabled person could not perform to the standards of the business and it would be too costly to provide the necessary SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 100 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved accommodations for the disabled person. (Rehabilitation Research and Training Center on Disability Demographics and Statistics, 2006 Disability Status Report. Ithaca, NY; Cornell University.) In an attempt to eliminate discrimination in the workplace against people with disabilities, the US Rehabilitation Act of 1973 was passed by the United States government. The provisions of the Act state that any government-funded organization must provide accessibility programs and services to disabled people. In 1990, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) was created and became effective in 1992. The ADA is a significant civil rights law designed to eliminate the obstacles of employment, stop discrimination, and guarantee education for disabled individuals. Its purpose is to protect qualified individuals with disabilities from being discriminated against in the employment areas of hiring; firing; job training and placement, and advancement; compensation; and any privileges of employment. The ADA applies to labor unions, employment agencies, private companies, restaurants, retails stores, movie theaters, and state and local governments which employ fifteen or more people. The ADA offers protection to persons with a physical or mental impairment which limits one or more of their life activities, and requires employers to extend “reasonable accommodations” to these persons. It also prohibits discrimination based solely on the opinion that the disabled person is a potential risk to the company (i.e. extensive illness). In the years since the ADA became a law, it has increased public awareness of disabled persons in the United States, assisted in improving the environment to accommodate disabilities, and advanced technological communications. (U.S. Department of Justice, ADA, 2007.) Moreover, advocacy groups across the country continue striving to increase the percentage of employed disabled persons through programs which promote employer awareness and dispel myths surrounding the disabled community. The progress is slow, and data collected through research is the most effective tool to change skepticism in hiring into enthusiasm in hiring. These awareness programs highlight the abilities of the disabled person rather than their disability. Many employers are finally beginning to recognize the value a person has to offer rather than focusing on that person’s disability. The changing culture of today’s business world also makes it easier for a disabled person to get hired. Businesses are not as rigid as they were in the past and turnover is more rapid. New concepts put into place such as flexible work hours, working from home, and teleworking (videoconferences, net meetings, etc.) can all have a positive impact in the hiring of disabled persons. Other resources that provide valuable information and assistance to employers and disabled persons are the internet and the advancement of technology. Government websites, as well as state-based websites now exist and offer instructions and assistance to disabled persons in the areas of employment, health care, education, taxes, job training, housing, transportation, emergency preparedness, benefits, technology, community life, and civil rights. Businesses can find websites that guide them through the process of locating, interviewing, and hiring disabled individuals. Several informative and useful websites are: DisabilityInfo.gov, the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, the U.S. Department of Justice/ADA home page, and the City of Houston eGovernment Center. Cutting edge technological advancements such as voice-recognition systems, voice synthesizers, computer screen readers, telecaptioners (closed captioning), and telephone TTY devices make it much easier for the disabled world to function and assimilate into the non-disabled world. Additionally, as more and more of these devices become commonplace, the stigmas associated with the disabled person will dissolve, and they will not be seen as different, unusual, unable individuals. Two excellent websites are the U.S. Department of Justice, ADA, and ABLEDATA. Both provide valuable information regarding these devices and how to purchase them which can aid in eliminating the stress, guesswork, dread, and overwhelmed feeling a person may face when he/she must deal with these issues. Another positive stride in the employment of disabled persons over the past few years is their visibility in newspaper ads and television commercials. The national retail chains Home Depot, Walgreens Pharmacy, and CVS Pharmacy all promote hiring disabled individuals and encourage other businesses to do the same. Home Depot is one retailer who features disabled employees in many of their newspaper ads and television commercials. This marketing tool is encouraging to other disabled individuals because it illustrates success stories. It also demonstrates to other employers that disabled persons are competent, valuable employees who are easily integrated into the work environment. Randall’s and Kroger grocery stores also endorse hiring disabled persons to perform jobs such as stocking shelves, sacking groceries, and loading groceries into customer vehicles. As visibility of competent, qualified, dependable disabled persons in the working environment increases, more business owners will have confidence in selecting future employees from the disabled community, thus creating social change and dissolving old stereotypes. Disabled individuals will be seen as valuable employees and will be afforded improved education, housing, and transportation opportunities. The disabled community will no longer be dependent on others to take care of them or speak for them. They will be independent members of society who have equality, autonomy, and confidence in knowing they are viable members of the world in which they live. Almost one in five people has a disability. An estimated 19.4% of non-institutionalized civilians in the United States, totaling 8.9 million people, have a disability. Almost half of these people (an estimated 24.1 million people) can be considered to have a severe disability. Activities considered to be major are: children under age 5: playing; persons 5-17: attending school; persons 18-69: working or keeping house; People age 70 and over: ability to care for oneself (bathing, eating, dressing, or getting around the home) and one's home (doing household chores, doing necessary business, shopping, or getting around for other purposes) without another person's assistance. Almost one out of every seven people has an activity limitation. Activity limitation: In the National Health Interview Survey (NHIS), each person is classified into one of four categories: (a) unable to perform the major activity, (b) able to perform the major activity but limited in the kind or amount of this activity, (c) not limited in the major activity but limited in the kind or amount of other activities, and (d) not limited in any way. The NHIS classifies people as limited (groups a-c) or not limited (group d). Persons are not classified as limited in activity unless one or more chronic health conditions are reported as the cause of the activity limitation (see also chronic health condition and major activity). SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 101 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved An estimated 4.0% (9.2 million) of the non-institutionalized population age 5 and over in the United States need personal assistance with one or more activities. Over 5.8 million people need assistance in "instrumental activities of daily living" (IADL), while 3.4 million need assistance in "activities of daily living" (ADL). ADL includes bathing, dressing, eating, walking, and other personal functioning activities. IADL covers preparing meals, shopping, using the phone, doing laundry, and other measures of living independently. If someone has a need for assistance in ADL, it is assumed that they will have a need for assistance in IADL also. One in 25 people age 5 and over needs assistance in daily activities. The number of non-institutionalized people in the United States with a work disability is estimated to be 16.9 million, which represents 10.1% of the working age population (16 to 64 years old). Higher percentages of blacks are work disabled than whites or Hispanics: 15.4% of blacks have a work disability (3.2 million people) compared to 9.6% for people of Hispanic origin (1.6 million), 9.4% of whites (13 million) and 8.5% of other races (700,000). Work disability increases in frequency with age. At 16-24 years, 4.2% are work disabled; for 25-34 years, the proportion rises to 6.4%; for 35-44 years, 9.4%; from 45-54 years, 13.3%; and for 55-64 years, 22.9% are work disabled. Technical Note: The Hispanic category can include people of any race. Blacks report the highest rates of work disability. Works Cited ABLEDATA http://www.abledata.com/abledata.cfm?pageid=19327&top=13436&deep=2&trail=22 Disability Info. 2007. http://www.disabilityinfo.gov/digov-public/public/DisplayPage.do?parentFolderId=9 The Disability Rights Movement. 2000. http://americanhistory.si.edu/disabilityrights/exhibit.html Medline Plus http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/developmentaldisabilities.html US National Library of Medicine and the National Institutes of Health. 2007. Rehabilitation Research and Training Center on Disability Demographics and Statistics. 2007. 2006 Disability Status Report. Ithaca, New York. Cornell University. http://www.ilr.cornell.edu/edi/disabilitystatistics/StatusReports/2006-HTML/2006StatusReport_US.html?CFID=98139&CFTOKEN=51397315#top The U.S. Department of Justice, ADA Home Page. 2007. http://www.usdoj.gov/crt/ada/adahom1.htm SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 102 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Module IVA—The Family and Marriage (Compiled and written primarily by Dr. Luis Salinas) Marriage is a socially approved union between two or more people. Marriage may be sanctioned by religious ceremony but overall and throughout history, it is a method by which legitimate families are formed according to social norms. Marriage can be defined as a social construct whereby adults have certain socially determined rights and obligations to one another and to children produced by the union. Marriage grants social permission for people to engage in sexual relations and allows inheritance by spouses and legitimate offspring. Marriage can also be defined as a union between two or more people that is legally sanctioned and controlled by the government. Who can marry whom is based on kinship which has to do with blood relationships and includes consanguinal marriage, or marriage between blood relatives such as sibling marriage and cousin marriage. In most societies a person cannot marry: their parents, their children, their grandparents, their biological aunts or uncles, their siblings, their immediate cousins. Who can marry whom is also a concomitant of the age of consent which differs according to social norms. In some societies parents can consent to the marriage of children as young a ten. In some cultures same sex marriages are approved and there are parts of the world where some groups of nonheterosexual people are considered a third sex such as the Berdache in some American Indian groups and the Hijra of India. In some parts of Eastern Europe there is also a tradition of a third sex. In some cultures people of the opposite sex engage in sexual relations only for the purpose of procreation, however, in most cultures marriage between people of the opposite sex is the norm. As of 2008, Canada, Spain, South Africa, and Belgium permitted same sex marriage and California, Massachusetts, and Connecticut permitted same sex marriage as of November 2008, although some of these statutes are being debated both at the polls and by the legislatures of those states. As of 2008 the following states in the United States permitted civil unions: Connecticut, New Hampshire, Oregon, Vermont, Washington, and the following countries permitted permitted civil unions. Brazil, Croatia, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Hungary, Iceland, Mexico, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom. In most societies marriage, divorce, division of property, custody of children, etc. are matters of law and are determined and controlled by the state. Kinship is a social bond of people whose social relationships are based on common ancestry (blood) marriage, adoption, and/or affiliation. Consanguineous kin are relatives related through biological or blood ties. Affinal kin are relatives related by marriage. Adopted or fictive kin are related by special ties or rituals such as godparents. (If you have a family friend who is otherwise unrelated to you whom you call aunt or uncle, that is an example of fictive kin. Descent is the way in which members of a society trace kinship over generations and is important for: recognition as a family member, passing on property, as well as other benefits of being a family member. There are three types of descent according to Sociologists and Anthropologists: Patrilineal, matrilineal, and bilateral. Patrilineal descent traces kinship through the male line. The family name is traced through father’s line and such descent usually occurs in patriarchal societies where the oldest living son is typically the inheritor of property. In cases of primogenitor, the eldest living son inherits all the land and all other real property. This pattern is found primarily in preindustrial and monarchical societies. Matrilineal descent traces kinship through the female line and the family name is traced through mother’s line and such descent usually occurs in matriarchal societies where the oldest living daughter is typically the inheritor of property. However, many matrilineal societies are still patriarchal and the majority of power resides in the eldest living brother of the woman in question. This is also called an avuncular society: the uncle has the economic, social and political power. Matrilineal descent is often found in small scale horticultural societies like the Navajo. Bilateral descent traces kinship through both men and women and the family name can be traced through both parents although customarily women still assume their husband’s name. In conditions of bilateral descent, any child may inherit property. This pattern is often found in industrial societies. Marriage patterns also differ from society to society. Where do newly wedded people live? Patrilocality means that newly married people live with or near the husband’s family. This pattern is often associated with patriarchal authority where male elders dominate the decision-making process and women have little control over their lives. Matrilocality means that newly married people live with or near the wife’s family and the husband moves to the home of his wife or her kin group. This is sometimes associated with matriarchal authority but is often avuncular authority. Neolocality means setting up house apart from both families. This is the typical pattern in the United States where married people establish independent households and is often associated with egalitarian authority patterns. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 103 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Module IVB: Education (Compiled and written by Dr. Luis Salinas) I. Education: A Global Survey. A. Education has been defined as simply the social institution guiding a society’s transmission of knowledge. B. It has also been defined as the institutionalized process of systematically teaching certain cognitive skills and knowledge, and the generational transmission of these. C. Schooling is formal instruction under the direction of specially trained teachers. D. In some countries such as India, many children work, greatly limiting their opportunity for schooling. E. Japan’s educational system is widely praised for producing some of the world’s highest achievers. II. The Functions of Schooling. A. The Structural-functional paradigm examines how formal education enhances the operation and stability of society. 1. Education is the social institution that is responsible for systematically teaching certain cognitive skills and knowledge, and transmitting these skills and knowledge from one generation to the next generation. 2. Specifically this paradigm views Education as having several manifest and latent functions for society. a. Some of the Manifest Functions or intended consequences of Education are: i. Cultural transmission is the process whereby culture is passed from one generation to the next. ii. Culture has two forms Cognitive -thoughts, ideas and knowledge The prevalent ideas of society are passed on. Normative -norms, values, attitudes and beliefs. 1. The expected way of behaving in society is passed on through the education system. 3. Some of the Latent Functions in society which are unintended and have unrecognized consequences a. The hidden curriculum serves to teach the dominant norms and values. b. Students taught by WASP middle class teachers, this maintains the political and economic status quo in society. c. It is here that the established social values are taught thoroughly. d. The educational system also serves as a Day care, a place to take care of children during the day. This is so basic that when students have a day off, for teachers in-service or whatever other reason, many parents panic, because they do not have a place for them to take care of the kids. e. Education is important in the Job Market. Often by simply knowing that someone went to the same school you did is often another key to employment. f. Students regularly date other students with whom they go to school they go to school. g. Since people in general marry people they date, so also students frequently marry people they go to school with. h. Anticipatory socialization is the teaching of knowledge and skills for the successful fulfillment of future roles and statuses. 4. Many of the little things taught in school, such as sitting for a long period of time are taught in schools in anticipation of jobs that have that requirement in modern society. 5. Other examples of Anticipatory socialization include coloring within the lines, raising your hand to speak knowing where to sit and eating only at designated times like snack time. 6. Education also serves to enhance social and cultural integration in society by bringing together people from diverse social backgrounds so that they share widespread social experiences and thus acquire commonly held societal norms, attitudes and beliefs. a. By interacting with people from many different social and cultural backgrounds, individuals learn to get along with other individuals who are very different from them. b. Kindergarten has been called the academic boot camp in socialization. c. The best example of this has been captured in this essay: i. ALL I REALLY NEED TO KNOW I LEARNED IN KINDERGARTEN All I really need to know about how to live and what to do and how to be I learned in kindergarten. Wisdom was not at the top of the graduate school mountain, but there in the sand pile at school. These are the things I learned: Share everything. Play fair. Don't hit people. Put things back where you found them. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 104 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Clean up your own mess. Don't take things that aren't yours. Say you're sorry when you hurt somebody. Wash your hands before you eat. Flush. Warm cookies and cold milk are good for you. Live a balanced life - learn some and think some and draw and paint and sing and dance and play and work every day some. Take a nap every afternoon. When you go out in the world, watch out for traffic, hold hands and stick together. Be aware of wonder. Remember the little seed in the Styrofoam cup: the roots go down and the plant goes up and nobody really knows how or why, but we are all like that. Goldfish and hamsters and white mice and even the little seed in the Styrofoam cup - they all die. So do we. And then remember the Dick-and-Jane books and the first word you learned - the biggest word of all - LOOK. Everything you need to know is in there somewhere. The Golden Rule and love and basic sanitation. Ecology and politics and equality and sane living. Think what a better world it would be if we all - the whole world - had cookies and milk at about 3 o'clock in the afternoon and then lay down with our blankies for a nap. Or if all governments had as a basic policy to always put things back where they found them and to clean up their own mess. And it is still true; no matter how old you are, when you go out in the world, it is best to hold hands and stick together. [Source: "ALL I REALLY NEED TO KNOW I LEARNED IN KINDERGARTEN" by Robert Fulghum. See his web site at http://www.robertfulghum.com/ ] B. De facto segregation and its relationship to busing. 1. More discrimination by contact with hostile whites is often cited as the result of forcing people to go to school together. C. Mass public education involves assimilation and the Americanization process 1. Students learn a common culture, dress, language in the school system. 2. Steve Kleinberg argues that the current school system has immigrants assimilating much faster than other large immigrant waves in the past 3. Innovation and cultural change involves creating new knowledge and finding ways to use existing knowledge. 4. Because of Academic Freedom and creative thinking, much of new social knowledge that goes on in society is in Higher Education. 5. Using and applying existing knowledge in new ways is also often seen in Higher Education. III. Conflict: Schooling and Social Inequality A. Social-conflict analysis argues that schools routinely provide learning according to students’ social background, thereby perpetuating social inequality. B. Unequal Access to Schooling and Educational Inequality 1. Marx and Engels in The Communist Manifesto argued for universal access to education. 2. Inequality exists among schools in a district and within schools themselves. 3. The Coleman Report and Colman Hoffer argue that attending private schools do offer higher scores, academic achievement and college entrance scores than attending public schools. 4. Kozol’s Savage Inequalities has provided an illustration of inequalities in schools. 5. Wealthy School districts have better buildings, state of the art technology, higher teacher salaries, more ancillary programs such as Art and Music and better sports equipment. C. Educational Credentials: 1. Schools as a Screening Device a. Schools serve as a screening device to fill positions of unequal status. b. Tracking is a basic screening device - placing of students perceived to have similar intelligence and academic abilities in the same classroom. c. Edgar Friedberg has pointed out that while success or failure in schools is certainly determined by skill and ability, sex and ethnicity also play a large part in it. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 105 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 2. Educational and Occupational Opportunities a. Credentialism is the overemphasis on educational credentials for job placement. i. The result is that many individuals are placed in jobs for which they are overeducated. ii. Creation of Credentials- Higher education created the credentialism in today’s society, where the level of education one has achieved is important to do many things. This level of education is assumed to afford the student with all the appropriate knowledge they need for jobs. D. Race is a major factor in determining educational outcomes. 1. "Brown vs Board of Education of Topeka, Kansas" 347 U.S. 483 (1954) is a case history for the facilitation of social and cultural education. 2. It was regarded as a landmark decision of the United States Supreme Court, since it overturned previous established rulings going back to Plessy vs. Ferguson which established Separate but Equal in 1896. 3. It declared that state laws that established separate public schools for black and white students essentially denied black children equal educational opportunities. 4. This ruling which was handed down on May 17, 1954, by Warren Court's unanimous (9-0) decision stated that "separate educational facilities are inherently unequal." 5. As a result, de jure racial segregation was ruled a violation of the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment of the United States Constitution. This began the long process of integration in the schools, which is still not complete. IV. Contemporary Trends in American Education A. Mass Education and Utilitarianism 1. John Dewey argued for the practical aspects of education. 2. education was to produce good workers for society. B. Sociologists are skeptical about the possibility that schools alone can solve society's problems. C. Dilemmas in the Schools and in Higher Education 1. Some social problems in schools include vandalism, physical assaults, shootings and drugs. 2. While violence increased in 1990's, it has plateaued or dropped in 2000’s 3. This school violence is linked to larger social violence, poverty, drug sales, drug abuse, gangs. 4. According to NCES 46% of schools reported a theft/larceny in 2005-6 5. A Nation at Risk discusses its concern for declining test scores and poor academic performance. a. Kindergarten kids least prepared for school in nations history. b. Professors blame students for lack of interest, poor academic ability c. Critics say that Higher education killed the student’s interest. d. Conservatives and liberals have both called for school reform, but have different approaches. D. The Home Schooling Movement 1. Interactive Web based programs will encourage more parents to favor home based education. 2. In home schooling children are not sent to school and receive their formal education from one or both parents 3. The legal aspects of home schooling are intricate and vary by State. 4. Some advantages of home schooling include a. alleviation of school crowding, curricular and pedagogical alternative and strengthening family relationships. b. Home Schooled individuals do have lower drop-out rates, children learn at own rate, and score higher on standardized tests. 5. Some of the disadvantages of home schooling include a. inadequate educational background of parents b. limited technological resources. c. students get a homogenous view of society 6. There are some patterns on who gets home schooling. It more likely to occur if: a. Parents are better educated. b. Family income is lower c. If there are two parents and only one parent is in the labor force d. There are three or more children in the household. e. Family is not White or Hispanic SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 106 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Number and percentage distribution of all school-age children who were homeschooled and homeschooling rate, by selected characteristics: 1999 and 2003 1999 Characteristic Total Homeschooled entirely Homeschooled and enrolled in school part time Enrolled in school less than 9 hours per week Enrolled in school 9–25 hours per week Race/ethnicity2 Black White Other Hispanic Sex Male Female Number of children in the household One child Two children Three or more children Number of parents in the household Two parents One parent Nonparental guardians Parents’ participation in the labor force Two parents, one in labor force Two parents, both in labor force One parent in labor force No parent in labor force Household income $25,000 or less $25,001–50,000 $50,001–75,000 $75,001 or more Parents’ education High school diploma or less Some college or vocational/technical Bachelor’s degree Graduate/professional degree SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 107 Number 2003 Percentage Homedistribution schooling rate1 Percentage distribution Homeschooling rate1 Number 850,000 697,000 100.0 82.0 1.7 100.0 1,096,000 898,000 100.0 82.0 2.2 100.0 153,000 18.0 100.0 198,000 18.0 100.0 107,000 46,000 12.6 5.4 100.0 100.0 137,000 61,000 12.5 5.6 100.0 100.0 84,000 640,000 49,000 77,000 9.9 75.3 5.8 9.1 1.0 2.0 1.9 1.1 103,000 843,000 91,000 59,000 9.4 77.0 8.3 5.3 1.3 2.7 3.0 0.7 417,000 434,000 49.0 51.0 1.6 1.8 569,000 527,000 51.9 48.1 2.2 2.1 120,000 207,000 523,000 14.1 24.4 61.6 1.5 1.0 2.4 110,000 306,000 679,000 10.1 28.0 62.0 1.4 1.5 3.1 683,000 142,000 25,000 80.4 16.7 2.9 2.1 0.9 1.4 886,000 196,000 14,000 80.8 17.9 1.3 2.5 1.5 0.9 444,000 237,000 98,000 71,000 52.2 27.9 11.6 8.3 4.6 1.0 0.7 1.9 594,000 274,000 174,000 54,000 54.2 25.0 15.9 4.9 5.6 1.1 1.4 1.8 262,000 278,000 162,000 148,000 30.9 32.7 19.1 17.4 1.6 1.8 1.9 1.5 283,000 311,000 264,000 238,000 25.8 28.4 24.1 21.7 2.3 2.4 2.4 1.7 160,000 287,000 213,000 190,000 18.9 33.7 25.1 22.3 0.9 1.9 2.6 2.3 269,000 338,000 274,000 215,000 24.5 30.8 25.0 19.6 1.7 2.1 2.8 2.5 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved SOURCE: Princiotta, D., Bielick, S., Van Brunt, A., and Chapman, C. (2006). Homeschooling in the United States: 2003 (NCES 2005–101), tables 1, 2, and 3. Data from U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics, Parent Survey of the National Household Education Surveys Program (NHES), 1999 and Parent and Family Involvement in Education Survey of the NHES, 2003. E. Multicultural Education 1. Multicultural education is a strategy in which students' cultural backgrounds are viewed as positive and essential in developing classroom instruction and school environment. 2. As minority students become the majority, competence in multicultural education for teachers will become more important. Both the number and the percent of students speaking a language other than English and Speaking English with difficulty has been growing. Number and percentage of children ages 5–17 who spoke a language other than English at home and who spoke English with difficulty: Selected years, 1979–2005 Spoke a language other than English at home Spoke English with difficulty1 Year Total population (in millions) Number (in millions) 1979 1989 1992 1995 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 44.7 42.3 47.7 47.5 52.7 52.5 53.0 53.0 53.0 52.9 52.8 3.8 5.2 6.3 6.7 8.8 9.5 9.8 9.8 9.9 9.9 10.6 2005 18.2 Percent of total population Number (in millions) Percent of those who spoke a language Percent of total other than population English at home 8.5 1.3 12.3 1.8 13.2 2.2 14.1 2.4 16.7 2.6 18.1 2.9 18.5 2.8 18.5 2.8 18.7 2.9 18.8 2.8 20.0 2.8 Percentage change compared with 1979 177.9 135.1 118 2.8 4.3 4.6 5.2 5.0 5.5 5.4 5.3 5.5 5.3 5.4 34.2 34.6 34.9 35.8 29.5 30.5 28.6 28.6 29.4 27.9 26.8 91.6! -21.6 SOURSOURCE: U.S. Department of Commerce, Census Bureau, Current Population Survey (CPS), 1979 and 1989 November Supplement and 1992, 1995, and 1999 October Supplement, and American Community Survey (ACS), 2000–05. V. Affirmative Action A. Hopwood 1. Hopwood erased all affirmative action programs from the state of Texas in a very short time. Subsequently, Cheryl Hopwood was not found to be good enough to get into the UT Law School. 2. Affirmative Action is still found in other states and private colleges. 3. In Texas, the top ten percent of any school can go to any state school they want. VI. Computers, Increased Technology and the Mass Media A. There has been an increase in the availability of computers in schools since the mid-1980's. B. In 2000 there was One computer for every 10 students, this has now dropped to 1:4 in Elementary Schools, and 1:3 in High Schools. C. Among other positive impacts, computer assisted instruction increases students' enthusiasm for learning. D. Since 2003 all public schools have had internet access. E. Interactive media can also facilitate student learning. F. Television, while often described in negative terms, is sometimes seen by many teachers as complementary to their teaching. G. The National Assessment of Educational Progress found lower science scores associated with more TV watching. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 108 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved H. According to the NCES Of 18 other countries reporting data, only Scotland had a higher proportion of students report watching 2 hours or more of TV daily than did the United States. The percentage for China (35 percent), the country with the lowest percentage of students who watched television 2 hours or more daily, was 49 percentage points lower than that of the United States (84 percent). I. Some have encouraged schools to develop television literacy in their students. J. 96% of middle and high school teachers use television to complement their teaching 1. Critics have suggested that television encourages: a. passive learning b. reduces homework and reading time c. impedes creativity d. has a powerful hidden curriculum for encouraging the acceptance of the prevailing value system. 2. Postman – researched how watching Sesame Street teaches children to learn to watch TV. K. Computers and Schools 1. There is a big divide between poor urban schools and affluent ones in terms of the availability of computers. VII. Problems in the Schools. A. Almost everyone agrees that schools should teach personal discipline, but only a few think schools are succeeding at this goal. B. Student passivity is promoted in many ways in large bureaucratic school systems. This has many implications for subsequent social life. C. The dropout rate has declined slightly in recent decades; currently about 11 percent of people between the ages of eighteen and twenty-four have dropped out of school. It remains substantial for Hispanics in many urban school districts. Percentage of high school dropouts (status dropouts) among persons 16 to 24 years old, by race/ethnicity: Selected years, 19722005 Race/ethnicity2 Year Total1 White Black Hispanic 1972 14.6 12.3 21.3 34.3 1980 14.1 11.4 19.1 35.2 1985 12.6 10.4 15.2 27.6 1990 12.1 9.0 13.2 32.4 1995 12.0 8.6 12.1 30.0 1996 11.1 7.3 13.0 29.4 1997 11.0 7.6 13.4 25.3 1998 11.8 7.7 13.8 29.5 1999 11.2 7.3 12.6 28.6 2000 10.9 6.9 13.1 27.8 2001 10.7 7.3 10.9 27.0 2002 10.5 6.5 11.3 25.7 2003 9.9 6.3 10.9 23.5 2004 10.3 6.8 11.8 23.8 2005 9.4 6.0 10.4 22.4 SOURCE: U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics. (2007). The Condition of Education 2007 (NCES 2007-064), Table 23-1. D. According to A Nation At Risk, the quality of U.S. education has declined sharply and functional illiteracy, defines as reading and writing skills that are insufficient for everyday life, is widespread. Efforts to curtail it have been only marginally successful. VIII. Recent Issues in U.S. Education. A. School choice proponents advocate such developments as magnet schools, schooling for profit, and charter schools. B. Schooling people with disabilities often involves mainstreaming, or integrating special students into the overall educational program. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 109 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved C. The share of U.S. students aged twenty-five and older has risen sharply in recent years and now accounts for almost half of all people in the classroom. D. Low salaries, frustration, and retirement, as well as rising enrollment and reductions in class size, have combined to create teaching vacancies. IX. Looking Ahead: Schooling in the Twenty-first century. A. Computers and other new types of information technology will continue to be important. B. Technology cannot solve all of our educational problems. C. Education should be More Future Oriented 1. The work of Alvin Toffler, Future Shock and the Third wave. Educational systems should be future oriented by becoming restructured & revolutionized and curriculums revamped D. Changes in Education 1. There will be more nontraditional students. 2. In 2010 Minority Students will make up 1/2 of the student population. 3. The home-schooling movement will increase. 4. There will be an increase in the use of technology in different ways. 5. Education will continue to be a major public agenda item. Module IVC—Religion The vast majority of people in the world believe in something greater than themselves, something awesome, something numinous that creates in the believer a sense of being in touch with or being touched by the supernatural. Sociologists see religion primarily as two things: 1) a societal institution; 2) group/organizational behavior. 321 However, that does not mean that Sociologists do not understand or study the highly symbolic and spiritual nature of religion. What most Sociologists agree on is that religion is created by humans for humans. Again, this statement requires a disclaimer—religion and a deity or deities are not the same thing. Religion is the form of worship or system of belief—the deity being worshiped is part of the expression of the religion but is not the religion. There are more than 5,000 different religions in the world, many of which are sub-divided into a wide variety of sects or denominations. A denomination is the ways in which members of a religion interpret their sacred writings and/or sacred oral traditions. For example, Christianity is the most wide-spread religion in the world, but it is broken into many, many parts—e.g. Catholic, Baptist, Methodist, Lutheran, Presbyterian, Pentecostal, Episcopalian, Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints (Mormons), Church of Christ, Jehovah’s Witnesses, Seventh Day Adventists, and many, many more. Islam, which is the fastest growing major religion in the world, is divided into Sunni, Shi’ite, Sufi, and Wahabi, but 150 years ago, Babaism and Baha’i broke off from Islam to form their own separate religions. In Judaism, there are four major denominations—Orthodox, Conservative, Reform, and liberal/Progressive, but among the Orthodox, there are several different branches each of which has slightly different religious practices from the others. Most major and many minor religions are thus splintered into many factions, each with its own specific set of beliefs and practices. Religion is variously defined as “a system of beliefs and rituals with reference to the sacred which binds people together into social groups . . . any set of coherent answers to human existential dilemmas which make the world meaningful;” 322 and “a set of beliefs, symbols, and practices (e.g. rituals) which is based on the idea of the sacred, and which unites believers into a socio-religious community. The sacred is contrasted with the profane because it involves feelings of awe;” 323 and “a shared, collective way of dealing with the unknown and un-knowable aspects of human life, with the mysteries of life, death, and the difficult dilemmas that arise in the process of making moral decisions . . . the profane consists of all we can know through our senses . . .the sacred encompasses all that exists beyond the everyday, natural world . . . the sacred inspires feelings of awe.” 324 What each of these definitions has in common is that religion is about meaning, it is shared with others, and it bifurcates the world into the sacred and the profane—the supernatural or transcendent and the ordinary. The sacred is the numinous, the transcendent, the supernatural, while the profane is the ordinary, pedestrian, natural, day-today world. French sociologist and father of functionalism Émile Durkheim argued that legitimation of the social structure is the primary purpose of religion; in other words, religion helps to make the social structure acceptable to the members of society. Whenever people gather together into groups that are in general concordance with one another—such as religious services and ceremonies—the existing social structure is maintained because balance has been preserved. Furthermore, religion may include worship of any single deity or group of deities, or symbols such as totems, or even civic religion in which the state or some particular arm of the state becomes so meaningful that the ceremonies and rituals surrounding it have become apotheosized. Durkheim, 325 writing in 1912, posits that ecstatic rituals or celebrations as engaged in by members of traditional peoples are transfiguring, transformational, and indicative of the differentiation between the sacred and the profane: everything is just as though he really were transported into a special world, entirely different from the one where he ordinarily lives, and into an environment filled with exceptionally intense forces that take hold of him and metamorphose him. How could such experiences as these, especially when they are repeated every day for weeks, fail to leave in him the conviction that there really exist two heterogeneous and mutually incomparable worlds? One is that where his daily life drags wearily along; but he cannot penetrate into the other without at SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 110 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved once entering into relations with extraordinary powers that excite him to the point of frenzy. The first is the profane world, the second, that of sacred things. (Durkheim 250) Max Weber wrote that religion serves a social purpose that draws in the individual when a priestly class that serves as an intermediate between the individual and the Gods emerges. Moreover, Weber stated that, often based on patterns of authority, the forms that religion takes differ from one manifestation to another. He argued that traditional religions with their virtually “inviolable norms” are usually associated with highly routinized, rationalized patterns of authority and are often patriarchal and are based in patriarchal societies. According to Weber, charismatic religions are often non-rational and find their foundations with one powerful individual who is capable of gaining and holding the imagination and loyalty (fealty) of the adherents. Moreover, Weber discussed the bureaucratization of religion. The most routinized, rationalized form is the bureaucratic form which may arise out of either traditional or charismatic forms. The bureaucratic form is simply the end result of growth in size and growth of a hierarchical ruling or quasi-ruling priestly (or bureaucratic) class. 326 327 Modern Sociologist Peter Berger equates religion with a “sacred canopy” that arches over all human activity. Religion then, which Berger describes as “the human enterprise by which a sacred cosmos is established,” 328 like culture, is a completely human activity. The sacred cosmos established by religion prevents, or staves off, the terror of the unknown, the deviance, the meaninglessness that would otherwise encroach upon and perhaps destroy culture and society. Once norms and values are established by a group of humans, religion helps to uphold those norms and values by given them a patina of holiness or acceptableness to the holy. 329 It is necessary that agents within any given society internalize the society's norms and values, must find those norms acceptable, must embrace or at least acquiesce to the social structure. This sanction, approval, and approbation by individual agents, as well as groups, on a purely psychologically subjective level, Berger calls the plausibility structure. In other words, the structure of a society must make sense, its Weltanschauung must be ontologically real, it must, as William James might say, have practical applications and practical consequences, it must be functional in order to be acceptable and, therefore, acted upon. 330 Religion, then, is a pathway to the deity and an attempt to make sense out of the senseless and give meaning to the meaningless. In general, the culture of any given society helps to determine the kind of religion that society professes. The two primary forms of religion are monotheism and polytheism. Monotheism is the belief in one, and only one, deity. (The use of the term deity is more accurate than God, Gods, Goddess, Goddesses, totems because it is all encompassing, and refers to all possible objects of worship.) Polytheism is the belief in more than one deity. The three great monotheistic religions in the world are Judaism, Christianity, and Islam. Among the great polytheistic religions are Hinduism, Buddhism, Confucianism, Shinto, and Jainism. Most monotheistic religions are patriarchal and envision their deity as male, omnipotent, omniscient, omnipresent, and transcendent of humanness, whereas polytheistic religions may be either patriarchal or matriarchal, believing in deities that are male, female, simultaneously male and female, animals, places, and things. For polytheists, deities often exhibit human traits and behave in very human ways. Polytheism is essentially a belief system in which the universe is seen as so enormous, dreadful, and unknowable that no single deity can encompass it all. This said, however, most polytheistic religions do have a seminal or original deity or pair of deities or argue that all deities are avatars (representations) of one ultimate, supreme deity. 331 Religions may also be either inclusive or exclusive. Inclusive religions tend to be politically liberal, socially active, and to accept diversity. Inclusive religions, by definition, include everyone. Every member of the society is a potential member of an inclusive religion. Exclusive religions tend to add to their membership through natural increase rather than proselytizing or accepting members from outside their group. Christianity and Islam tend to be inclusive religions whereas Hinduism, Sikhism, Jainism, and Shinto tend to be exclusive. However, within each of the inclusive religions, there are denominations or sects that are extremely exclusive. 332 As a social institution, religion provides a cosmology, a system of morality, a way of answering questions that matter, a community of like-minded or like-believing people, and provides a set of symbols that its adherents recognize and that serves as both a legitimating mechanism and a cohesive device. Because symbols are always representations of other things, the form of the symbol is immaterial and what matters is that the adherents accept the symbol as representative of something sacred— something distinctly and profoundly different from the normal, natural, everyday things of life. For Christians, a major symbol is the cross. During the rule of the Roman Empire, the cross was an instrument of torture and a method of execution, but the reality of the original use of the cross has been transmuted so that today the cross is a symbol of the sacrifice of Jesus and the overwhelming love of God. If the electric chair, rather than the cross, had existed 2000 years ago, Christians might take it as a sacred symbol and wear tiny chairs that light up. All Christians recognize the cross and accept it as a holy, sacred symbol of their deity, their belief, their community. Therefore, the sacred may be any object, person, or place so long as someone believes that that object, person, or place has been, in some way, transformed from the ordinary. 333 Some other relatively common, easily identifiable religious symbols include the Muslim Star and Crescent, the Jewish Magen David, the various Buddha statues and figures, as well as the yellow robes of the Buddhists, the dreadlocks of the Rastafarians, and the turbans of male Sikhs. Consider the following evidence of the apotheosis of Elvis Presley: he is known in most of the industrialized world by only his first name; he is more popular now, twenty-some years after his death, than he was while alive; he has a large world-wide contingent of followers; “sacred” relics, artifacts, and other memorabilia are collected and cherished; he is often referred to as “The King,” he is rumored to have transcended death; his personal history has been revised to make him appear benevolent, charitable, philanthropic, and saintly; there is a shrine erected to his memory and “postulants” make their pilgrimages daily; his “disciples” engage in eleemosynary (charitable) activities in his name; his physical image has undergone a transfiguration; his image is reputed to be seen in visions. In many instances, all of this would be indicative of a deity! Sports, particularly football SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 111 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved and stock car racing, in the US, certainly have “worshipers”—people who “religiously” attend and follow the events both individually and in groups. As an organization, religion is divided into churches (note the Christian term), sects, and cults. Churches include mosques, temples, tabernacles and any other mainstream house of worship/congregation. Churches both see themselves and are seen by others—often society as a whole—as the legitimate, formal, usually bureaucratized manifestation of religion in an otherwise secular (non-religious) society. 334 Within churches, there are often many denominations. Sociologically a denomination is “a large organized religion that is not linked officially with the state or government,” 335 but in religious terms, a denomination is the way in which members of a religion interpret their sacred writings and/or sacred oral traditions—thus, Christianity is a religion with many different denominations including Roman Catholic, Baptist, Methodist, etc.; while Islam has several denominations including Sunni and Shi’ite. Most, but not all, religions have denominations. Sects, on the other hand, are “groups that have broken off from an established church [and] emerge when a faction within an established religion questions the legitimacy or purity of the group from which they are separating.” 336 Shakers, Quakers, Anabaptists, Amish, and Mennonites are Christian sects who all broke away from established churches because they believed the fundamental tenets (doctrines) were not being upheld. Cults (which have an extremely negative image in contemporary American society) are “religious groups devoted to a specific dogma, cause, or charismatic leader.” 337 Some churches, such as the Church of Christ Scientist (Christian Science) originally began as cults. However, cults may also be relatively secular or quasi-religious. The Heaven’s Gate cult believed that a spaceship, cruising behind the Hale-Bopp comet that struck Jupiter in 1997, would pick them up and take them “home.” Ninety cult members committed suicide because they believed that the alien beings would give them new bodies. Cults tend to be relatively loosely organized and are often centered on a specific individual who is seen as charismatic. Charisma was first discussed by Max Weber who wrote that the charismatic leader is seen as having special gifts, powers, or abilities and has been specially favored by the deity and granted special access to the mind of the deity; groups loyal to a charismatic leader generally disband if that leader leaves or dies. Charismatic leadership requires fealty (extreme levels of loyalty often bordering on or crossing the line of fanaticism) from the followers, therefore charisma is not relegated only to religious leaders. 338 Throughout history there have been charismatic secular leaders: Alexander the Great, Julius Caesar, George Washington, Hitler, Stalin, Mao Tse Tung, Kim Il Sung and Kim Jung Il. 339 Unfortunately, many secular charismatic leaders seem also to be human monsters! Because not all leadership is religious, not all religion is sacred. There are secular or civic religions throughout the world such as Communism, Juche or Kimilsungism in North Korea, and animal rights activism. However, even in the United States a form of civic religion is practiced. Notice July 4th parades, presidential inaugurations, and the like—they have a sacred character such as “hymns” (patriotic songs), symbols (the flag), prayers (actual prayers but always invoking the deity to bless the nation), and patterned group responses and activities. As Durkheim wrote: What essential difference is there between an assembly of Christians celebrating the principal dates of the life of Christ, or of Jews remembering the exodus from Egypt or the promulgation of the Decalogue [the Ten Commandments], and a reunion of citizens commemorating the promulgation of a new moral or legal system or some great event of national life? (p. 475) 340 Indeed, we have American flags in our churches and we invoke the deity in Congress. Religion in American life is so caught up with the culture that it is difficult to separate the two. In most countries where there is a primary religious belief the separation between “church” and state is nearly impossible and is often not even desired. Religion is so much a part of human life and human experience that we are socialized into the prevailing socioreligious milieu from the time we are infants. Even people new to the United States know what Christmas is and quickly become accustomed to both sacred and profane Christmas music—this is a clear indication of the overarching presence of Christianity in our otherwise diverse American culture. In India, Hinduism is inextricably linked to the culture, and in Saudi Arabia, the Qur’an (the holy book of Islam) is the basis of the monarchical system of government. Although Israel has a constitution and a parliament (the Knesset), its judicial system is based on the Holy book of Judaism, the Torah. Moreover, in the US and most of Europe, the laws have their basis in the Ten Commandments and the “Golden Rule.” Religion is a complex social fact in almost all societies in the world and is often tightly bound to the culture and the other institutions of society. For many people, practicing their religion is part of their daily activities and brings a sense of stability, eternity, comfort, and community. In many societies, religion is an important, if not definitive, aspect of one’s master status— people have been warring with one another and killing one another over religious differences for thousands of years! For more information on religion go to http://www.adherents.com/, a massive and fairly comprehensive website featuring demographic data about more than 4,600 different religions. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 112 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Largest World Religions—97% of All Largest World Religions 341 Religion Christianity Islam Hindu Secular/Non-Religious/Agnostic/Atheist Buddhism Chinese Traditional Primal Indigenous (Animism) % of Adherents in the World 33% 22% 15% 14% 6% 4% 3% # of Adherents in the World 2.0 Billion 1.3 Billion 900 Million 850 Million 360 Million 225 Million 190 Million Remaining 3% of All Other Largest World Religions 342 Communism Sikh Yoruba Juche (Kimilsungism) Spiritism Judaism Baha’i Jainism Shinto Cao Dai Tenrikyo New Pagan Unitarian and Universalist Scientology Rastafarianism Zoroastrianism 63 Million 23 Million 20 Million 19 Million 14 Million 14 Million 6 Million 4 Million 4 Million 3 Million 2.4 Million 1 Million 800 Thousand 750 Thousand 700 Thousand 150 Thousand Largest Denominations in the World 343 Denomination Catholic Sunni Islam Eastern Orthodox Jinja Honcho Anglican Assembly of God Ethiopian Orthodox German Evangelical Church (EKD) Sikh Juche Southern Baptist Jehovah’s Witnesses United Methodist Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints (Mormons) Seventh Day Adventists Baha’i # of Adherents in the World 1 Billion 875 Million 225 Million 83 Million 68 Million 32 Million 30 Million 27 Million 23 Million 19 Million 16 Million 15 Million 12 Million 11 Million 11 Million 6 Million Largest Religions in the United States 344 Religion Christianity Non-Religious Islam Judaism Agnostic Unitarian and Universalist Buddhist Native American Scientology SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 113 % of Adherents in the US 86% 7.5%` 2.0% 1.8% 0.7% 0.3% 0.4% --------------- # of Adherents in the US 151 Million 13 Million 4 Million 3 Million 1.2 Million 500 Thousand 400 Thousand 47 Thousand 45 Thousand © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Largest Denominations in the United States 345 Religion Catholic Baptist Methodist Lutheran Presbyterian Judaism Pentecostal Episcopalian Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints (Mormons) Church of Christ Jehovah’s Witnesses Symbolic Interactionism Functionalism Conflict Paradigm 1) 2) 3) 4) % of Adherents in the US 26.2% 18.4% 8% 5.2% 2.8% 1.8% 1.8% 1.8% 1.4% # of Adherents in the US 46 Million 34 Million 14 Million 9 Million 5 Million 3 Million 3 Million 3 Million 2.5 Million 1.0% .8% 1.6 Million 1.4 Million The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Religion Religion is “the opiate of the masses.” Religion acts as a drug, which keeps the proletariat from rising up against their oppressors. Religion serves to legitimate the social structure and serves the needs of the elite to oppress the workers. Religion lulls the workers into a false sense of security. 1) Religion (along with the family and law) serves to legitimate (make acceptable) the social structure of any given society. 2) Religion (along with the family and law) helps to maintain social stability and balance by binding people to the normative aspects of their society. 3) Religion (along with law) provides a system of behavioral guidelines for society. 1) Religion is a set of symbols that identify and join adherents. 2) Religion is shared among groups and between individuals. 3) Religion provides meaning. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 114 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Key Terms and Concepts for: Module IVC—Religion Charisma…56 charismatic leader…56 churches…56 civic religions…56 community…56 cosmology…56 cross…56 cults…56 Cults…56 deity…54 denomination…54, 56 denominations…56 dreadlocks…56 Émile Durkheim…55 Exclusive religions…56 fanaticism…56 fealty…56 form of worship…54 group/organizational behavior…54 Inclusive religions…56 Largest Denominations in the United States…58 Largest Denominations in the World…58 Largest Religions in the United States…58 Largest World Religions…57 legitimation of the social structure…55 Magen David…56 master status…57 Max Weber…55 Monotheism…55 monotheistic religions…55 Peter Berger…55 Polytheism…55 polytheistic religions…55 profane…55 religion…54 Religion…54, 55 religion is about meaning…55 religion serves a social purpose…55 representative of something sacred…56 sacred…55 sacred canopy…55 sacred cosmos…55 sacred symbol…56 sects…56 Sects…56 separation between “church” and state…57 shared with others…55 social institution…56 societal institution…54 Star and Crescent…56 symbols…56 system of belief…54 system of morality…56 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Religion…59 turbans…56 Module IVD: Law, Politics, and Government (Compiled and written by Dr. Luis Salinas) I. Government and Politics: Historical Overview. A. Politics distributes power, sets a society’s agenda, and makes decisions. 1. Power is the ability to exercise one’s will over others despite their resistance. 2. Authority is power that people perceive as legitimate rather than coercive 3. The state also has an exclusive right on legitimate force or violence. B. According to Weber the state not only claims a monopoly on violence but the right to punish everyone else that does. 1. Traditional authority is power legitimized by respect for long-established customs and practices. a. This is usually found in more traditional societies such as pre-industrial ones. b. It is done through birth deciding who the next leader will be. c. It is a “we have always done it this way” approach. 2. Rational-legal authority is power legitimized by legally enacted written rules and regulations of political systems. a. This refers to matters agreed to by different people and written into law b. It may be as broad as a national constitution or as narrow as a contract between too people. c. It is also centered on a social status that a person may hold as opposed to the individual themselves.It is also the type of authority found in bureaucracies. d. The rules apply to everyone in the organization or the society. 3. Charismatic authority is power legitimized through extraordinary personal or emotional abilities that inspire devotion and obedience. 4. People may be drawn to this individual because they believe they are exceptional or have been called by a higher power to lead the people. 5. Because these leaders are not following tradition or a written set of laws, they can pose a significant threat to the established order that is based on rational-legal or traditional authority. C. Global Political Systems. 1. Monarchy is a type of political system that transfers power from generation to generation in a single family. It may be a king, queen, or other heredity ruler a. At first these were the rulers of a city-state. b. Influence expanded to cover several City-States which in turn became a region. c. Over time people identifies with these Regions and the modern State came into being. 2. Democracy is a political system in which power is exercised by the people as a whole. It literally means power to the people. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 115 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved a. One of the first examples of democracy was the original city-sate of Athens. However, only adult males were allowed to vote. b. Some Native American tribes were more “democratic” in that they allowed both men and women to participate in the election of their chief. c. Since it is impractical at the national level of a large country such as the United States to have the populace voting on all issues, sometimes a representative democracy is used i. At the beginning, only white, male, landowners were allowed to vote or run for office. This was extended to the non-property owning population, then the African American population and in the beginning of the 20th century women. d. Today it seems inconceivable that gender, social class or race would keep them from voting. D. Authoritarianism is a political system that denies popular participation in government. 1. Totalitarianism is a political system that extensively regulates people’s lives. 1. It involves virtual complete government control and surveillance on all aspects of a social and political life. a. Frequently, no opposing opinions are tolerated. b. In some Middle east countries, individuals who say any negative thing about the royal family are removed from society if they local citizens, or deported if they are foreign citizens. 2. Dictatorship – one person has almost total power over the citizens in a society. Some may be very popular and others rule by fear. II. Politics in the United States. A. Our cultural emphasis on individualism implies the desirability of a small government, but in recent decades the U.S. government has expanded into a vast welfare state. B. Political Parties-Are supposed to represent different ideals in the political process. 1. 34% of Americans see themselves as Democrats, 36 % see themselves as Independents and 29 % see themselves as Republicans. 2. These differences are narrowing. But generally Democrats tend to be more liberal and Republicans tend to be more conservative. 3. Special-interest groups are political alliances of people interested in some economic or social issue. a. These are people who think alike on a particular issue and can can mobilize others for political action. b. Sometimes these groups employ lobbyists to get the legislation in their favor. c. Many lobbyists are former congressional representatives. 4. Political action committees are organizations formed by a special-interest groups, independent of political parties, to pursue political aims by raising and spending money. a. It skirts the laws that require all donations of $1,000 or more to be reported. b. Currently there are some 4,000 PAC’s in the United States. c. Some represent a social interest, such as the environment. d. Many represent the financial and political welfare of specific groups. e. Because of their economic power, they have the attention of Congress. So Congress ends up doing not the will of the people, but the will of the special interest groups. C. Political participation- In general, people vote increasingly less over time. 1. Today less than 60% vote, while at the turn of the century80% voted. 2. People in US vote less than many of the other industrialized countries and even less than some developing countries such as India and Cambodia. Of the 140 countries having parliamentary elections since 1945, US ranked 114th 3. Some states have tried various solutions to this voter apathy. Some have extended the period a person is allowed to vote. Other States like Oregon permit only mail in ballots. 4. Generally the more individuals feel vested in a political system, the more likely they are to vote. 5. The groups most likely to vote in the US are older whites who are more affluent, and educated. 6. Young people tend to vote the least. In 1972, 55% of people under 30 voted. In 200 this number had dropped to 42%. a. Trends in the opinions of America's youngest voters are often a barometer of shifting political winds. According to the Pew research center. The current generation of young voters, who came of age during the George W. Bush years, is leading the way in giving the Democrats a wide advantage in party identification, just as the previous generation of young people who grew up in the Reagan years -- Generation X -- fueled the Republican surge of the mid-1990's. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 116 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved III. IV. Theoretical Analysis of Politics. A. The pluralist model is an analysis of politics that views power as dispersed among many competing interest groups. 1. Robert Dahl found that community power was diffuse. Groups exerting influence in one situation do not in another. a. Failed to account that local leaders belong to national ruling elites. b. Some elites can keep some issues out of the government debate. c. Fails to account for minorities especially African Americans being excluded. d. New communication technologies allow for input from many people. 2. Internet as a Political data source a. People checking candidate facts doubled between 2002 and 2004. b. Internet users search out candidates positions on issues on line. c. Serving to reduce voter apathy d. Public is divided on whether blogs and cell phone pictures are more reliable than traditional new organizations. e. Cyberactivism is having an effect on how people organize and seek support around the world. B. The power-elite model is an analysis of politics that views power as concentrated among the rich. It is linked with the social-conflict paradigm. 1. C. Wright Mills in his book the Power Elite points out that the US is run by the Power Elite, a group of military, industrial and government leaders. In the middle are Legislatures, local leaders and Interest group leaders. At the bottom are the unorganized and exploited masses. 2. G. William Domhoff also focuses on the Power Elite. But he looks at it from the point of view of the leaders in the Social Upper Class, the Corporate Community and Policy-formation organizers. 3. The Marxist political-economy model is an analysis that explains politics in terms of the operation of a society's economic system. a. Industrialized societies are dominated by the relatively small bourgeoisie. All other leaders in government, and military were basically servants of this class. b. All decisions made by the government serve the interests of this class. IV. Power Beyond the Rules. A. Political revolution is the overthrow of one political system in order to establish another. B. Terrorism constitutes the use of random acts of violence or the threat of such violence by an individual or group as a political strategy. 1. May be motivated by group hatred. 2. Intimidation is very important aspect of achieving goal 3. Media is used to achieve attention for the cause. 4. It has been very common in world history and is just getting attention for Americans. 5. It is often used when one group is more powerful than the other. The weaker group cannot compete on an even field with the larger stronger group. It takes on the more powerful adversary through terrorism. V. War is armed conflict among the people of various societies. A. There are three basic models to study War. 1. Macro view- why/how do two countries become involved in conflict 2. Nation-State view – examine how the internal political, cultural and socioeconomic forces interact to create War. 3. Micro view focus on the effect that Was has on social groups and their members. B. Since the Gulf War in 1991, American became more supportive of War. C. War has a significant impact on the world. In the 20th century over 50 million lives were lost. D. Why Nations go to War 1. Cultural tradition of War. That it has been a solution in the past it is a potential solution in the present. 2. Antagonistic situations. This occurs when two nations want the same resources or things. 3. “Fuel” that heats antagonisms to the point where violence breaks out. 4. Revenge- getting back for problems from past conflicts 5. Power-forcing other nations to do their bidding. 6. Prestige-to save face for the nation. 7. Unity- uniting competing social groups in the country. 8. Positions- enhancing their own situation. 9. Ethnicity- to bring back people of the same group that is somewhere else. 10. Beliefs-forcing others to take on religious or political view SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 117 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved VI. Peace is cooperative relations between states as well as the absence of war. A. In the 1990’s most of the conflicts that occurred between countries were within states. B. Reasons for peace include 1. mutual dependence through trade and immigration. 2. NGO’s nongovernmental services wherever they are needed without regard to nationality. 3. Security is maintained through mutual security arrangements not threatening violence. Conclusion Sociology is the study of human behavior in groups and we have identified the major paradigms that guide our research and inform our understanding of the social world in which we live. We have studied the history of Sociology and its roots in the Enlightenment and have learned about the seminal theorists in Sociology and how Sociology differs from the other social sciences. We have briefly looked at social science research methods and how science differs from other ways of knowing. We have learned that culture is learned through the socialization process and that group behavior differs from individual behavior. We have seen how bureaucracies function and learned about different models of the social structure and different types of societies. We have identified and discussed some of the institutions of society such as religion, and how the government constrains our activities vis á vis power elite theories and pluralistic theories, and how the United States government passed segregation laws (made by the ultimate in group in order to consolidate their power). We have taken a look at stratification in the United States and in the world system and have tried to understand, albeit, somewhat superficially, why inequality exists. We have studied racism, sexism, and ageism and have looked at some of the truly horrific consequences of inequality. All in all, we have been introduced to Sociology. It is my hope that you will have learned to look at the world in which you live with new eyes, and, using your critical thinking skills, to be able to analyze the human condition in ways you never before dreamed! Perhaps I will see some of you again in my classes at the University! SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 118 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Index !Kung, 51 “and eek men shal nat make ernest of game”, 30 “She Walketh Veiled and Sleeping,”, 87 “The problem of the 20th century is the problem of the color line”, 78 “The problem of the twentieth century is the problem of the color line,”, 13 “You’ve Got To Be Carefully Taught.”, 79 1964 Civil Rights Act, 79 1965 Voting Rights Act, 79 5 largest countries in Western Europe, 62 A Few English Words with Non-English Roots, 31 AARP, 94 abominations of the body, 51 Achieved statuses, 45 ACT, 14 active euthanasia, 97 Activity Theory, 96 actors, 50 acts, 50 Adopted or fictive kin, 103 Affirmative Action, 108 age structure, 74 ageism, 94, 95 Ageism, 96 ageist stereotypes, 96 agents of socialization, 38 aging, 93 Agrarianists, 43 Alcoholism, 93 alien” relocation, 82 ALL I REALLY NEED TO KNOW I LEARNED IN KINDERGARTEN, 104 Amazing Grace: The Lives of Children and the Conscience of a Nation, 64 American core values, 34 Amish, 51 An Extremely Simplified Model of the Hawthorne Experiment, 26 androgyny, 88 Anomie, 53 anticipatory socialization, 38 apartheid, 79 Applied Sociology, 13 ascribed (unearned and socially defined) master status, 79 ascribed master status, 79 ascribed status, 88 Ascribed statuses, 45 Assimilation, 80 audience, 50 August Comte, 11 Authoritarianism, 116 Authority, 19 Baby Boomers, 93 baseline, 24 basic steps in the scientific method, 21 Berdache, 103 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 119 Betty Friedan, 96 Bilateral descent, 103 biological differences and physical differences, 87 birth rate, 74 Blau and Duncan, 64 blemishes of individual character, 51 body language, 30 Bourgeoisie, 12 Brahman, 59 Brown v. Board of Education of Topeka, 79 bureaucracy, 13, 43, 48 C. Wright Mills, 9, 10, 13, 60 capital punishment, 52 case studies, 27 caste system, 59 categorical ideas, 78 causality, 25 cause and effect, 20 cause and effect relationship, 24 changes in personality, 93 characteristics of bureaucracies, 48 Charisma, 112 Charismatic authority, 115 charismatic leader, 112 Charles Dickens, 42 Charles Horton Cooley, 14, 37, 46, 47 Charles Murray, 64 Charlotte Perkins Gilman, 87 Chicago School of Sociology, 13 churches, 112 civic religions, 112 Civil Rights Movement of the 1960s, 88 civil unions, 103 class system, 59 class, status, and power, 12 clinical depression, 93 closed form, 59 Code of Ethics, 28 coercive power, 59 cognitive culture, 29 cognitive dissonance, 80 cohort, 93 cohort effect, 93 collection and analysis of data, 27 colonialism, 71 Colonialism, 72 community, 111 Community and Society, 43 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Groups, 46 Comparison of Richest to Poorest Countries Based on Selected Demographic Characteristics, 74 Computers, Increased Technology and the Mass Media, 108 concentration camps, 79 conceptual definition, 24 Conflict model, 9 Conflict Paradigm, 40, 72 Conflict perspective, 96 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Conflict Perspective, 88 confounding variables, 25 consanguinal marriage, 103 Consanguineous kin, 103 consequences of ageism, 97 consequences of racism, 82 conspicuous consumption, 61 Conspicuous consumption, 61 conspicuous leisure, 61 Conspicuous leisure, 61 content analysis, 27 control group, 24 Cooley’s Looking-Glass Self, 50 Core, 72 Correlational studies, 25 Correlations, 25 cosmology, 111 Countercultures, 35 creaming effect, 60 Crimes against Consumer, Environmental Crime, Institutional Corruption, Fiduciary Fraud, Crimes by the Government, Corruption of Public Officials, Medical Crime, and Computer Crime, 51 Critical thinking, 10 cross, 111 cults, 112 Cults, 112 Cultural assimilation, 80 Cultural Lag Hypothesis, 31 Cultural relativism, 35 Cultural universals, 31 culture, 4, 29, 50 culture of poverty, 64 Culture Shock, 35 Dalit, 59 data concerning the death penalty specifically and the criminal justice system in general, 52 Davis-Moore debate, 60 de facto, 79 De facto discrimination, 79 De facto segregation and its relationship to busing, 105 de jure, 79 de jure discrimination, 79 dead languages, 31 Dead Languages, 31 define the problem, 24 degradation ceremony, 38 deity, 110 Democracy, 115 denomination, 110, 112 denominations, 111 dependency theory, 71 dependent population, 74 Dependent Variable, 24 Depression Kids, 93 Descent, 103 Deterrence theory, 52 develop a conclusion, 28 Deviance, 49 Dewey Wins, 28 Dictatorship, 116 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 120 Differential association theory, 55 direct personal discrimination, 79 discrimination, 79 Discrimination is a behavior, 79 dominant group, 79 double blind study, 24 dreadlocks, 111 Dred Scott Decision, 77 Durkheim, 12, 53 DV, 24 Dworkin and Dworkin, 79 dyad, 48 dysfunctional or negative consequences of deviance, 50 E. Digby Baltzell, 60 economic determinism, 41, 43 Educational and Occupational Opportunities, 106 Educational Credentials, 105 educational system, 38 elderly compete with younger members of society, 96 elite model, 60 Elizabeth Kübler-Ross, 97 Émile Durkheim, 9, 12, 110 Epistemology, 19 Erving Goffman, 38, 51, 55, 79 essential characteristics of groups, 78 estate system, 59 Ethnicity, 79 ethnicity is self-defined, 79 ethnocentrism, 35, 80 ethnographic interviews, 27 ethnophaulisms, 79 Eugenics movement, 11 euthanasia, 97 Examples of Difference in a Few Cultural Universals, 32 examples of Groupthink, 48 Exclusive religions, 111 Experience, 19 Experimental designs, 27 experimental group, 24 experimental method, 24 expulsion, 82 face work, 38 face-work, 55 factors involved in increased suicide rates, 53 Fair Housing Act, 79 Faith, 19 family, 38 family, education, religion, law/politics/government, the economy, medicine, and media, 46 Family, Education, Religion, Politics/Law/Government, the Economy, Medicine, and Media, 6 family-like relationships, 94 fanaticism, 112 fealty, 112 female genital mutilation, 89 femininity, 87 Feminism, 87 feminization of poverty, 62 Feral children, 36 Ferdinand Tönnies, 43 fertility rate, 74 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved FGM, 89 First generation Americans, 81 First World, 70, 72 five largest states, 62 folkways, 93 Folkways, 35, 50 form of worship, 110 Formal social control, 50 Forms of stratification, 59 formulation of the hypothesis, 24 four basic elements of the social structure, 45 four characteristics of total institutions, 38 four elements of deviance, 50 four major castes, 59 four qualities of minority groups: 1) identifiability 2) differential power 3) differential and pejorative treatment 4) group awareness, 79 four relativisms of deviance, 50 four stages: 1) doubt; 2) search for alternatives; 3) departure; 4) creation of a new identity, 46 four statistical measures of inequality, 70 Four Statistical Measures of Inequality in the World, 73 four systems of stratification, 59 Four Theories of Sociostructural Change, 45, 39–47 four types of suicide, 53 Franz Boas, 35 Frederick Engels, 42 Fritz Machlup, 20 functional or positive consequences of deviance, 50 Functionalist model, 9 Functionalist paradigm, 96 Functionalist Paradigm, 10, 40 Functionalists, 88 functionality of stratification, 60 Functions of Schooling, 104 Game Stage, 37 gay, 88 Gemeinschaft, 51 Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft, 43 Gen X, 93 gender, 87 Gender, 87 gender differences in role continuity, 96 gender identity, 88 gender roles, 88 Gender roles, 87 General deterrence theories, 52 Generalized Other, 38 Genie, 36 Genocidal Monsters and Their Crimes, 85 Genocide, 82 Georg Simmel, 9, 13, 47 George Herbert Mead, 13, 37 George Ritzer, 10, 48 Gerhard Lenski and Jean Lenski, 43 glass walls, 88 glass-ceiling, 88 Global Political Systems, 115 goal of science, 20 Goffman, 38 goods of society (wealth, power, and status), 8 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 121 goods of society—wealth, power, and status, 70 Gordon W. Allport, 78 Gossip, ridicule, shame, 51 Grey Panthers, 94 Gross Domestic Product, 70 Gross National Product, 70 Ground in the Mill, 42 group, 46 Group Polarization Phenomenon, 48 group relationships, 47 group size determines the quality of group relations, 47 group/organizational behavior, 110 groups, 45 Groupthink, 48 Affinal kin, 103 Hard Times, 42 Harriet Martineau, 11 Hawthorne effect, 25 Hawthorne Effect, 25 Hawthorne experiment, 25 Helen Rose Ebaugh, 46 Herbert Blumer, 14, 39 Herbert Gans, 64 Herbert Spencer, 11 Heterosexuality, 88 hidden curriculum, 104 Hijra, 103 Hispanic women, 88 Hispanics, 86 Hochschild and Anne Machung, 88 homophobia, 88 homophobic, 88 Homosexuality, 88 homosocial reproduction, 88, 89 Hopi, 51 Hopwood, 108 Horticulturalists, 43 How to Observe Manners and Morals, 11 Dilemmas in the Schools and in Higher Education, 106 Home Schooling, 106 Hull House, 13 Human Institutions, 6 human subjects committees, 28 NCES, 109 Hunter-Gatherers, 43 Problems in the Schools, 109 hypothesis, 24 I, 37 ideal culture, 30 Ideal Types, 12 If the World Were A Village of 100 People, 71 Immanuel Wallerstein, 71, 72 immigrants, 80 Immigration Act, 79 Impression management, 38 Inclusive religions, 111 income, 60 independent rule, 71 Independent Variable, 24 indicators of stratification, 94 indirect institutional discrimination, 79 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved individual acts, 39 individualism, 116 Industrial Societies, 43 infant mortality rate, 74 infant mortality rates, 70 Informal social control, 51 information rich and information poor, 43 in-group, 47 institutions of society, 38 Institutions of Society, 6 inter-group relations, 47 INTERPRET, 14 intervening variables, 25 Involuntary social control, 50 iron cage, 13 Iron Law of Oligarchy, 48 Irving Janis, 48 isolated individual, 48 IV, 24 Jane Addams, 13 Jim Crow laws, 79 Jonathan Kozol, 64 just taking up space, 46 Karl Marx, 9, 11, 12 Karl Marx’s View of the Social Structure, 41 Kingsley Davis and Wilbert E. Moore, 60 Kinship, 103 knowledge acquisition, 19 Korematsu Decision, 77 Kshatriya, 59 Labeling theories, 56 labor power, 12 lack of jobs creates poverty, 64 Language, 30 language acquisition device, 30 Language enables people to store culture, 31 Language is dynamic, 30 Largest Denominations in the United States, 114 Largest Denominations in the World, 113 Largest Religions in the United States, 113 Largest World Religions, 113 Latent Functions, 104 Law, 50 laws, 50 laws of association, 78 legal boundaries, 47 legitimating mechanisms, 12 legitimation of the social structure, 110 lesbian, 88 Lester Ward, 13 Liberty Needs Glasses, 54 life chances, 70 life expectancy rates, 70 Lifestyles of the Rich and Famous, 60 linguistics, 30 literacy rates, 70 literacy tests, 78 lobbying group, 94 Looking Glass, 51 Looking Glass Self, 36, 37 Looking-Glass Self, 14, 88 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 122 Losing Ground, 64 Machlup’s conclusion, 20 macrolevel approach, 13 Magen David, 111 Maggie Kuhn, 94 mainstream feminism, 87 major dimensions of stratification, 59 majority status is unmarked or unstigmatized, 79 Manifest Functions, 104 Margaret Mead, 87 Margaret Sanger, 13 Marriage, 103 Marx’s model of the social structure, 41 Mary Daly, 87 masculinity, 87 Mass Education and Utilitarianism, 106 mass media, 38 Mass public education, 105 master status, 45, 47, 58, 112 Master Status, 9, 34, 45 Master Statuses, 58 material culture, 29 Matrilineal descent, 103 Matrilocality, 103 Max Weber, 9, 12, 43, 48, 59, 111 McCarran-Walter Act, 79 Me, 37 ME, 37 Mead's generalized other, 50 mechanical solidarity, 12 Mechanical solidarity, 12 Melvin Tumin, 60 mental categories, 78 mercantilism, 72 Merton’s Theory of Deviant Responses to Anomie, 55 Merton’s Typology of Deviant Responses to Anomie, 55 Michael Harrington, 43 microlevel approach, 13 Milgram, 28 Mind, Self, and Society, 13, 37 Minorities, 88 minority group, 79 minority status, 79 Minority-Majority, 86 Model of the Experimental Method, 25 Modern feminism, 87 modern natural and social sciences, 11 Modernization Theory, 72 Monarchy, 115 Monotheism, 111 monotheistic religions, 111 Mores, 35, 50 most damaging form of deviance, 52 most recent modern women’s movement, 88 Multicultural Education, 108 Multinational Corporations, 72 myths of the asexual and uninterested elder, 96 natural sciences, 20 Nature vs. Nurture, 36 Nazi Holocaust, 11 Negative Correlation, 26 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved negative social sanctions, 52 neocolonialism, 71 Neolocality, 103 net migration rate, 74 neutralization of deviance, 55 No Correlation, 27 Noam Chomsky, 30 non-material culture, 29 normative culture, 29 norms, 50, 93 Norms, 35, 49 objective/external, coercive, and concrete, 40 objectivity, 20 Occam’s Razor, 20 Old age, 93 oldest-old, 93 old-old, 93 oligarchy, 48 one-to-one (1:1), or perfect correlation, 25 open form, 59 operational definition, 24 Operationalizing, 24 organic solidarity, 12 Organic Solidarity, 12 Oscar Lewis, 64 ostracism, 51 out-group, 47 owners of private property, 12 owners of the means (land, labor, capital) and modes (technologies) of production, 12 paradigm, 9 paradigms, 9 Paradigms, 10 Paradigms and theories, 9 Participant observation, 27 passive euthanasia, 97 Pastoralists, 43 Patrilineal descent, 103 Patrilocality, 103 patterns of primary and secondary structural assimilation, 77–87 Peace, 118 Peer groups, 38 Per capita, 70 per capita GDP, 70 per capita GNP, 70 performing the role, 45 Peripheral, 72 personal power, 59 Peter Berger, 111 physical boundaries, 47 place, 50 Planned Parenthood, 13 Play Stage, 37 playing the role, 46 Plessy v. Ferguson, 77 pluralist model, 117 pluralistic model, 60 pogroms, 82 Political action committees, 116 political activism, 94 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 123 Political participation, 116 Political Parties, 116 Political revolution, 117 Politics, 115 Politics in the United States, 116 Poll taxes, 78 Polytheism, 111 polytheistic religions, 111 population, 27 portrayals of the elderly on television, 95 Positive Correlation, 26 Positive Philosophy, 11 Positivism, 11 Postindustrial Society, 43 postponed violence, 52 post-test, 24 poverty, 62 poverty is functional, 64 power, 47, 60 POWER, 86 Power Beyond the Rules, 117 Power elite theories, 60 power-elite model, 117 prejudice, 79 Prejudice is an attitude, 79 Preparatory (Imitative) Stage, 37 pre-test, 24 Primary deviance, 56 primary elements of culture, 34 primary group, 46 Primary structural assimilation, 80 process of becoming human, 36 productive capacity, 74 profane, 110 Proletariat, 12 property offenses, 50, 51 public order offenses, 51 Pure Sociology, 13 qualitative research, 24 Qualitative research designs, 27 quantitative research, 24 Quantitative research designs, 27 questionnaires, 27 Race, 78 race is defined by others, 78 Racism, 78, 79 radical lesbian feminism, 87 Ralph Nader, 52 random sample, 27 rationalization, 13 Rational-legal authority, 115 REACT, 14 real culture, 29–36 Recent Issues in U.S. Education, 109 Reliability, 25 religion, 110 Religion, 38, 110, 111 religion is about meaning, 110 religion serves a social purpose, 111 representative of something sacred, 111 representative sample, 27 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved research design, 27 research objectives, 24 resocialization, 38 resocialize, 37 reviewing the literature, 24 rites of passage, 38 Robert Merton, 54, 80 Robert Merton’s Typology of Bigotry (Prejudice and Discrimination), 80 Robert Michels, 48 role conflict, 46 role exit, 46 Role Taking, 37 Rosabeth Moss Kanter, 88 Rosenblum and Travis, 79 Rosie the Riveter, 88 Rosoff, 52 rule by a few, 48 sacred, 110 sacred canopy, 111 sacred cosmos, 111 sacred symbol, 111 same sex marriage, 103 Sampling, 27 Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis, 30 Schooling, 104 Schooling in the Twenty-first century, 110 Science, 4 scientific inquiry, 20 scientific method, 21 scientific research, 19 second generation Americans, 81 Second World, 70, 72 secondary analysis, 27 Secondary deviance, 56 Secondary group, 46 Secondary structural assimilation, 80 sects, 112 Sects, 112 Semi-Peripheral, 72 separation between “church” and state, 112 SES, 9, 35, 45, 47, 58 seven criteria for comparing the social (soft) sciences to the natural (hard) sciences, 20 Sex, 87 sex-appropriate behavior, 88 Sexism, 87 sexual activity, 93 shared with others, 110 Shift Phenomenon, 48 Shudra, 59 Significant Others, 37 single blind study, 24 situation, 50 six degrees of separation, 46 six types of societies, 43 slave system, 59 social acts, 39 social and cultural expectations that are associated with a person’s sex, 87 social bonding theory, 55 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 124 social boundaries, 47 Social boundaries, 47 social construct, 78 social control, 50 social control theories, 55 Social Darwinism, 11 Social differentiation, 59 social disengagement theory, 96 Social Dynamics, 11 social expectations, 87 social imperative, 11 Social inequality, 59 social institution, 111 social institutions, 45 Social institutions, 46 Social Institutions, 4–9 social interaction, 39–47 Social labels, 56 Social learning theories, 55 Social mobility, 64 Social networks, 46 social position, 45 social positions, 46 Social positions, 59 social power, 59 social role, 46 social roles, 45, 46 Social roles, 93 social science, 4 social sciences, 5, 20 Social Statics, 11 social status, 45 Social stratification is a form of inequality in which categories of people are systematically ranked in a hierarchy on the basis of their access to scarce but valued resources, 59 social structure, 39, 40 Social structure, 39 Socialization, 36–39, 36 socialization process, 36 socially and not numerically defined, 79 Societal attitudes toward aging, 95 societal institution, 110 society, 4, 30, 48 society is a mirror in which the individual is reflected, 14 sociocultural evolution, 43 Socioeconomic Status, 9 socioeconomic status of women, 96 Sociological explanations of the aging process, 96 Sociological Imagination, 10 Sociology, 4, 9–19 Sociology is a science, 19 Some, 16 Special-interest groups, 116 species, 78 Specific deterrence theory, 52 spouses caring for each other, 94 spurious variables, 25 stage theory of the development of the self, 37 stages of dying, 97 standard of living, 70 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Star and Crescent, 111 Status, 60 Status/Prestige, 59 statuses, 45 Statuses, 45 Stigma, 51 stigmatized, 79 strain theory, 53 stratification, 96 Stratification, 58–70, 96 stratification hierarchy, 58 stratification is dysfunctional for society, 60 stratified random sample, 27 Street crime, 52 street crimes, 51 strength of the relationship, 25 structural discrimination, 79 Structural theories, 53 subculture, 35 Subculture theory, 96 Subcultures, 35 subjective interpretation, 27 subjective, abstract, and constantly changing, 40 subjects, 24 suicide, 53, 93 Suicide, 12 suicide rates, 53 superficial physical differences, 78 surveys, 27 survival of the fittest, 11 Sykes and Matza, 55 Sykes and Matza’s Techniques of Neutralization of Deviance, 56 symbol of women working in jobs that had traditionally gone to men, 88 Symbolic Interactionist model, 9 Symbolic Interactionist paradigm, 14, 96 Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm, 13, 40 Symbolic Interactionist perspective, 88 Symbolic Interactionist theory, 96 symbols, 111 system of belief, 110 system of morality, 111 tabula rasa, 36–39 Terrorism, 117 that which is perceived to be real is real in its consequences, 79 The 62 Poorest Countries in the World, 75 the ability to control the labor of others, 12 The Bell Curve, 64 The Chicago School, 13 The Communist Manifesto, 12 The Conflict Paradigm, 9 The Declining Significance of Race, 64 The Dysfunctionality of Stratification, 60 The Enlightenment, 9, 11 The Flea, 50 The Fountain of Age, 96 The Functionality of Stratification, 60 the goods of society (wealth, status, power), 59 the Iron Cage of Bureaucracy, 48 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 125 The McDonaldization of Society, 48 The Power Elite, 60 The Scientific Method: The Steps and Sub-Steps Explained, 21 The Second Coming, 53 The Second Shift, 88 the Self, 37 The Sociological Imagination, 9, 10, 13 The Souls of Black Folk, 13 The Symbolic Interactionist Paradigm, 10 The Theory of the Leisure Class, 60, 61 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Bureaucracies, 49 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Deviance, 57 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of Religion, 114 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of September 11, 2001 Terrorist Attacks, 16 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Explanations of the Socialization Process, 39 The Three Sociological Paradigms: Views of the Social Structure, 41 The Truly Disadvantaged, 64 The War Against the Poor, 64 Theoretical Analysis of Politics, 117 theoretical responses to the existence of bureaucracies, 48 theories of the causes of poverty, 64 theory, 10 third generation Americans, 81 Third World, 70, 72 Thomas’ Theorem, 14, 58 Thomas’s Theorem, 79 Thomas’s Theorem, which states that things perceived to be real are real in their consequences, 78 Thomas’s Theorem—that which is perceived to be real is real in its consequences, 80 Thorstein Veblen, 60, 61 three basic types of crimes, 50 Three Major Sociological Paradigms, 15 three primary types of norms, 50 three types of crimes listed by the FBI, 51 three types of groups, 48 time, 50 total institution, 38, 93 Totalitarianism, 116 Tracking, 105 Tradition, 19 traditional American assimilation pattern, 81 Traditional authority, 115 Trail of Tears, 79, 82 triad, 48 tribal stigma, 51, 79 Tupac Shakur, 54 turbans, 111 Tuskegee Experiment, 11 two components of the Self, 37 two types of discrimination, 79 types of social interaction, 39 Types of Societies, 44 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Typology of Prejudice and Discrimination (Bigotry), 80 A Nation at Risk, 106 ultimate in group, 62 ultimate in-group, 47, 79 Unequal Access to Schooling and Educational Inequality, 105 United States is inarguably the richest nation in the world, 62 Vaishya, 59 Validity, 25 value-free research, 12 value-free theories, 12 Values, 34 variable, 24 variables, 24 verbal symbols, 30 verification, 20 Verification, 20 Verstehen, 12 Victor, 36, 37 violent crime, 50, 51 Voluntary social control, 50 W. E. B. DuBois, 13 W. I. Thomas, 58 SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 126 W.E.B. DuBois, 78 War, 117 WASP, 60 Wealth, 60 wealth, power, and status, 59 Weber, 60 welfare state, 116 When Work Disappears, 64 white collar crime, 52 White collar crime, 51 White Collar Crime, 51 white ethnics, 81 William Butler Yeats, 53 William F. Ogburn, 29, 31 William Foote Whyte’s Street Corner Society, 27 William I. Thomas, 14 William Julius Wilson, 64 William of Ockham, 20 working classes in Manchester, 42 World Systems Theory, 71, 72 xenocentrism, 35 xenophobia, 35 young-old, 93 Zimbardo, 28 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved End Notes and References 1 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 2 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 3 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 4 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 5 A paradigm is a model; a viewpoint or perspective; a particular way of looking at the world; a specific pattern of thought, belief, or understanding; an archetype; a Weltanschauung. Paradigms are much broader than theories, and are the driving mechanisms behind the development of theories in all scientific disciplines. For example, if we believe that the earth is flat (a paradigm), then we develop methods (theories) of navigating on a non-curved surface, and we devise explanations (theories) for the transit of extra-planetary bodies. Unfortunately, in every day parlance, we often use the word “theory” as if it was synonymous with the word “paradigm,” which regularly leads to confusion. 6 The National Opinion Research Center (NORC) out of the University of Chicago, and the Inter-University Consortium for Political and Social Research (ICPSR) out of the University of Michigan, are two national social science research organizations whose findings are often used in public policy and public information forums. 7 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 8 Source A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. p. 266. 9 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 10 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 11 Master Status includes race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, disability, and SES (socioeconomic status which is inclusive of the combined effects of income, occupation, and education). Master Status is a ranking that combines several factors to assess peoples’ positions in the stratification hierarchy (levels of social acceptance by the dominant group). Of all the statuses a person occupies, it is the one that largely defines who that person is, and what his or her goals and opportunities are. All people have at least one and possibly several Master Statuses. For example, this writer occupies several statuses in society: white, married, female, middle-aged, upper middle class, professor of Sociology and her Master Status (as is true with most people) is the way in which she defines herself to herself and others. Master Status includes those elements we are born with (ascribed statuses) as well as those we accomplish or attain through our own efforts (achieved statuses). Ascribed statuses include those aspects of ourselves that we are born with and that we do not generally change such as our race/ethnicity, sex, eye color and shape, hair texture, and basic physical appearance (phenotype). Achieved statuses on the other hand are those aspects of ourselves that require us to do something to accomplish such as our adult income, education, and occupation (SES). One’s Master Status, or the Master Status one chooses to present, is sometimes situationally dependent. For instance, this writer’s Master Status as a professor of Sociology generally becomes evident only when performing the role of professor of Sociology. Her Master Status as a white female, although always evident, is largely ignored unless whiteness or femaleness becomes a particular situational issue. 12 Everyone has master status—the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! It is not about social acceptability as such. Various parts of our master status make us more or less acceptable, more or less privileged vis á vis the dominant group, but everyone has race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, ability/disability, and SES (income+education+occupation) whether or not they are part of the dominant group. Consider a Hispanic doctor in the 1930s—his (note the male pronoun) master status as a doctor (SES) is privileged but his master status as a Hispanic (race/ethnicity) is not, vis á vis the dominant group. Both minorities and dominant group members have master status—to reiterate, the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! 13 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 127 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 14 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 15 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 16 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 17 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 18 Weltanschauung—a German word which, literally translated, means worldview. It is the way one sees one’s own place in the world, one’s understanding of the way their world functions—our expectations of our physical and social universe. One’s Weltanschauung is based on sociohistorical/sociocultural time and place, epistemology, and theology. The Penguin Dictionary of Sociology by Nicholas Abercrombie, Stephen Hill, and Bryan S. Turner defines Weltanschauung as “a term synonymously used with world-vision . . . [to] refer to the set of beliefs constituting an outlook on the world characteristic of a particular social group, be it social class, generation, or religious sect. For example, the worldview of the nineteenth-century [sic] entrepreneur is said to comprise individualism, thrift, a sense of family propriety, moral order and moderate religious devotion” (p. 463). 19 20 21 The Conflict model was derived from the works of Karl Marx and Max Weber. The Functionalist model was developed by Émile Durkheim. The Symbolic Interactionist model was derived from the works of Georg Simmel and Max Weber. 22 The oldest of the Sociological paradigms are the Conflict Paradigm and the Functionalist Paradigm. The Conflict Paradigm argues that all of society is in a constant state of conflict (economic competition), whereas the Functionalist Paradigm posits that all of society is characterized by consensus and stability. Even in the natural sciences this dichotomy exists—is the geophysical world characterized by stability or by change? According to paleontologist and essayist Stephen Jay Gould, the geophysical (geological) world is characterized by long periods of relative stability that are occasionally disrupted by cataclysmic and often (quite literally) world changing events, such as the destruction of the dinosaurs by a massive collision with an asteroid (the dinosaurs were the dominant form of life on this planet for several hundred million years). Gould calls this process of stability interrupted by change, punctuated equilibrium. The essence of Gould’s argument is applicable to the geopolitical (social, human) world. Throughout most of our existence as humans, society seemed relatively stable over time. However, there are world changing, world shattering events which create not only great change but also great crises. How and even if such “punctuated equilibrium” exists has long been the driving question behind the sociological inquiries associated with the four great paradigms. 23 Zeitgeist is a German word which literally means “spirit of the time.” It is the milieu, sociocultural climate, atmosphere, environment, or mood of a specific sociohistorical period. 24 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 25 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 26 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 27 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 28 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 29 John Locke (1632-1704) in The Second Treatise of Government laid the groundwork for Jean Jacques Rousseau’s (1712-1788) The Social Contract. Both of these works questioned the “Divine Right of Kings” and argued that governments are instituted by God but exist only “with the consent of the governed.” A concept central to American democracy and stated in the written Declaration of Independence in 1776 by Thomas Jefferson. 30 Martin Luther (1483-1546), although a pre-Enlightenment figure, developed a new theology in which the church was no longer needed as an intercessor between humankind and God. Luther argued that every man is his own priest, that the spark of the divine is within everyone, therefore, anyone, with proper catechetical education, would be able to interpret God’s will through God’s words without the interference of a corrupt or potentially corrupt hierarchical clergy SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 128 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved ruled from a foreign city. Luther’s Protestant Reformation, which began in 1507), led to the translation of the Bible from Latin into the common languages of the peoples of Europe, which ultimately ushered in an understanding of human beings as individuals and not merely as collectivities—a truly radical and revolutionary concept in human history. 31 32 Locke and Rousseau among others. Locke and Rousseau among others. 33 Epistemology—in philosophy, the theories of the acquisition and maintenance of knowledge; the study of the ways in which knowledge is gained. Epistemology has also been called “ways of knowing.” Some of our “ways of knowing” are: Experience—empirical knowledge gained through the senses and verified through personal experience; Faith—a strong belief in “truths” that can be verified only by personal experience; Tradition— knowledge, often based on faith, that has been passed down from one generation to the next; Authority—knowledge gained by listening to people who are recognized as experts in their fields; Science—knowledge based on empirical evidence gained through direct, systematic observation. 34 Modern science has many of its roots in the work of René Descartes (1596-1650) who “gave four rules for reasoning: (1) Accept nothing as true that is not selfevident. (2) Divide problems into their simplest parts. (3) Solve problems by proceeding from simple to complex. (4) Recheck the reasoning. . . . For Descartes, all knowledge was like a tree—with metaphysics forming the roots, physics the trunk, and medicine, mechanics, and morals the branches—on which the fruit of knowledge is produced” (December 2, 1999.) 35 Much of the Enlightenment/Age of Reason was synchronous with the French Revolution—that bloody period beginning with the storming of La Bastille on July 14, 1789 when the ruling class was swept away in an ocean of blood and society was cleansed of their domination, only, of course, to suffer under a new and equally brutal ruling class during an interval known as The Reign of Terror (1793-1795). Even though the rallying cry of the peasant revolutionaries of France was “Liberté, Égalité, Fraternité” (Liberty, Equality, Brotherhood), it took more than a quarter of a century for France to restabilize following the revolution—the triumph of Napoleon in 1804 and the subsequent Napoleonic Wars throughout Europe aided the destabilization. 36 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 37 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 38 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 39 There is a story that Marx, the eldest child, was not only intellectually precocious but that he was gifted with a rollicking, albeit extraordinarily bizarre, sense of humor. According to the story, he often engaged in long, self-designed comedic performances for his sisters which purportedly sent his mother and sisters into gales of nearly uncontrollable laughter. If this story is true, perhaps he was the original Marx brother and should have been called Reddo! Buchholz, Todd G., New Ideas from Dead Economists: An Introduction to Modern Economic Thought. Plume/Penguin. New York: 1990. Chapter VI. 40 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 41 42 43 44 From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Edited and translated by Hans Gerth and C. Wright Mills. Oxford U.P., New York. 1946/1958. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Edited and translated by Hans Gerth and C. Wright Mills. Oxford U.P., New York. 1946/1958. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Edited and translated by Hans Gerth and C. Wright Mills. Oxford U.P., New York. 1946/1958. Source A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. pp. 698-699. 45 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 46 DuBois, W. E. B. The Souls of Black Folk. Signet. 1995. p. 41. 47 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 48 Masters of Sociological Thought: Ideas in Historical and Social Context. Lewis A. Coser. Harcourt. Fort Worth. 1977. p. 521. 49 Photo of poster courtesy of: http://store.nrm.org/browse.cfm/4,199.html This illustration first appeared in Look magazine in 1964 and is titled “The Problem We All Live With.” SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 129 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 50 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 51 The Columbia World of Quotations. 1996. NUMBER: 42813. “A plurality should not be asserted without necessity.” ATTRIBUTION: William of Ockham (1300–1348), British scholastic philosopher. Quodlibeta Septem. Scriptum in Librum Primum Sententiarum, Opera Theologica, I, p. 74 (c. 1320). So-called “Ockham’s razor.”http://www.bartleby.com/66/13/42813.html.Also stated as “entities must not be multiplied beyond what is necessary.” 52 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 53 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 54 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 55 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 56 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 57 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 58 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 59 60 61 Perrow, Charles. Complex Organizations: A Critical Essay, 3rd Edition New York: McGraw-Hill, 1986. p. 80. Source: http://www.accel-team.com/motivation/hawthorne_02.html Mayo, Elton. The Social Problems of an Industrial Civilization. Salem: Ayer Company. 1988.Chapter IV. 62 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 63 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 64 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 65 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 66 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 67 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 68 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 130 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 69 70 71 William E. Thompson and Joseph V. Hickey. Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: Second Edition. New York: HarperCollins, 1996, p. 164. Carole Wade and Carol Tavris. Psychology: Second Edition. New York: HarperCollins, 1990. pp. 656-658. Ibid. 72 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 73 Source A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. pp. 359-360. 74 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 75 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. Carole Wade and Carol Tavris. Psychology: Second Edition. New York: HarperCollins, 1990. pp. 656-658. 76 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 77 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 78 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 79 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 80 Everyone has master status—the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! It is not about social acceptability as such. Various parts of our master status make us more or less acceptable, more or less privileged vis á vis the dominant group, but everyone has race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, ability/disability, and SES (income + education + occupation) whether or not they are part of the dominant group. Consider a Hispanic doctor in the 1930s—his (note the male pronoun) master status as a doctor (SES) is privileged but his master status as a Hispanic (race/ethnicity) is not, vis á vis the dominant group. Both minorities and dominant group members have master status—to reiterate, the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! 81 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 82 The Penguin Dictionary of Sociology. Nicholas Abercrombie, Stephen Hill, and Bryan S. Turner. Penguin: London: 1994: pp.287-288. 83 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 84 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 85 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 86 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 87 Source A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. P. 43. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 131 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 88 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 89 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 90 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 91 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 92 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 93 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 94 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 95 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 96 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 97 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 98 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 99 Blumer, Herbert. Symbolic Interactionism. 1969. 100 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 101 102 103 Source A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. P. 648-649. After Oettinger. Dickens, Charles. Hard Times. Penguin, London. 1995. 104 Manchester, which was a major manufacturing city of vast proportions, more than tripled its population between 1801 and 1841 which led to a wide variety of social pathologies including, crime, prostitution, and unyielding poverty. Source: Flanagan, William G. Urban Sociology: Images and Structure: 2nd Edition. Allyn and Bacon: Needham Heights, 1990. 105 106 107 108 Flanagan, William G. Urban Sociology: Images and Structure: 2nd Edition. Allyn and Bacon: Needham Heights, 1990. Kozol, Jonathan. Amazing Grace: The Lives of Children and the Conscience of a Nation. New York: HarperPerennial, 1996. The institutions of society are: Family, Education, Religion, Law, Politics, and Government, the Economy, Medicine, and Media. Family, religion, education, law, politics and government, medicine, media. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 132 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 109 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 110 111 Tönnies, Ferdinand. Community and Society (Gemeinschaft und Gesellschaft). Transaction: New Brunswick, 1996. A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. p. 248-249. 112 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 113 114 Adapted from Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. The so-called G-8 nations are: Britain, Canada, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, Russia and the United States. 115 Whereas whiteness is the societal norm and therefore without negative connotations, people of color (racial and ethnic minorities) do not enjoy the same high level of socioeconomic and normative privilege from their Master Status as do whites. In America, whiteness is the unstigmatized or unmarked category. In other words, being white in America is being able to be oblivious to racial and ethnic prejudice and discrimination and to be oblivious to the harm that institutional racism still inflicts. 116 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 117 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 118 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 119 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998.Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 120 121 A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. p. 266. A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. p. 120-121. 122 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 123 Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Table 6.1, p. 154 124 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 125 126 Source A Dictionary of Sociology: 2nd Edition. Ed. Gordon Marshall. Oxford, England: Oxford UP, 1998. p. 317-318. The Penguin Dictionary of Sociology. Nicholas Abercrombie, Stephen Hill, and Bryan S. Turner. Penguin: London: 1994: pp.216-217. 127 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 128 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 129 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 133 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 130 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 131 132 From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Edited and translated by Hans Gerth and C. Wright Mills. Oxford U.P., New York. 1946/1958. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Edited and translated by Hans Gerth and C. Wright Mills. Oxford U.P., New York. 1946/1958. 133 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 134 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 135 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 136 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 137 Profit without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America. Rosoff, Stephen, Henry N. Pontell, Robert Tillman. Profit Without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America. Upper Saddle River: Prentice-Hall. 1998. 138 The Penguin Dictionary of Sociology. Nicholas Abercrombie, Stephen Hill, and Bryan S. Turner. Penguin: London: 1994: pp.287-288. 139 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 140 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 141 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 142 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 143 Donne, John . “The Flea” in The Oxford Anthology of English Literature: Volume I. Eds. Frank Kermode, John Hollander, et al. New York: Oxford University Press, 1973. pp. 1034-1035. 144 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 145 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 146 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 147 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 148 Sutherland, Edwin H. White Collar Crime. New York: Dryden, 1949. 149 This list is reproduced from the Table of Contents from the book Profit without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America. Rosoff, Stephen, Henry N. Pontell, Robert Tillman. Profit Without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America. Upper Saddle River: Prentice-Hall. 1998. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 134 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 150 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 151 152 Source: http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/business/1780075.stm. June 13, 2003. Source: http://www.nationalpost.com/financialpost/story.html?id=4AF8A2EE-8E18-4DF2-9AFD-2E6795910E63. June 13, 2003. 153 Rosoff, Stephen, Henry N. Pontell, Robert Tillman. Profit Without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America. Upper Saddle River: PrenticeHall. 1998. 154 155 Source: http://www.bayarea.com/mld/mercurynews/entertainment/television/6012808.htm. June 13, 2003. Source: http://www.msnbc.com/news/924619.asp?0sl=-22&cp1=1#BODY. June 13, 2003. 156 Rosoff, Stephen, Henry N. Pontell, Robert Tillman. Profit Without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America. Upper Saddle River: PrenticeHall. 1998. 157 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 158 159 Source: http://www.deathpenaltyinfo.org/article.php?scid=8&did=186. June 13, 2003. U.S. Department of Justice. 1997. 160 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 161 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 162 163 Yeats, William Butler. “The Second Coming.” Literature: Structure, Sound, and Sense. Ed. Laurence Perrine. Fort Worth: Harcourt, 1988. p.820. Yeats, William Butler. “The Second Coming.” Literature: Structure, Sound, and Sense. Ed. Laurence Perrine. Fort Worth: Harcourt, 1988. p.820. 164 Byron, George Gordon, Lord. Childe Harold's Pilgrimage in The Oxford Anthology of English Literature: Volume II. Eds. Frank Kermode, John Hollander, et al. New York: Oxford University Press, 1973. pp. 293-307. 165 Shakespeare, William. Julius Caesar. Act III: Scene 1:Line 273 Boston: Dana Estes, 1901. 166 “Perhaps most common today is a note of uncertainty, not a desire to turn back to the past but an anxiety about where we seem to be headed. In this view, modernity seems to be a period of enormously rapid change, a transition from something relatively fixed toward something not yet clear.” Source: Bellah, Robert, et. al. Habits of the Heart: Individualism and Commitment in American Life. Berkeley: UC Press: 1985/1996. p.276. 167 Source: ©2002 The Tupac-Online™ Network. All rights reserved. 168 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 169 Merton, Robert K. American Sociological Review 3 (Oct. 1938): 672-82. 170 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 171 172 Sutherland, Edwin H. American Sociological Review 10, no. 2 (1945): 132-39. Hirschi, Travis (1969) Causes and Delinquency. Berkeley: University of California Press. 173 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 135 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 174 Sykes, G. and Matza, D.A. (1957) “Techniques of Neutralization: A Theory of Delinquency.” American Sociological Review. 22: 664-670. 175 Rosoff, Stephen, Henry N. Pontell, Robert Tillman. Profit Without Honor: White Collar Crime and the Looting of America. Upper Saddle River: PrenticeHall. 1998. 176 177 Becker, Howard S. Outsiders: Studies in the Sociology of Deviance. New York: Free Press, 1963. Lemert, Edwin M. Social Pathology. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1951. 178 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 179 Lemert, Edwin M. Social Pathology. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1951. 180 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 181 182 The Penguin Dictionary of Sociology. Nicholas Abercrombie, Stephen Hill, and Bryan S. Turner. Penguin: London: 1994: pp. 413-414. Power and Privilege: A Theory of Social Stratification. Gerhard Lenski. UNC Press. Chapel Hill. 1984. Italics in original. 183 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 184 Masters of Sociological Thought: Ideas in Historical and Social Context. Lewis A. Coser. Harcourt. Fort Worth. 1977. p. 521. Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 185 186 From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Edited and translated by Hans Gerth and C. Wright Mills. Oxford U.P., New York. 1946/1958. 187 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 188 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 189 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 190 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 191 Davis, Kingsley and Wilbert E. Moore. “Some Principles of Stratification.” In David B. Grusky, Ed. Social Stratification: Class, Race, & Gender in Sociological Perspective. Boulder: Westview Press, 1994. 39-46. Tumin, Melvin M. “Some Principles of Stratification: A Critical Analysis.” In David B. Grusky, Ed. Social Stratification: Class, Race, & Gender in Sociological Perspective. Boulder: Westview Press, 1994. 47-54. 192 Davis, Kingsley and Wilbert E. Moore. “Some Principles of Stratification.” In David B. Grusky, Ed. Social Stratification: Class, Race, & Gender in Sociological Perspective. Boulder: Westview Press, 1994. 39-46. Tumin, Melvin M. “Some Principles of Stratification: A Critical Analysis.” In David B. Grusky, Ed. Social Stratification: Class, Race, & Gender in Sociological Perspective. Boulder: Westview Press, 1994. 47-54. 193 E. Digby Baltzell’s 1964 classic The Protestant Establishment: Aristocracy and Caste in America introduced us to the term WASP—white, Anglo-Saxon Protestant. In his 20 year long study Baltzell found that most of those in positions of power in industry, politics and government, the media, academia, religion, and the military were indeed WASPs and WASP men at that. Other more recent studies tend to indicate that there have been few changes in the racial/ethnic, sexual, or religious make-up of those who wield the most power in the United States—the WASPs still rule! 194 Jonathan Swift (1667-1745) was an ordained minister serving in Dublin, Ireland at St. Patrick’s. “An ardent pacifist who loathed cruelty, imperialism, and war, he wrote many pamphlets,” articles, and essays that specifically addressed various aspects of the egregious inequality rampant in the Ireland of his day. “A Modest Proposal” was a biting satire concerning the inhumanely cruel way in which the ruling British treated the poverty stricken and sometimes starving Irish peasant. Various laws in Britain had been passed which left the Irish peasantry with no legal status and nowhere to turn to ease their crushing poverty. Swift’s essay proposed that the Irish should begin to raise human infants for sale to the British middle and upper classes as food. His point being that British laws and British imperialism were draining the very lifeblood of the Irish peasants. The death rate among Irish children was so high at the time that Swift argued the British were devouring Irish posterity. In Gulliver’s Travels, Swift also scathingly satirized the British Parliament, science, philosophy, and morality. The Houyhnhnms (pronounced “whĭ´ nĭmz to equate to the sound of a whinnying horse) were a civilization of sentient horses who were the ultimate in rationalism—the SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 136 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved philosophical assumption that all knowledge may be gained through the use of reason and that the mind is so constructed as to be capable of rendering the truth in all areas of importance without the use of sense data. A tribal group of animals called the Yahoos lived on the outskirts of Houyhnhnm society and engaged in highly emotional, non-rational, indeed wild and uncontrolled (uncivilized) behavior that was so deeply disturbing to the Houyhnhnms that they enslaved and even killed the Yahoos. Dr. Gulliver was profoundly impressed with the completely rational Houyhnhnms and loathed the Yahoos. He was, in fact, so seriously shocked by the Yahoos that that he hovered precipitously on the edge of insanity when he discovered that he was a Yahoo because the Yahoos were human beings (Swift, Jonathan, Gulliver’s Travels, Penguin Books: London, 1967). 195 Veblen, in Grusky, p. 104. 196 The development of creatures such as lap dogs that are so small and in some cases so physically deformed that they would be unable to live without the support of humans is a case in point. Other than lap dogs, wealthy Victorians (people of Veblen’s time period) had a wide variety of items that existed primarily for their general uselessness or frivolousness. Gazebos were sometimes called follies because they were seldom used and their value was in their obviousness to passersby or visitors. 197 Source: Forbes Magazine. March 18, 2002. pp. 119-145. 198 Source: CIA World Factbook On-Line. January 2, 2002. 199 Source: CIA World Factbook On-Line. April 2003. 200 Source: http://www.census.gov/prod/2003pubs/02statab/income.pdf; June 2003. http://www.census.gov/prod/2003pubs/02statab/pop.pdf; June 2003. 201 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 202 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 203 Gilbert, Dennis and Joseph A. Kahl. The American Class Structure: A New Synthesis, 4th Edition. Belmont: Wadsworth, 1993. Klein, Joe. “The Predator Problem” Newsweek, 29 Apr. 1996, 32. Marger, Martin H. Race and Ethnic Relations: American and Global Perspectives, Third Edition. Belmont: Wadsworth, 1994. Monk, Richard C. Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues in Race and Ethnicity. Guilford: Dushkin, 1994. Murray, Charles. Losing Ground: American Social Policy 1950-1980. New York: Basic Books, 1984. West, Cornel. Race Matters. New York: Vintage, 1993. Wilson, William Julius. The Truly Disadvantaged: The Inner City, the Underclass, and Public Policy. Chicago: Chicago UP, 1987. 204 Hyperghettoization is not a word that Wilson uses, the term however, is one that has come to be of some significance in sociological discussions of the innercity. Basically the term means that “the exodus of black middle-class professionals from the inner-city has been increasingly accompanied by a movement of stable working-class blacks to higher-income neighborhoods in other parts of the city and to the suburbs . . .[leaving] today's ghetto residents [to] represent almost exclusively the most disadvantaged of the urban black community” thereby setting the scene for such pathologies as extremely high percentages of violent criminality, out-of-wedlock births, intractable joblessness, welfare dependency, and lack of job skills. It is the collapse of the institutions of society and pervasive anomic conditions that leads to this condition. 205 Gilbert, Dennis and Joseph A. Kahl. The American Class Structure: A New Synthesis, 4th Edition. Belmont: Wadsworth, 1993. Klein, Joe. “The Predator Problem” Newsweek, 29 Apr. 1996, 32. Marger, Martin H. Race and Ethnic Relations: American and Global Perspectives, Third Edition. Belmont: Wadsworth, 1994. Monk, Richard C. Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial Issues in Race and Ethnicity. Guilford: Dushkin, 1994. Murray, Charles. Losing Ground: American Social Policy 1950-1980. New York: Basic Books, 1984. West, Cornel. Race Matters. New York: Vintage, 1993. Wilson, William Julius. The Truly Disadvantaged: The Inner City, the Underclass, and Public Policy. Chicago: Chicago UP, 1987. 206 Gilbert, Dennis and Joseph A. Kahl. The American Class Structure: A New Synthesis, 4th Edition. Belmont: Wadsworth, 1993. Klein, Joe. “The Predator Problem” Newsweek, 29 Apr. 1996, 32. 207 Kozol, Jonathan. Amazing Grace: The Lives of Children and the Conscience of a Nation. New York: HarperPerennial, 1996. p. 107. 208 Ibid. p. 3. 209 Personal communication with Andrea White, December 2000. 210 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of he U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002. Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 211 212 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 213 This quote is from a speech by Winston Churchill. I have not been able to find the attribution. 214 Special Contribution by 2001 HBU Developmental and Educational Seminar Input by [email protected]. Minor alterations (typos, grammar, etc.) by Walter Stanish. Archived at Pratyeka. 215 Roseberry, William. “Peasants and the World.” In Economic Anthropology. Ed. Stuart Plattner. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1989. pp. 108-126. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 137 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 216 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 217 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 CIA World Factbook On-line. 2002. http://www.cia.gov/cia/publications/factbook/geos/nh.html January 2, 2002. World Population Clock. http://www.census.gov/main/www/popclock.html CIA World Factbook On-line. 2002. http://www.cia.gov/cia/publications/factbook/geos/nh.html January 2, 2002. CIA World Factbook On-line. 2002. http://www.cia.gov/cia/publications/factbook/geos/nh.html January 2, 2002. CIA World Factbook On-line. 2002. http://www.cia.gov/cia/publications/factbook/geos/nh.html Allport Gordon W. The Nature of Prejudice: 25th Anniversary Edition. Perseus: Reading. 1979. p. 171. Allport Gordon W. The Nature of Prejudice: 25th Anniversary Edition. Perseus: Reading. 1979. p. 103; italics in original. 225 The J-curve theory states that the essential attributes of a group—these characteristics that define the group—tend to follow a J-curve type of distribution. Furthermore, a J-curve distribution, by definition, includes only group members—no non-group member can be fitted statistically into the distribution. Allport Gordon W. The Nature of Prejudice: 25th Anniversary Edition. Perseus: Reading. 1979. p. 97. 226 227 DuBois, W. E. B. The Souls of Black Folk. Signet. 1995. p. 41. Ibid. p. 45. 228 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 229 Everyone has master status—the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! It is not about social acceptability as such. Various parts of our master status make us more or less acceptable, more or less privileged vis á vis the dominant group, but everyone has race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, ability/disability, and SES (income+education+occupation) whether or not they are part of the dominant group. Consider a Hispanic doctor in the 1930s—his (note the male pronoun) master status as a doctor (SES) is privileged but his master status as a Hispanic (race/ethnicity) is not, vis á vis the dominant group. Both minorities and dominant group members have master status—to reiterate, the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! 230 Rosenblum, Karen E. and Toni-Michelle C. Travis. The Meaning of Difference: American Constructions of Race, Sex and Gender, Social Class, and Sexual Orientation: Second Edition Boston: McGraw-Hill. 2000. 231 Everyone has master status—the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! It is not about social acceptability as such. Various parts of our master status make us more or less acceptable, more or less privileged vis á vis the dominant group, but everyone has race/ethnicity, sex/gender, age, religion, ability/disability, and SES (income+education+occupation) whether or not they are part of the dominant group. Consider a Hispanic doctor in the 1930s—his (note the male pronoun) master status as a doctor (SES) is privileged but his master status as a Hispanic (race/ethnicity) is not, vis á vis the dominant group. Both minorities and dominant group members have master status—to reiterate, the word “master” has absolutely nothing to do with being a member of the dominant group! 232 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 233 234 Ibid. The source for this line from South Pacific is my own memory. 235 Harrison and Bennett, “Racial and Ethnic Diversity” in Farley State of the Union: America in the 1990s, Volume Two: Social Trends, pp. 157-164). Harrison, Roderick J. and Claudette E. Bennett. “Racial and Ethnic Diversity” In State of the Union: America in the 1990s, Volume Two: Social Trends. Reynolds Farley, Ed. New York: Russell Sage, 1995. 141-210. Farley, Reynolds. The New American Reality: Who We Are, How We Got There, Where We Are Going. New York: Russell Sage, 1996. 236 Harrison, Roderick J. and Claudette E. Bennett. Racial and Ethnic Diversity.” In State of the Union: America in the 1990s, Volume Two: Social Trends. Reynolds Farley, Ed. New York: Russell Sage, 1995. 141-210. Current, Richard N. and T. Harry Williams, Frank Freidel, Alan Brinkley. American History: A Survey, Sixth Edition. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1987.Marger, Martin. Race and Ethnic Relations: American and Global Perspectives: Fourth Edition. Wadsworth: Belmont, CA. 1996. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 138 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 237 Harrison, Roderick J. and Claudette E. Bennett. Racial and Ethnic Diversity.” In State of the Union: America in the 1990s, Volume Two: Social Trends. Reynolds Farley, Ed. New York: Russell Sage, 1995. 141-210. Current, Richard N. and T. Harry Williams, Frank Freidel, Alan Brinkley. American History: A Survey, Sixth Edition. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1987.Marger, Martin. Race and Ethnic Relations: American and Global Perspectives: Fourth Edition. Wadsworth: Belmont, CA. 1996. 238 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 239 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 240 Rosenblum, Karen E. and Toni-Michelle C. Travis. The Meaning of Difference: American Constructions of Race, Sex and Gender, Social Class, and Sexual Orientation: Second Edition Boston: McGraw-Hill. 2000. 241 242 Marger, Martin. Race and Ethnic Relations: American and Global Perspectives: Fourth Edition. Wadsworth: Belmont, CA: 1996. De jure discrimination is discrimination that is supported by laws. It is legal and legally enforced discrimination. 243 De facto discrimination is discrimination that exists in fact even when that discrimination is illegal. The kind of structural discrimination—discrimination based on the racism inherent in the American social structure—that is so prevalent in America today. 244 Harrison, Roderick J. and Claudette E. Bennett. “Racial and Ethnic Diversity” in State of the Union: America in the 1990s Volume Two: Social Trends. Reynolds Farley, Ed. New York: Russell Sage 1995. 141-210. Current, Richard N. and T. Harry Williams, Frank Freidel, Alan Brinkley. American History: A Survey Sixth Edition. New York: Alfred A. Knopf 1987. Marger Martin, Race and Ethnic Relations: American and Global Perspectives: Fourth Edition. Wadsworth: Belmont CA. 1996. 245 Jews have been prevented from joining various clubs living in certain neighborhoods enrolling in certain schools and kept out of certain professions. In some areas of New York during the great white ethnic immigration (circa 1880-1915), signs reading “No dogs or Irish (or Italians) allowed!” were ubiquitous. 246 Ibid. 247 Parts of Mexico have been annexed through war—Texas, Arizona, New Mexico—and parts through treaty—most of California and the Southernmost borders of Arizona and New Mexico through the Gadsden Purchase. The history of Mexico since the coming of the European conqueror/explorers has been fraught with internal strife and external pressure. 248 Harrison, Roderick J. and Claudette E. Bennett. “Racial and Ethnic Diversity” in State of the Union: America in the 1990s Volume Two: Social Trends. Reynolds Farley, Ed. New York: Russell Sage 1995. 141-210. Current, Richard N. and T. Harry Williams, Frank Freidel, Alan Brinkley. American History: A Survey Sixth Edition. New York: Alfred A. Knopf 1987. Marger Martin, Race and Ethnic Relations: American and Global Perspectives: Fourth Edition. Wadsworth: Belmont CA. 1996. 249 250 251 252 253 254 Ibid. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. p. 57. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. 255 Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. 256 Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. 257 Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. 258 Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 139 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 259 Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. 260 Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html. Power, Samantha. “A Problem form Hell”: America and the Age of Genocide. Perennial, New York: 2003. ISBN: 0-06-054164-4. 261 Source: http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/welcome.html 262 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 263 Gilman, Charlotte Perkins. Herland, The Yellow Wall-Paper, and Selected Writings. Penguin: New York . 1999. p. 320. 264 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 265 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 266 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 267 In Melanesia, there are male rite-of-passage rituals in which homosexual behavior is normative. Among the Etoro of New Guinea, homosexual activity is part of the belief system, and heterosexual activity is engaged in sparingly and only for procreation. Bisexuality is sexual attraction to people of both sexes and is normative in parts of Mombassa, Kenya where the activity is based on extreme social differentiation between males and females. 268 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 269 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 270 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 Hochschild, Arlie Russell, and Anne Machung. The Second Shift. Avon: New York. 1989. p. 3. Rosie the Riveter photo courtesy of: http://www.art.com/asp/sp.asp?PD=10059796 Kanter, Rosabeth Moss. Men and Women of the Corporation. New York: Basic Books, 1977. Daly, Mary. Gyn/Ecology: The Metaethics of Radical Feminism. Beacon: Boston. 1990. pp. 156-157. Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 281 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 140 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 282 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 283 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 284 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 285 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 286 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 287 Binstock, Robert H. “A New Era in the Politics of Aging: How Will the Old-Age Interest Groups Respond?” Generations: Journal of the American Society on Aging. 19.3 (1995): 68-74. 288 Hubbard, Pamela, Perla Werner, Jiska Cohen-Mansfield, and Rochelle Shusterman. “Seniors for Justice: A Political and Social Action Group for Nursing Home Residents.” The Gerontologist. 32.6 (1992) 856-858. 289 Hubbard, Pamela, Perla Werner, Jiska Cohen-Mansfield, and Rochelle Shusterman. “Seniors for Justice: A Political and Social Action Group for Nursing Home Residents.” The Gerontologist. 32.6 (1992) 856-858. 290 “Old, But Far From Feeble,” The Economist 12 Mar. 1988: 30. 291 A Profile of Older Americans. (Washington: AARP, Program Resources Department, 1994) 1-9. Rhodebeck, Laurie A. “The Politics of Greed? Political Preferences among the Elderly.” The Journal of Politics. 55.2 (1993): 342-364. 292 INFO-PAK (Washington: American Association of Retired Persons, National Gerontology Research Center, 1995) N. page. “AARP News: Fact Sheet.” (Washington: American Association of Retired Persons, Communications Division, 1995) 1-10. 293 294 295 296 297 298 Kingson, Eric R. “Generational Equity: An Unexpected Opportunity to Broaden the Politics of Aging.” The Gerontologist. 28.6 (1988): 765-772. “Old, But Far From Feeble,” The Economist 12 Mar. 1988: 30. Rosenbaum, Walter A., and James W. Button. “The Unquiet Future of Intergenerational Politics.” The Gerontologist. 33.4 (1993): 481-490. Rosenbaum, Walter A., and James W. Button. “The Unquiet Future of Intergenerational Politics.” The Gerontologist. 33.4 (1993): 481-490. Salant, Jonathan D. “Where the PAC Money Goes.” Congressional Quarterly 15 Apr 1995: 1058-1059. Rhodebeck, Laurie A. “The Politics of Greed? Political Preferences among the Elderly.” The Journal of Politics. 55.2 (1993): 342-364. 299 Binstock, Robert H. “A New Era in the Politics of Aging: How Will the Old-Age Interest Groups Respond?” Generations: Journal of the American Society on Aging. 19.3 (1995): 68-74. 300 Binstock, Robert H. “A New Era in the Politics of Aging: How Will the Old-Age Interest Groups Respond?” Generations: Journal of the American Society on Aging. 19.3 (1995): 68-74. 301 Binstock, Robert H. “A New Era in the Politics of Aging: How Will the Old-Age Interest Groups Respond?” Generations: Journal of the American Society on Aging. 19.3 (1995): 68-74. 302 Binstock, Robert H. “A New Era in the Politics of Aging: How Will the Old-Age Interest Groups Respond?” Generations: Journal of the American Society on Aging. 19.3 (1995): 68-74. 303 304 Butler, Robert N. “Politics versus Policy in the Health Care Debate.” The Gerontologist. 14.5 (1994) 614-615. Kingson, Eric R. “Generational Equity: An Unexpected Opportunity to Broaden the Politics of Aging.” The Gerontologist. 28.6 (1988): 765-772. 305 Neustadtl, Alan. “Interest-Group PACsmanship: An Analysis of Campaign Contributions, Issue, Visibility, and Legislative Impact.” Social Forces. 69.2 (1990): 549-564. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 141 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 306 307 308 309 Rovner, Julie. “‘Pepper Bill’ Pits Politics Against Process.” Congressional Quarterly 4 Jun 1988: 1491-1493. McClaren in Annual Editions: Aging. Ed. Harold Cox. Dushkin: Guilford. 1995. Bell in Annual Editions: Aging. Ed. Harold Cox. Dushkin: Guilford. 1995. Ryan, Cross, Butler, Kirkland, Mayo Clinic in Annual Editions: Aging. Ed. Harold Cox. Dushkin: Guilford. 1995. 310 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 311 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 312 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 313 314 315 Barer in Annual Editions: Aging. Ed. Harold Cox. Dushkin: Guilford. 1995. Barer, Tauber in Annual Editions: Aging. Ed. Harold Cox. Dushkin: Guilford. 1995. Kirkland, Tauber in Annual Editions: Aging. Ed. Harold Cox. Dushkin: Guilford. 1995. 316 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 317 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 318 319 320 321 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Extrapolated from data in The Statistical Abstract of the U.S 2001. On-Line August 13, 2002 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 The Penguin Dictionary of Sociology: Third Edition. Abercrombie, et. al. London: Penguin. 1994. p. 356. A Dictionary of Sociology: Second Edition. Gordon Marshall, Ed. Oxford: Oxford. 1998. p. 562. The Blackwell Dictionary of Sociology: A User’s Guide to Sociological Language: Second Edition. Allan G. Johnson, Ed. Oxford: Blackwell. 2000. p. 259. Durkheim, Emile. The Elementary Forms of the Religious Life. Trans. Joseph Ward Swain. New York: The Free Press, 1965. Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Trans. Talcott Parsons, Intro. Anthony Giddens. New York: Scribner's, 1958. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Trans., Eds., and Intro. H. H. Gerth and C. Wright Mills. New York: Oxford UP, 1946. Berger, Peter L. The Sacred Canopy. New York: Anchor, 1967. p. 25. Geertz, Clifford. Islam Observed: Religious Development in Morocco and Indonesia. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1968. James, William. Pragmatism. Ed. Bruce Kuklick. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1981. 331 Society in Focus: An Introduction to Sociology: 2nd Edition. Thompson, William E. and Joseph V. Hickey. New York: HarperCollins. 1996. Sociology: Sixth Edition. Schaefer, Richard T. and Robert P. Lamm. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Andersen, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. 2000. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 142 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Trans., Eds., and Intro. H. H. Gerth and C. Wright Mills. New York: Oxford UP, 1946. Durkheim, Emile. The Elementary Forms of the Religious Life. Trans. Joseph Ward Swain. New York: The Free Press, 1965. Anderson, Margaret L. and Howard F. Taylor. Sociology: Understanding a Diverse Society. Belmont: Wadsworth. 2000. pp. 440-441. Schaeffer, Richard T. Racial and Ethnic Groups: Census 2000 Update: Eighth Edition. Upper Saddle River. Prentice Hall, 2002. pp. 138-141. ibid. ibid. From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. Trans., Eds., and Intro. H. H. Gerth and C. Wright Mills. New York: Oxford UP, 1946. 339 On the birthday of North Korea’s Kim Jung Il in 2001, there were reports across the country of miraculous lights in the sky, comets, a rain of stars, spontaneous healings, and other remarkable events. 340 341 342 343 344 345 Durkheim, Emile. The Elementary Forms of the Religious Life. Trans. Joseph Ward Swain. New York: The Free Press, 1965. Source: www.adherents.com. August 21, 2001. Source: www.adherents.com. August 21, 2001. Source: www.adherents.com. August 21, 2001. Source: www.adherents.com. August 21, 2001. Source: www.adherents.com. August 21, 2001. SOCI 1301-Student Course Pack, page 143 © Ruth Dunn, 2003-2008—All Rights Reserved